Home

CA850 Ver. 3.20 C Compiler Package Operation UM

1. Value Heeh 2i Meaning 0x1 Pakde at vline section exists 0x2 Dt e vdebug section exists 0x4 E O ela Object is a PIC Position Independent Code object 0x10 eM Re aT Register mode is 22 register mode or 26 register mode 0x20 ee ee Different register modes are mixed 0x40 oe Object is output by romp850 Ox80 jf N Default function call specification call does not use old specification 0x100 jf M _ Uses mask register function 0x200 J U_ The prologue and epilogue runtime libraries use the callt instruction Ox400 fi S The prologue and epilogue runtime libraries use the CTBP for callt instruction 2 Type in program header table 310 Display When v Value Is Specified Meaning 1 Load Segment is loaded into memory 4 Note Segment including auxiliary information User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 3 Type in section header table Display When v A Value Is Specified Meaning 0x1 Progbits Section that corresponds to an entity that contains an actual value in an object file machine language instruction and data with default value 0x2 Symtab Symbol table 0x3 Strtab String table 0x4 Rela Relocation information 0x8 Nobits Section that corresponds to an entity that does not contain an actual value in an object file data without default value 0x9 Rel Relocation information 0x70000000 Gptab Global pointer ta
2. Command Line Options cpu 3201 OK Cancel Help ae 1 Output File o This field is used to specify the name of the object file with extension out to be output If this option is omitted it is assumed that a out is specified A file can also be selected by using the dialog box that is displayed by selecting the Browse button 2 Link Map File m This option specifies the name of the output file when a link map is output A file can be selected by using the dialog box that is displayed by selecting the Browse button By selecting the Edit by Text Editor button the text editor can be displayed and the link map file can be edited Note that this setting takes precedence over Output Link Map m check box on the Option tab 3 Old Style Link Map mo This check box specifies whether the link map of an old version is to be output If this box is checked the link map file specified by Link Map File m is output in the old format 4 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 171 CHAPTER 5 LINKER Library This tab is used to set options related to library of the linker Figure 5 9 Linker Options Dialog Box Library Tab Linker Options File Library Option Others Library I i Library Search Path L MV Link Standard
3. This inserts a nop instruction immediately after the callt instruction It also inserts the mov r31 rO instruction immediately before the switch instruction and reti instruction Example switch mov E31 2 0 switch 150 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 9 8 Xv850patch 8 p8 This inserts a nop instruction between the consecutive sld instructions Example sld b sld b sld b nop sld b 10 9 Xv850patch 9 p9 If instructions a b and c below exist in a row a nop instruction is inserted immediately after the sld instruction b Example add add sra fe sld sld b sad 1 and nop and ice 8B a Of 2 byte instructions mov not satsubr satsub satadd zxb zxh sxh or xor and subr sub add shr sar and shl instructions that write back to a register other than rO and r30 Example add 0x1 r10 Including the instructions that describe a set symbol with LABEL expression or definition after reference and that are expanded to the above instructions Example addi SYM r10 r10 set SYM 0x123 This example is not a chip bug pattern but is subject to patching b The sld instruction that writes back to a register different from those to which the instructions in a write back Example sld b LABEL r11 c An instruction that loads a value to the register to which the in
4. 412 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE A 5 3 Reserved sections In ELF format object files several sections are reserved as reserved sections The following table lists the names section types and section attributes of these reserved sections Table A 8 Reserved Sections NameNote 1 Description Section Type panier az_info_j Information section for AZ850 PROGBITS None az_info_r az_info_ri bss bss section NOBITS AW const const section PROGBITS A data data section PROGBITS AW ext_info Information section for flash external PROGBITS None ROM re link function ext_table Branch table section for flash external PROGBITS AX ROM re link function ext_tgsym Information section for flash external PROGBITS None ROM re link function gptabname Global pointer tableN 2 GPTAB None pro_epi_runtime Prologue epilogue run time call section PROGBITS AX fegmode Register mode information REGMODE None relname Relocation information REL None relaname Relocation information RELA None sbss sbss section NOBITS AWG sconst sconst section PROGBITS A sdata sdata section PROGBITS AWG sebss sebss section NOBITS AW sedata sedata section PROGBITS AW shstrtab String table containing section names STRTAB None sibss sibss section NOBITS AW sidata sidata section PROGBITS AW strtab String table STRTAB None symt
5. A symbol symbol having binding class WEAK is not supported F4058 symbol symbol multiply defined The symbol symbol is defined more than once Caution If PM is used or if the startup file is registered as the source file of the project the following message is displayed symbol __ start multiply defined When PM is used it is assumed that the default startup module is specified if nothing is specified as Startup File on the Compiler Common Options dialog box Take either of the following actions 1 Delete the startup file from the source file registration and specify a startup file as Startup File on the Compiler Common Options dialog box 2 Create a dummy assembler file assemble it and create o file and specify it as Startup File on the Compiler Common Options dialog box F4059 linking of symbol symbol in sdata of sbss attribute section in filei and in other attribute section in file2 is attempted Symbol symbol defined in file7 contradicts the section location of the symbol of the same name defined in file2 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 453 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4060 cannot find entry point symbol symbol specified with e option The symbol symbol specified by the entry point address specification option e cannot be found F4063 ext func ID symbol is already defined as ext func ID symbol in other file The symbol name and ID value specified by the ext_fu
6. F4002 cannot open input file file Input file file cannot be opened F4003 cannot open output file file Output file file cannot be opened User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 451 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4004 cannot create output file file Output file file cannot be created F4005 cannot open directive file file The directive file file cannot be opened F4006 cannot get size of directive file file Retrieval of the size of directive file file has failed F4007 cannot read directive file file Directive file file cannot be read F4008 cannot truncate output file file to have size number The size of the output file file cannot be changed to number bytes F4009 cannot seek output file file Output file file cannot be sought F4010 cannot write output file file The output file file cannot be written F4011 cannot find divicefile string The device file string cannot be found F4012 illegal device file string The device file string is illegal F4013 cannot open device file string The device file string cannot be opened F4014 cannot read device file string The device file string cannot be read F4015 illegal object file Error Number number The object file is illegal F4031 illegal ELF version The ELF version of the specified object file is not a version that can be handled by the Id850 F4032 illegal target machine type The type of t
7. The default output file name is cmeasure csv The CSV format output is as follows Figure 12 14 Function Metrics CSV Format Output Example cxref Command input cxref mc apli c SrcFileList No SrcFileName FilePath l apli c Funcs No FuncName SrcFileNo LineNo Ret1 Arg1 Ret2 Arg2 1 free 0 0 2 main 1 248 int 3 scanf 0 0 3 4 delete 1 217 void void 5 search 1 38 void void Measure No FuncNo FuncSz Clk TClk Stk TStk CalledCnt StkUp StkUpPtr StkUpCnt C1lkUp ClkUpPtr ClkUpCnt StkDw StkDwPtr StkDwCnt ClkDw ClkDwPtr ClkDwCnt 1 8 64 37 37 12 68 2 68 1 4 496 5 4 12 0 0 37 0 0 2 5 208 118 118 12 24 1 24 9 1 237 10 1 12 0 0 118 0 0 3 19 148 71 71 16 72 3 72 11 4 530 15 4 16 0 0 71 0 0 Explanation of Output Contents 1 SrcFileList The name of the source file in which the functions used by the program are defined is output FileName Source file name FilePath Source file path This is output only when the path was specified for the file that was input User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 361 2 3 362 Funcs CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL All of the functions used by the program are output FuncName Function name SrcFileNo Source file number Uses the No value in SrcFileList to indicate the source file in which that function is defined LineNo Line number Indicates the lin
8. User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 83 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to set options related to input to the compiler Figure 3 12 Compiler Options Dialog Box Input File Tab Compiler Options Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Section File Xsec_file Edit l Far Jump File far_jump Edit Command Line Option E 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Section File Xsec_file This specifies a section file name refer to CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR A file name can be set in the text box A space can be used in a folder name but not in a file name Since a section file is divided into several files use a semicolon to delimit file names when specifying two or more file names Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where the file name items can be edited 2 Far Jump File Xfar_jump Use the Xfar_jump option to specify the Far Jump file settings The Far Jump file outputs codes using the jmp instruction for the branch instruction of a function described in the file If the body of the function is in a range to which execution cannot branch by the jarl and jr instructions resulting in an error being output by the Id850 recompile by using this option The file name needs an extension The recommended extension is f
9. m mapfile PM This option outputs as a mapfile the link map that indicates the state of allocation to the memory space of the input and output sections If mapfile is omitted the link map is output to the standard output For details of the link map refer to 5 5 Link Map mo mapfile PM This option outputs a link map that indicates allocation of the input and output sections to the memory space to mapfile in the format of products older than CA850 Ver 2 60 If mapfile is omitted the link map is output to the standard output 160 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 3 3 Library This specifies options related to libraries that are referenced by the Id850 Ldir PM If the I option is specified with this option or after this option in the case of the command line the archive file also called library file specified by the I option is searched starting in the folder dir and then in the standard folders The archive file specified by the I option specified after this option is searched If this option is omitted only the standard folders are searched The Id850 handles the folder where the Id850 is installed the folder at the position of lib850 and the folder at the position of lib850 rXY XY 32 26 22 as the standard folders of libraries lc PM This option specifies whether or not to link the compiler s standard library libc a 1m PM This option specifies whether or not
10. name variable name 6 Line number The definition line number and reference line numbers are listed with the following symbols appended Nline number Declaration line line number Definition line line number Whether it is a declaration or definition or a reference is unknown No symbol Reference line 356 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 6 3 Call tree When a call tree information output option such as c is specified for cxref the functions called by certain functions are output in tree format The output file format is text format or CSV format To directly reference the main important information output the data in text format To reference detailed information in tabular form output the data in CSV format 1 Text format output example If the c option is specified the call tree is output in text format The default output file name is ccalltre st The text format output is as follows Figure 12 11 Call Tree Text Format Output Example cxref Command input cxref c apli c 1 newpage 2 malloc 3 printf 4 exit 5 search 6 insertitem 7 split 8 newpage 1 9 insertitem 6 10 insertitem 6 11 insertsub 12 insertsub 13 insertitem 6 14 split 7 The group of functions to be processed are output in tree format An ampersand is appended to the front of a func
11. sdata section 9 0x100000 4 The Id850 resolves unresolved external references in the output section 5 The Id850 creates the following three types of symbols according to the symbol directive in the link directiveNte User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 155 CHAPTER 5 LINKER Text pointer symbol having the value set to the text pointer tp Global pointer symbol having the value set to the global pointer gp Element pointer symbol having the value set to the element pointer ep Note These symbols are used to set appropriate values to the text pointer tp global pointer gp and element pointer ep before executing the codes created by the CA850 such as in the start up module The element pointer symbol is set by the Id850 after it reads target device specific values from a specified device file 6 The Id850 creates reserved symbols These reserved symbols include the following Start address of each output section Start address with 4 byte alignment of segment exceeding each output section Start address with 4 byte alignment of segment exceeding the created executable object file For details of reserved symbols refer to 5 7 3 Reserved symbols 156 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 2 Operation Method This section explains how to operate the Id850 5 2 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt 1d850 option fi
12. 199 5 7 5 V850 core and V850Ex core 199 5 7 6 V850 core and V850E2 core 199 5 7 7 Mathematics library 199 5 7 8 main function 199 5 7 9 Prologue epilogue runtime library 200 5 7 10 Linking for ROMization 201 5 7 11 Programmable peripheral I O register 202 5 7 12 Option byte 203 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 204 6 1 Flow of Operation 204 6 2 Input Output Files 207 6 3 rompsec Section 208 6 3 1 Types of sections to be packed 208 6 3 2 Size of rompsec section 209 6 3 3 rompsec section and link directive 210 6 4 Creating Object for ROMization 212 6 4 1 Creating procedure default 212 6 4 2 Creating procedure customize 215 6 5 Copy Functions 218 6 5 1 Copy routine 218 _rcopy 219 _rcopy1 220 _tcopy2 221 _rcopy4 222 6 5 2 Example 223 6 6 Operation Method 225 6 6 1 Command input method 225 6 6 2 Method using PM 225 6 7 Types and Features of Options 226 6 7 1 File 227 6 7 2 Options 228 6 7 3 Other 230 6 8 Settings Made via PM 231 6 8 1 ROM Processor Options dialog box 231 File 232 Section 233 Option 235 Others 237 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 238 7 1 Flow of Operation 238 7 2 Input Output Files 239 7 3 Operation Method 240 7 3 1 Command input method 240 7 3 2 Method using PM 240 7 4 Types and Features of Options 2
13. The device file cannot be found F2001 illegal command path The specified command path is incorrect F2002 compiler limit too long command path num Compiler limit The length of the specified path exceeds the limit The maximum value for this processing system is 1024 F2003 out of memory The memory capacity is insufficient F2004 too many errors Compiling has stopped because errors exceeding the specified error count have occurred F2005 cannot open output file file Output file file cannot be opened 428 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F2006 cannot open input file file Input file file cannot be opened F2007 cannot write file file errno num Error of error number num occurred during write to file file F2010 illegal option option The specification of option option is not correct F2011 compiler limit too many option potions num The number of times option option is specified exceeds the limit The maximum value for this processing system is num F2014 Both optioni and option2 cannot be specified option and option2 cannot be specified at the same time F2020 compiler limit scope level too deep num The scope level depth exceeds the limit The maximum depth value for this processing system is 255 levels F2040 compiler limit too many parameters num The function has too many dummy arguments The maximum number of dumm
14. The message number indicates the level of the error that has occurred and the module in which the error occurred The initial character of a message number which indicates the error level has one of the following meanings C Internal error Compilation is always stopped E Error due to syntax error or over compiler limit If errors of this type occur beyond the specified number compilation is stopped Example Undefined variable F Fatal error Compilation is always stopped Example Insufficient memory W Warning Compilation continues Example A variable is referenced before a value is assigned to it User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 415 APPENDIX B MESSAGE The number following the above mentioned characters indicates the module where the error occurred 1 CA850 driver module ca850 front end cafe Assembler as850 Linker Id850 global optimization module opt OJo AJ wl ny code generation module cgen 6000 6499 machine dependent optimization module impr 6500 6999 N pre optimizer popt 8 Others B 1 2 Compiler Cxxxx Internal error xxxx indicates the number of the error Check that this is not a restriction If not contact NEC Electronics Technical Support E1305 cannot remove temporary directory dir The work folder dir prepared for creating a temporary file cannot be deleted E1307 cannot unlink te
15. a Set default option button This button returns the current setting of the dialog box to the default status If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab however Normal format and CSV format remain on 350 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Call database This tab is used to the call database Figure 12 8 Cross reference option Dialog Box Call database Tab Cross reference option Common option Cross reference list Tag information Call graph Function measure Call database Output format 7 File name Default Vv File name cprofile csv Default Set default option Cancel Help 1 Output format If Normal format is checked the analysis result of the call database is output in the text format It is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in the normal format by using the File name edit box The default file name is cprofile dat The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when Normal format is selected If CSV format is checked the analysis result of the call database is output in the CSV format It is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in the CSV format by using the File name edit box The default file name is
16. correct allocation when referencing a segment W4782 segment segment numberi number2 overflowed highest or lowest address of internal memory number3 number4 The area to which segment segment is specified to be allocated number1 number2 exceeds the target machine s internal memory range number3 number4 Supplement This message is changed to an error message by clearing Ximem_overflow warning option This message can be erased by specifying rom_less option only if the cause of the warning is related to the internal ROM W4783 string specified in EP symbol directive ignored string must not be specified in ep symbol directive and is ignored W4784 segment segment numberl number2 overlaps guarded area number3 number4 The area to which segment segment is specified to be allocated number1 number2 overlaps the guard use prohibited number3 number4 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 465 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W4785 segment segment numberl number2 overlaps programmable peripheral I O area number3 number4 The area to which segment segment is to be allocated number1 number2 overlaps the programmable peripheral I O area number3 number4 W4788 section address specification is illegal when address of segment segment is not specified No address is specified for segment segment If an address is specified for a section in a segment specify an address also for the segment W4852 string option n
17. data _dat _dat1 r11 Allocation data _dat2 _dat2 r12 Allocation sdata _sdatl sdatl r13 Allocation sdata _sdat2 sdat2 r14 Allocation to to to to data section is assumed instruction is expanded bss section is assumed instruction is expanded sdata section is assumed instruction is not expanded sbss section is assumed instruction is not expanded User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 279 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 9 3 Operation Method The following describes how to use section files when activating either from the command line or from PM 9 3 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt sf 850 option file1 file2 Can be omitted Pattern in immediately before can be repeated 9 3 2 Method using PM The Section File Generator Options dialog box that is used to set the section file generator options can be displayed via the following methods once a project has been established under PM Select Tool Section File Generator Options Since the section file generator is activated once per project there are no file specific settings The default name of the section file that the section file generator outputs is the project file name with the extension changed to sf It also is possible to use an option to specify the output file name Note that when starting the section file generator from PM
18. sdata or sbss attribute based on the option quasi directive I dir PM This option specifies the folder where the file specified by the file input quasi directive include binclude is searched prior to the folder where the source files are placed If the file was not found in the specified folder or if this option is omitted the folder where the source file is placed the folder where the C language source file is placed and the current folder are searched in that order m PM This option generates an object file that includes information noting use of the mask register function When this function is used the as850 outputs codes on the assumption that an 8 bit mask value Oxff is set to r20 and a 16 bit mask value Oxffff is set to r21 Mask values must be set to the mask registers r20 and r21 by a user program such as the startup routine To decide whether the mask register function is to be used or not the following points must be thoroughly considered Is ita program that outputs many mask codes Two register variable registers are used as mask registers Does this have any effect User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 129 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 0 PM This option executes optimization which rearranges instructions to avoid register and flag hazards refer to the g option If this option is specified with the g option this option is ignored and the g option is valid If this option is specified with the p o
19. 140 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER Difference This tab is used to display the differences between the options for the overall project and individual source options Figure 4 3 Assembler Options Dialog Box Difference Tab Assembler Options sample s Option Difference Same Option Project Whole Option Only ee Source Individual Option Only Command Line Option cpu 3201 g Cancel Help 1 Same Option Options set as options for the overall project and options for individual sources are displayed in the command line format This area is for reference and cannot be written to 2 Project Whole Option Only Options specified as options for the overall project and not as options for individual sources are displayed in the command line format This area is for reference and cannot be written to 3 Source Individual Option Only Options specified as options for individual sources and not as options for the overall project are displayed in the command line format This area is for reference and cannot be written to 4 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 141 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER Remark a Delete Source Option button This button can be selected when option settings for individual source files have been made and i
20. 386 Function Icons for stk850 390 Project File Related Upper Limit Values 397 Intermediate Assembly Language File Related Upper Limit Values 397 Stack Size Specification File Related Upper Limit Values 397 Output File Related Upper Limit Values 398 Stack Size Related Limit 398 Upper Limit Values in Message Display Area 398 Description for Each Parameter 399 Output Format and Content of Adjustment Information 400 Description for Each Parameter 402 Constituent Elements of ELF Header and Their Meanings 407 Constituent Elements of Program Header Table Entries and Their Meanings 408 Constituent Elements of Section Header Table Entries and Their Meanings 409 Section Types and Their Meanings 410 Meanings of Link and Info 410 Constituent Elements of Symbol Table Entries and Their Meanings 411 Relationship Between Indexes and Character Strings in String Table 412 Reserved Sections 413 Formats of Messages Output by stk850 493 Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box 494 SS User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 19 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features of Compiler Package The C compiler package for the V850 microcontrollers contains the following programs C COMPILER ca850 ASSEMBLER as850 LINKER Id850 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR romp850 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER hx850 ARCHIVER ar850 SECTION FILE GENERATOR sf850 DUMP COMMAND dump850 o oN OP a FF
21. 54 Xcase string PM This option specifies a mode in which the code of a switch statement is to be output As string the following can be specified ifelse Outputs the code in the same format as the if else statement along a string of case statements If the case statements are written in the order of frequency or if only a few labels are used select this option Because the case statements are compared starting from the top unnecessary comparison can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased if the case statement that most often matches is written first binary Outputs the code in the binary search format Searches for a matching case statement by using a binary search algorithm If this option is selected when many labels are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed table Outputs the code in a table jump format A table indexed based on the value of a case statement is referenced and a case label is selected depending on the value of the switch statement Execution branches to any case statement at almost the same speed If case values are not used in succession an unnecessary area is created If this option is omitted the compiler automatically selects the optimum format Xword switch PM This option creates one four byte branch table per case label in a switch statement Specify this option to prevent compile errors that would otherwise occur when the s
22. 6 10 7 12 8 13 9 14 10 16 Explanation of Output Contents 1 SrcFileList The name of the source file in which the functions used by the program are defined is output FileName Source file name FilePath Source file path This is output only when the path was specified for the file that was input 358 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 Funcs All of the functions used by the program are output FuncName Function name SrcFileNo Source file number Uses the No value in SrcFileList to indicate the source file in which that function is defined LineNo Line number Indicates the line at which that function s definition begins in the source file Ret1 Retz2 Return values of the function When the analysis cannot be performed nothing is output Arg1 Arg2 Arguments of the function When the analysis cannot be performed nothing is output 3 Calltree The call tree is output FuncNo Function number Uses the No value in Funcs to indicate the function FuncAttr Function attribute Indicates the tree attributes by using a combination of the following numerical values If there is no attribute O is output 0x0001 There is no program description 0x0002 It is a recursive function 0x0004 Omits subsequent tree output 0x0008 Outputs source file name and description star
23. BPC register is specified a warning message is output and this option is ignored Example Xbpc 0x1234 In the above case if the target device is the V850E IA1 the start address of the programmable peripheral O register area is treated as this value shifted 14 bits to the left or Ox48d0000 One value is set for an entire application If you specify Xbpc or bpc when setting options by file make the values the same between files However this option need not be specified for files that do not use the programmable peripheral O register If this option is specified for a target device that does not have programmable peripheral I O register functions or when assembling as a common to V850 core V850Ex core V850E2 core a warning message is output and this option is ignored This option is for determining the address of the programmable peripheral I O register when compiling assembling and does not actually cause a value to be reflected in the BPC register For operation it is necessary to set a value in the BPC register separately using a startup module or the like A sample appears commented out in the startup module included in the package Example For the V850E IA1 specify the following descriptions in the startup module to make the variable portion of the start address of the programmable peripheral I O register 0x1234 and set the flag 0x8000 that enables the use of this function mov 0x9234 r10
24. Cancel Apply Help 1 Analyze file Specify the file subject to analysis by using the edit box Specify the object file out output by the linker The default assumption is as follows If an option is saved the file to which the option is saved is assumed as the file subject to analysis If an option is not saved the target information registered to the project file is displayed Clicking the Browse button displays the Browse for Folder dialog box in which the file subject to analysis can be selected The selected file is displayed in Analyze file In the Browse for Folder dialog box the default position is determined in the following sequence 1 2 3 4 Folder of Analyze file on this tab Path of Output folder on this tab Analyze folder on the Cross reference tab Install folder User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 373 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 2 Output folder Specify the analysis result output destination folder in the edit box The default assumption is as follows Ifan option is saved the output destination of the saved analysis result is assumed Ifan option is not saved the folder in which the project file is placed is assumed If the specified folder does not exist clicking the OK or Apply button opens the folder creation dialog box When the OK button is selected on this dialog box a folder is created Clicking the Browse button
25. Compiler Common Options Dialog Box 69 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box library 69 Compiler Options Dialog Box 80 Compiler Options Dialog Box Individual Source 80 Message Numbers of Messages That Can Be Specified 106 Optimization Processing and Items 117 Assembler Options Dialog Box 136 Assembler Options Dialog Box Individual Source 136 Section Attributes and Their Meanings 145 Correspondence Between CPU Core and p Option 149 Correspondence Between Created Objects and p Options 152 Reserved Section 198 Special Symbols in Ordinary Object File 198 Reserved Sections Packed by romp850 208 Copy Routines 218 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box 231 HEX Format Block Record 243 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box 247 HEX Format Block Record 251 Archiver Options Dialog Box 269 Variable Types and Displays 275 Variable Displays and Their Meanings 276 Types of Sections Specifiable by ca850 277 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box 287 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box dump850 297 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box dis850 317 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box cxref 336 Cross reference Option Dialog Box 340 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box rammap 372 RAM map option Dialog Box 375 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box rammap 378 Windows and Dialog Boxes of stk850
26. LOAD RX V0x3000 rompack SPROGBITS AX rompack i The rompack section s size is estimated using the formula described in 6 3 2 Size of rompsec section to avoid the ROMPACK segment s allocation address from overlapping with adjacent segments This information is reflected in the link directive file 4 Specify Create Object for ROM as a compiler option From command line Add compiler option Xr From PM Check Create Object for ROM on the ROM tab of the Compiler Common Options dialog box This generates code that specifies the same address for label rompack as is specified for rompsec 5 Specify the compiler common option and ROMization processor option From command line As a ROMization processor option specify __rompack for the b option to specify the entry symbol for the ROMization area reservation code From PM Add rompack s or rompack o to rompcrt file on ROM tab of the Compiler Common Options dialog box Describe __ rompack which is the first label of the rompack section into Entry Label b on the Option tab of the ROM Processor Options dialog box 6 Compile and link When the compiler is instructed to create an object for ROMization the library libr a which contains the _rcopy function is automatically linked 216 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 7 Activate the ROMization processor romp850 Use the romp
27. Note This is the value specified by the ext_func quasi directive in the assembly language source file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER zf bootfile PM This option creates a flash side object file from the specified object file as the boot area s object file when using the flash external ROM relink function Specify the boot area s object file as the object file that was specified and created via flash external ROM relink function If this option is omitted a boot area object file is created The ext_table option must be specified in order to use this option Example 1d850 ext_table 0x200 D dfile2 zf boot out o flash out flashi1 o flash2 o0 1 2 3 4 5 The object files flash1 o and flash2 o which are generated from the assembly language source file that are processed for the flash external ROM relink function are linked as objects in the flash area A branch table is created at address 0x200 When linking the information in the boot area s executable object file boot out is referenced boot out is not linked at this time Linking is performed according to the flash area s executable directive file The generated object file name is flash out User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 163 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 3 5 Device This specifies options related to the device of the Id850 X256M V850E PM This option handles the memory space as a 256 M bytes space
28. Specify the edit box with a decimal or hexadecimal value Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the e option Size l This sets the size of the output range specified with the I option Specify the edit box with a decimal or hexadecimal value Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the l option Output Comment v This specifies whether or not to output comments specified with the v option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the v option Any Option This specifies options that cannot be set in the dis850 command options described before This edit box displays in the same format as the command line In addition since all dis850 command related options can be specified in this dialog box it is not necessary to use any other options 9 320 Command Line Option Options specified in the dialog box are displayed in the command line options Since this area is for reference purposes it cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER 11 5 Cautions 1 If labels for the same address exist in the object file the latter label in the symbol table takes priority 2 Ifthe program starts from address 0 and if output of the symbol at address 0 is required during output for an object that does not have a symbol indicating address 0 __ dummy may be output as the symbol of address 0 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 321 11 6 Output F
29. The significance of the letter c is described below l Intel expanded hex format S Motorola type S hex format s Motorola type S hex format 32 bit address T Expanded Tek hex format If this option is omitted Intel expanded hex format is used If the fT option is specified together with the U option the U is ignored User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 243 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER Iname PM This option converts and outputs code in the section specified by the section name name The hex converter converts in section units not in segment units If a section section having the section type NOBITS and section attribute A is specified for the data for which no initial value has been specified null characters 0 are created corresponding to the section s size If this option is omitted code is converted in all sections which correspond to a section type other than NOBITS and which have the section attribute ANote 3 Spaces cannot be used in the section name If this option is specified together with the U option this option is ignored S PM This option converts and outputs symbol table portion This option is valid only when the extended Tek hex format has been specified via the fT option If this option is specified together with the U option this option is ignored U Unum Unum start size Ustart size PM This option converts into hex format and outputs all the co
30. cated refer to Figure 6 3 3 Specify Create Object for ROM as a compiler option From command line Add compiler option Xr From PM Check Create Object for ROM on the ROM tab of the Compiler Common Options dialog box As a result a code that indicates that label __ S_romp indicates the first address that exceeds the end of the text section in the object is generated 212 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 4 Compile and link By specifying Create Object for ROM for the ca850 the ROMization area reservation code rompcrt o that is in lib850 r and libr a that stores the _rcopy function are automatically linked At this time the link ing sequence is relevant Because rompcrt o must be linked at the end of a group of TEXT attributes link it after the libraries specified by the I option for linking if the linker has been activated from the command line If PM is used there is no need to be aware of rompcrt o because it is automatically linked at the end of the TEXT attribute group 5 Activate the ROMization processor romp850 Generate a ROMization module from the executable module completed in 4 by using the romp850 If Create Object for ROM is specified with PM 4 and this is automatically performed and a hex file is gener ated If the compiler package has been activated from the command line the romp850 is activated and a ROMization object is created a
31. is called Function function that is not declared is called This warning message is output only when w2 is specified W2216 Nothing is declared No declarator was specified W2222 Plain int bitfield is treated as unsigned int The bit field of plain int is regarded as unsigned int W2231 Initialization of non auto pointer using non number initializer is not position independent The code for an initialization directive using an initial value other than that of a pointer variable that is not an automatic variable is not position independent This message is output only when w2 is specified Remark This message is output when a code for an initialization command using the default value other than the value of a pointer variable that is not a dynamic variable exists This warning message is supported for a position independent code PIC Example int ip amp I If this is initialized and if ip is an automatic variable a value is assigned during execution Therefore this is a PIC If ip is not an automatic variable a value is determined during compilation and this code is not a PIC Consequently this warning message is output If a program is allocated to the TEXT segment and a variable is allocated to the DATA segment with the CA850 the program branch and variable reference is a TP register or GP register relative code Even if the code is copied to a different address from the address allocated during link
32. is taken out and __s is prefixed to make it a symbol name A symbol name with __e prefixed to the name of that output section is used as a reserved symbol that has the start address beyond the end of a section as a value If the section name begins with however the is stripped and __e is prefixed so that the name becomes a symbol name __end is used as a reserved symbol having a start address beyond the end of a created executable object file The default link directive used by the Id850 uses the following reserved sections as output sections Table 5 1 Reserved Section text pro_epi_runtime data sdata sbss bss sconst const sedata sebss sidata sibss tidata tibss tidata byte tibss byte tidata word tibss word Therefore the Id850 normally creates the following reserved symbols Table 5 2 Special Symbols in Ordinary Object File __end __ebss __econst __ edata __epro_epi_runtime __esbss __esconst __esdata __esebss __esedata __esibss __ esidata __ etext __etibss __etibss byte __etibss word __ etidata __ etidata byte __ etidata word __sbss __sconst __sdata __Spro_epi_runtime __ssbss __ssconst __ssdata __ssebss __ssedata __ssibss __ssidata __stibss __stibss byte __stibss word __Stidata __Stidata byte __ stidata word Caution Of the above symbols only those for which a section exists in the executable file after link processing are
33. option2 option Options option and option2 must not be specified at the same time F1106 cannot specify output file name of Xcre_sec_ data with many source files When inputting two or more source files the output file name of option Xcre_sec_data must not be specified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 427 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F1107 Register rnum is reserved for compiler system Register rnum is reserved for the compiler system F1202 module not found The module module that must be started cannot be found F1203 module exec failed Execution of the module module has failed F1292 too long argument Arguments exceeded 128 bytes when starting module The arguments must be in a command file F1302 file illegal output file name The output file name file specified by the o option must not be the same as an input file name Change the file name F1303 cannot open file file The file file cannot be opened F1304 cannot create temporary directory A working folder for creating temporary files cannot be created F1306 cannot open temporary file file Temporary file file cannot be opened F1309 file illegal output file name of Xcre_sec_ data The output file name file specified by option Xcre_sec_data must not be the same as an input file name Change the file name F1310 cannot create directory dir folder dir cannot be created F1311 cannot find device file
34. s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 399 400 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER Table 14 9 Description for Each Parameter Parameter Description Auxiliary Mark As shown below there are two auxiliary marks to indicate that the feature of the function Recursive function amp Function with a indirect call using a function pointer To specify a certain function name as a candidate for the callee of the indirect call use Callee Function List for Indirect Call in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box The specified function is treated as the same as functions which are called directly Total Stack Size This parameter indicates the maximum size of the stack which may be used during the execution of the function The formula for calculating the total stack size is as follows frame size maximum stack size among those of the callees additional margin recursion depth 2 is output if the stack size is unknown and SIZEOVER is output if the stack size exceeds the limit Frame Size A frame size is the size of the function s own stack frame excluding those of its callee functions If the size is unknown is output Adjustment This parameter indicates additional information about stack size specified to the Information function It is either or both of the additional margin size and the recursion depth time Table 14 10 Output Format and Content of Adjustment Information Output Format De
35. section exceeds the branch destination range The branch instruction exists at offset position offset for section section3 in file file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 455 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4162 output section sectioni is too far from output section section2 value value file file input section section3 offset offset type relocation type The branch instruction from output section section2 to the local symbol allocated to output section section exceeds the branch destination range The branch instruction exists at offset position offset for section section3 in file file F4163 output section sectioni overflowed or illegal label reference for symbol symbol in file file2 value value file file input section section2 offset offset type relocation type symbol is allocated in section sectioni file filel Output section section overflowed In addition the section where symbol symbol was allocated and the label referencing method are illegal symbol is allocated to section7 by file file1 The illegal reference exists at offset offset for section section2 of file file2 F4164 output section sectioni overflowed or illegal label reference for local symbol in file file2 value value file file input section section2 offset offset type relocation type local symbol is allocated in section section1 file filel Output section section overflowed In addition the section where a loca
36. 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki Kanagawa 211 8668 Japan Tel 044 435 5111 http www necel com America NEC Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Blvd Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 408 588 6000 800 366 9782 http www am necel com Europe NEC Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 D sseldorf Germany Tel 0211 65030 http www eu necel com Hanover Office Podbielskistrasse 166 B 30177 Hannover Tel 0 511 33 40 2 0 Munich Office Werner Eckert Strasse 9 81829 Miinchen Tel 0 89 92 10 03 0 Stuttgart Office Industriestrasse 3 70565 Stuttgart Tel 0 711 99 01 0 0 United Kingdom Branch Cygnus House Sunrise Parkway Linford Wood Milton Keynes MK14 6NP U K Tel 01908 691 133 Succursale Frangaise 9 rue Paul Dautier B P 52 78142 Velizy Villacoublay C dex France Tel 01 3067 5800 Sucursal en Espa a Juan Esplandiu 15 28007 Madrid Spain Tel 091 504 2787 Tyskland Filial T by Centrum Entrance S 7th floor 18322 T by Sweden Tel 08 638 72 00 Filiale Italiana Via Fabio Filzi 25 A 20124 Milano Italy Tel 02 667541 Branch The Netherlands Steijgerweg 6 5616 HS Eindhoven The Netherlands Tel 040 265 40 10 Asia amp Oceania NEC Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 010 8235 1155 http www cn necel com NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd Room 251
37. 252 File Configuration in Intel Expanded Hex Format 253 File Configuration of Motorola S Type Hex Format 257 File Configuration of Expanded Tek Hex Format 259 The ar850 s Operation Flow 263 Archiver Options Dialog Box Option Tab 270 Image of Compilation Using Section File Specifications 273 Example of Section File Output by sf850 275 Example of Section File Output by sf850 Using O Option 276 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box File Tab 288 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box Option Tab 289 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box Others Tab 292 Operation Flow of dump850 293 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box Dump Tab 298 Output Index Dialog Box 302 Archive File Options Dialog Box 303 Operation Flow of dis850 Command 313 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box Disassembler Tab 318 Flow of Operation in cxref 323 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box Cross reference 337 Cross reference option Dialog Box Common option Tab 341 Cross reference option Dialog Box Cross reference list Tab 344 Cross reference option Dialog Box Tag information Tab 345 Cross reference option Dialog Box Call graph Tab 346 Cross reference option Dialog Box Function measure Tab 349 Cross reference option Dialog Box Call database Tab 351 Cross Reference Output Example cxref 353
38. 50 50 flib zero 0 0 sub1 260 200 sub2 60 10 10 3 sub2 60 10 10 3 sub c sub4 100 50 flib 50 50 task1 172 100 72 cre tsk 0 0 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 403 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER The followings are incorrect specifications for stack size information If the number of lines in a file exceeds the limit a dialog box appears and an error message is output to the dialog box and the message display area then the reading operation is aborted 404 limit value e g the number of lines in a file characters per line the length of a function name the number of parameters for one function and the value of the stack size is exceeded When function names that are not detined or called explicitly in C source are specified When multiple specifications for one function exists in a file When an argument is not specified for ADD RECTIME or CALL When there is any other parameter than ADD RECTIME and CALL When an incorrect argument other than decimal numbers and hexadecimal numbers that starts with Ox is specified for ADD or RECTIME When an incorrect argument function name is specified for CALL When RECTIME is specified for a non recursive function When multiple function names are specified for onea CALL User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 14 6 3 stk system file The stk system file is a file for saving stack size
39. CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 4 Signed unsigned control option Xbitfield string PM This option specifies whether specifications in int type bit fields that do not indicate the type specifier signed or unsigned are regarded as signed or unsigned specifications The following can be specified as string s Handled as signed signed Handled as signed u Handled as unsigned unsigned Handled as unsigned A warning message is output when the specification is handled as unsigned The specification is handled as signed if this option is omitted Xchar string PM This option specifies whether char type specifications that do not indicate the type specifier signed or unsigned are regarded as signed or unsigned specifications The following can be specified as string s Handled as signed signed Handled as signed u Handled as unsigned unsigned Handled as unsigned The specification is handled as signed if this option is omitted Xenum type string PM This option specifies which integer type the enumeration type matches The following can be specified as string char Treated as char uchar Treated as unsigned char short Treated as short ushort Treated as unsigned short If this option is omitted the enumeration type is treated as signed int User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 53 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 5 Switch case statement output code control options
40. Consequently there is no need to be cognizant of restrictions concerning the option character string length For command files arguments to be specified can be described divided into several lines but do not divide options file names and the like across two lines If this option is omitted it is assumed that no command file has been specified 2 CPU bug patch option Xv850patch num This option specifies the p num option for as850 according to the num specification for an assembly language source file output by the ca850 to output a code corresponding to a CPU fault refer to 4 7 2 Options for avoiding CPU faults The specifiable values for num are 1 2 3 4 4a 5 6 7 8 9 10 and 11 If num has been omitted 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 is assumed as the num specification This option is to avoid faults of the CPU Whether a fault that has occurred is of the CPU used refer to the documents supplied with the CPU Note that only the Xv850patch 11 option is processed by the ca850 If the Xv850patch 11 option is specified the following instructions are not output sett clr1 and not1 Misalign access of V850Ex core V850E2 core during structure packing If these instructions are used in an asm statement and an assembly language source file they are output as is because asm statements and assembly language source files are not checked Also when having specified the Xv850patch 11 option and describing bit a
41. Data without initial value sbss attribute section gp sdata attribute section gp indicates the Data with initial value position of the first data attribute section of the sdata attribute section 32 KB Lower address User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER Therefore the execution efficiency and object efficiency are enhanced if more data is allocated to the sdata or sbss section which can be accessed with a single instruction To allocate data the user can intentionally specify the allocation location by using the pragma section directive in the case of a C language source or by using the section quasi directive in the case of an assembly language source If a threshold value of the size of the data to be allocated to the sdata or sbss section is prepared and if data of a size less than the threshold value can be allocated to the sdata or sbss section more data can be allocated without having to modify the source program This specification is made by the Gnum option of the ca850 or as850 The value specified as num of this option is the data size so it would be convenient to have information that can be used as a yardstick The A option outputs this information If the A option is specified for the Id850 it outputs information that can serve as a yardstick for determining the value of num of the Gnum option Explanation of output information An example of the information output when this option is sp
42. Dialog Box Flash Tab library Compiler Common Options File ROM Flash Device By checking this check box object files of the flash side that uses re linking function of the flash area are created Check isn t necessary with the boot area side and the normal object When it is checked Wa_ zf option of the compiler and zf option of the assembler is set Cancel Help 1 Create Flash Side Archive File When this check box is checked an object file is generated on the flash area side of the flash area relink function This check box does not have to be checked when an object is to be generated on the boot area side and when a normal object is used For details of flash supporting objects refer to 5 6 Flash Memory External ROM Relink Function User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 79 3 6 2 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Compiler Options dialog box The following 12 tabs are displayed in the upper part of the compiler options setting dialog box The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 3 5 Compiler Options Dialog Box Tab Description General Setting of compiler options often used Input File Setting of options related to input to compiler Preprocessor Setting of options related to compiler preprocessing C Language Setting of options related to C language specifications Optimization and Debug Information Setting of optimization level in sourc
43. F8080 not enough memory The memory is insufficient W8101 cannot calculate name s frequency The frequency of use of variable name cannot be calculated This message is output when the variable is not used and when the v option is specified This warning message may be ignored W8111 you use O option sorting option ignored A sorting option and the O option are specified at the same time The sorting option is ignored W8121 unrecognized option option ignored Option option is ignored because it cannot be recognized User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 479 APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 9 Dump command F9001 can not open file file File file cannot be opened F9003 nested command file file Command file file is nested It must not be nested F9024 memory allocation error The memory is insufficient W9102 illegal object file string The object file is incorrect W9121 buffer number error The buffer number is incorrect W9122 illegal option c c must not be specified as an option W9123 illegal option c c must not be specified as an option W9125 not enough argument The number of arguments is insufficient W9126 not enough argument for string The number of arguments for option string is insufficient F9127 Size error The size is incorrect 480 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 10 Disassembler F8801 bad magic file file The specified file is not
44. File merging option Om is specified two or more intermediate language OPTIC programs are merged into one If Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed is specified inline expansion is performed for the functions in the intermediate language OPTIC program The global optimization module opt optimizes the intermediate language OPTIC program The code generation module cgen converts the intermediate language OPTIC program into an assembly language source program The machine dependent optimization module impr optimizes the assembly language source program The assembler as850 converts the assembly language source program into machine language instructions and creates a relocatable object file The linker Id850 links the relocatable object file and creates an executable object file The machine dependent optimization module are called only when the optimization option is specified refer to Figure 3 1 It is assumed that the modules of 1 front end cafe through 5 machine dependent optimization module impr are started from the ca850 Consequently operation is not guaranteed if any of these modules is started alone User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 27 28 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Figure 3 1 Operation Flow of ca850 Om specified Om not specified p Input file processing completed NO Pre optimizer Global optimization module Code generation module O Os Ot spec
45. Note One section definition field must exist in each section A section definition field can be followed by or can follow any of symbol definition fields 260 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER A Section definition field SEDF 0 L B B LL L a b c a Indicates that this field is a section definition field b Number of digits in the base address of a section and the base address of the section c Number of digits in the length of a section and the length of the section B Symbol definition field SYDF T Suad L V V a b c a Type of symbol 1 global address symbol having binding class GLOBAL and type other than ABS 2 global scalar symbol having binding class GLOBAL and type ABS 5 local address symbol having binding class LOCAL and type other than ABS 6 local scalar symbol having binding class LOCAL and type ABS b Number of characters of symbol and the symbol c Number of digits in symbol value and value of symbol Example1 37 3 60 8SVCSTUFFO 2402C6 22CR1D140PEN25014READ25815WRITE260 NL a b c d e f a Block length is 37 b Block type is 3 c Checksum is 60 d Number of characters of section name is 8 and the section name is SVCSTUFF e Section definition field number of digits in the base address of the section is 2 the base address of f the section is 20 the number of digits in the length of the section is 2 and
46. allocated to the tibss word section data If a default value has been set allocation is to the data section If a default value has not been set allocation is to the bss section sdata If a default value has been set allocation is to the sdata section If a default value has not been set allocation is to the sbss section sedata If a default value has been set allocation is to the sedata section If a default value has not been set allocation is to the sebss section sidata If a default value has been set allocation is to the sidata section If a default value has not been set allocation is to the sibss section const Allocation is to the const section sconst Allocation is to the sconst section User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 277 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR Cautions 278 Do not insert blank spaces before or after a section name when specifying the section name in square brackets For example in the case of tidata blank spaces cannot be inserted before or after tidata Enclose a variable name in a section file with double quotate The format of CA850 Ver 2 60 or earlier can be used Only one variable can be used per line Do not modify the code to specify two or more variables per line and do not make one variable specification occupy more than one line Do not insert blank spaces before or after Do not specify the path when specifying file names If a function or variable
47. as follows movhi hil flash _funcO r0 rl 4 byte instruction movea lo flash _funcO rl rl 4 byte instruction jmp r1 2 byte instruction Note that an 8 byte instruction can be used only when the V850Ex core V850E2 core is used because only the V850Ex supports this instruction set When creating an object common to the V850 core V850Ex core V850E2 core when using the cn option always specify 10 192 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 7 Library If a library function is called from the fixed ROM or flash memory the library is linked to the object on the calling side For example even if a library is linked to the flash memory the same library is linked to the fixed ROM if the same library function is called from the fixed ROM When a library function is called therefore a function does not have to be specified by the ext_func quasi directive for the library function because branching does not take place between the fixed ROM and flash memory In a special case where the library linked to the fixed ROM branches to a function in the flash memory however a function must be specified by the ext_func quasi directive For the standard library and mathematical library of the CA850 package a function does not have to be specified by using the ext_func quasi directive 8 Interrupt handler Describe the part that calls an interrupt handler in the area where the addre
48. character must not be specified as a key F8202 bad option character use cv character must not be specified as an option F8203 bad option string string must not be specified as an option F8204 can not create file file File file cannot be created F8205 file namename is too long The length of file name name exceeds the limit F8206 can not open file file File file cannot be opened F8207 can not close file file File file cannot be closed F8208 can not read file file Nothing can be read from file file F8209 can not write file file Nothing can be written to file file F8210 can not seek file file File file cannot be sought F8212 can not nest command file file Command file file is nested It must not be nested F8213 file is not archive file File file is not an archive file F8214 malformed archive file file The contents of archive file file may have been lost F8215 can not find member member Member member does not exist in the archive file F8216 symbol table limit error file numberl1 limit is number2 The number of symbols number7 in archive file file exceeds the limit The limit value is number2 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 477 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F8217 symbol table error file The contents of the archive string table in archive file file may have been lost F8218 string table error file Creating an archive symbol table in archive file file
49. entire range F131 Specify the name of a file to read identifier names A file to read identifier names is not specified by a cross reference option Specify a file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 3 Messages from stk850 This section describes the messages output by the stk850 B 3 1 Message formats The stk850 messages are displayed in the message display area in the following formats Table B 1 Formats of Messages Output by stk850 Number Description E93xx Error message W940x Warning message for all the files W941x W942x Stack size specification file related warning messages W943x Intermediate assembly language file related warning message W945x Output file related warning messages W946x Stack size specification related warning message T95xx Confirmation message B 3 2 Messages E9300 Cannot find project file path The specified project files is not found Check that the file exists E9301 Cannot open file path Check the properties This message appears when the project file or the stk system file is prohibited from being read or when a folder is specified in the path E9302 Illegal format at line line string in file path Check the file line string in the file is an incorrect format This message appears when an incorrect format is found in the project file or the stk system file E9303 Failed to invoke file path The stk850 did not star
50. expect block length after b Specify a block length after b F8606 expect disp value after d Specify an offset value after d F8607 expect input file Specify an input file name F8608 expect output file after o Specify an output file name after o F8609 expect device file path after F Specify a device file path after F F8610 illegal use of option option Option option is specified illegally F8611 nested command file file Command file file is nested It must not be nested F8612 no section data exists in specified address area addressi address2 No section is in the area address1 address2 specified by the U option F8613 file name name is too long The length of file name name exceeds the limit F8620 cannot open file file File file cannot be opened F8621 cannot open output file file Output file file cannot be opened User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 471 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F8622 cannot get section section Section section cannot be found F8623 cannot find device file The device file cannot be found F8624 cannot find device information Information of the device cannot be found F8625 file is not ELF file File file is not an object file in the ELF format F8626 file is archive file File file is an archive file No archive file can be specified F8627 illegal target machine type The type of the target machine is illegal F8628 illegal object fi
51. inelude C include Note 1 When this option is omitted only the standard folder will be searchedN e 2 This option cannot be set independently for each source file and is always used for all files Notes 1 The standard folder is install folder inc850 2 When using the coding format that encloses a file name with the folder where the source file exists is searched first 86 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 2 Define Macro D This uses the macro name name definition value def format to define macro names If the definition value def specification is omitted a value of 1 is assumed as def Example test 2 Macro test is defined as 2 It is assumed that define name def is entered before a C language source program When specifying several macros use semicolons to delimit them Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where define macro names can be edited Spaces cannot be used in the macro name 3 Undefine Macro U Use this to specify macro names to be rendered invalid It is assumed that undef name is entered before a C language source program When specifying several macros use semicolons to delimit them Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where undefine macro names can be edited Example _ 3201 Macro __3201__ is rendered invalid Spaces cannot be
52. it is expanded inline Note that the stack size output by this option is the size in intermediate language output by the pre optimizer and is different from the stack size actually used by the function Wp inline PM This option executes inline expansion of only a function for which pragma inline is specified When Ot is specified the compiler automatically identifies the function and executes inline expansion Specify this option to expand only the function specified by the user Wp no_ inline PM This option suppresses inline expansion of all functions including the function for which pragma inline is specified It is useful for suppressing all inline expansion functions when Ot is specified Wp r funcname This option deletes unnecessary functions from the functions called from an entry function funcname after expansion Specify funcname by prefixing _ to a function described in C If funcname is not specified it is assumed that main is specified The function that is called only by an assembler statement is deleted as an unnecessary function because the calling is not recognized Interrupt functions and real time OS tasks are not included as functions subject to deletion For the relationship between inline expansion and option refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 5 Loop expansion optimization control options Wo O1 num PM
53. mo This option specifies whether the link map of an old version is to be output Its effect is the same as Old Style Link Map mo on the File tab 7 Strip Debug Information s This option creates an object file from which the debug information line number information and global pointer table have been stripped 8 Verbose Mode v This option displays the detailed execution status of the as850 on the Output window It displays lists of objects to be linked 9 Suppress Warning w This option suppresses output of warning messages Only messages concerning fatal errors will be output 10 Ignore Relocation Error E This option outputs a warning message and allows linking to continue if any of the following illegalities is found during relocation processing The result of address calculation of an unresolved external reference is illegal The relationship with section to be allocated is illegal The value of address calculation judged as illegal is not assigned to the unresolved external reference judged as an error the original value remains User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 175 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 11 Check All Multi Defined Symbol M This option outputs a message for all external symbol duplicate definitions and stops linkage If this option is omitted a message is output only for the first duplicate encountered and linkage is stopped 12 Ignore Undefined External Symbol Error t This option ignores checki
54. program If the def specification is omitted the def value is regarded as 1 Up to 256 of this options can be specified E This option executes preprocessing only for a C language source program and outputs the results to standard output The results include the line numbers and file name of the source program Idir PM This option searches the folder dir and the standard folder in that order for the header file of a C language source program Up to 100 of this option can be specified If this option is omitted only the standard folder is searched The standard folder is the install folder inc850 folder If include header file name is described the folder where the source file is stored is searched first P This option executes preprocessing only for a C language source program and outputs the results to a file whose name is the C language source file name plus i as the extension instead of c The source program s line numbers and file name are not output Uname PM When this option is specified it is assumed that undef name is coded before the C language source program Up to 256 of this options can be specified Wa Dname num PM When this option is specified it is assumed that set name num is entered before the assemble source If the num specification is omitted the num value is regarded as 1 Wa I dir PM This option searches the folder dir and the standard folder in that order
55. refer to 4 7 1 Magic number 5 7 7 Mathematics library An error such as an undefined symbol error may be output even when a mathematics library function is used in a program and a mathematics library libm a is subsequently linked This relates to the linking sequence with the standard libraries Since this sequence must comply with the ANSI standard the standard libraries should be linked last Note this with caution especially when starting the linker from the command line Describe the options in the order of the Im and the Ic 5 7 8 main function If linking is performed without first creating a main function an error message may be output to indicate that the _main symbol is an undefined symbol This may occur when the user links the default startup routine crtN o or crtE o V850Ex rather than a user specified startup routine or when the crtN s or crtE s source files that are provided with the package are used as they are for assembly and linkage The error is due to the jarl _main Ip code that is written following crtN s or crtE s If the main function is not needed the user should overwrite this code then use the reassembled object as the startup routine User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 199 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 7 9 Prologue epilogue runtime library The prologue epilogue runtime library must be allocated to the special purpose pro_epi_runtime section If it is not allocated there the linker outputs the follow
56. section2 offset offset type relocation type local symbol is allocated in section sectioni file filel The GP symbol cannot be found in the segment segment Or there is a contradiction in the location reference method of the local symbol Supplement If a section to be allocated by a pragma section specification is changed by a variable definition change a section for the extern declaration of the variable in another file in the same way The local symbol is 454 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE allocated to section of file file1 The reference to the local symbol exists at offset offset of section section2 of file file2 F4156 cannot find GP symbol in segment segment of illegal label reference for symbol in file file2 section section2 offset offset type relocation type symbol is allocated in section sectioni file filel The GP symbol was not specified in the segment segment Or there is a contradiction in the location reference method of the symbol symbol Supplement If a section to be allocated by a pragma section specification is changed by a variable definition change a section for the extern declaration of the variable in another file in the same way The symbol symbol is located at section of file file1 The reference to the symbol symbol exists at offset offset of section section2 of file file2 F4157 cannot find GP symbol in section section of file filei or illeg
57. the area is common to all the files and its section is displayed as Common or GpCommon If the object file to which the input section belongs is an object file in an archive file library the archive file is displayed as the full path name in the following format Object file name archive file name If display in the old format of CA850 Ver 2 60 or earlier is specified by using the mo option nil is displayed for the section created with the Id850 and sections created with the as850 such as symtab strtab and shstrtab Remark nil nil may appear in the data areas of the sbss and sdata sections This indicates that a globally declared variable without an initial value has been allocated Even if a variable with the same name is used for a different file it is still inevitably part of the load module so the file name containing the variable becomes undefined and therefore appears as nil in the link map However if data without an initial value was declared using the pragma section data instruction the file name appears instead of nil since the file s allocation is identified 180 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 6 Flash Memory External ROM Relink Function 5 6 1 Relink function Some systems are equipped with flash memory or detachable ROM To upgrade the version of the program the contents of the flash memory may be rewritten or the detachable ROM may be replaced with a
58. 1 Object Analysis Tool dialog box 297 Dump 298 10 4 2 Output Index dialog box 302 10 4 3 Archive File Options dialog box 303 10 5 Dump List 304 10 5 1 Dump list display contents 304 10 5 2 Element values and meanings 310 CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER 313 11 1 Disassembler 313 12 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 11 2 Operation Method 314 11 2 1 Command input method 314 11 2 2 Method using PM 314 11 3 Types and Features of Options 315 11 4 Settings Made via PM 317 11 4 1 Object Analysis Tool dialog box 317 Disassembler 318 11 5 Cautions 321 11 6 Output Format 322 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 323 12 1 Cross Reference Tool 323 12 2 Input Output 324 12 2 1 Input file 324 12 2 2 Output information 325 12 3 Operation Method 326 12 3 1 Command input method 326 12 3 2 Method using PM 326 12 4 Types and Features of Options 327 12 4 1 Common options 328 12 4 2 Cross reference 331 12 4 3 Tag information 332 12 4 4 Call tree 333 12 4 5 Function metrics 334 12 4 6 Call database 335 12 5 Settings Made via PM 336 12 5 1 Static performance analyzer dialog box 336 Cross reference 337 12 5 2 Cross reference Option dialog box 340 Common option 341 Cross reference list 344 Tag information 345 Call graph 346 Function measure 349 Call dat
59. 1 Project file related upper limit values The upper limit values related to project files are listed below Table 14 3 Project File Related Upper Limit Values Item Limit Number of files 1 Length of file name 255 Number of characters per line 5119 Number of lines per line 2097152 2 Intermediate assembly language related upper limit values The upper limit values related to intermediate assembly language files are listed below Table 14 4 Intermediate Assembly Language File Related Upper Limit Values Item Limit Number of files 2048 Length of file name 255 Length of symbol name 1022 Number of characters per line 5119 Number of lines per file 65535 3 Stack size specification file related upper limit values The upper limit values related to stack size specification files are listed below Table 14 5 Stack Size Specification File Related Upper Limit Values Item Limit Number of files read simultaneously 1 Length of file name 255 Number of characters per line 5119 Number of functions specified in one line 1 Number of parameters specified for one function 1024 Number of lines per file 32767 Number of functions registered 32767 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 397 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 4 Output file related upper limit values The upper limit values related to output files are listed below Table 14 6 Output F
60. 1 Save or 2 Browse Save button this specifies whether or not to open the file which was saved with the editor set in PM It is selected by default 3 Output Items Select items to be output as dump results using the check boxes a b c d e f 9 Specific Items A This outputs particular items specified with the A option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the A option Debug Information b This outputs debug information specified with the b option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the b option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified String Table c This outputs the string table specified with the c option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the c option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified ELF Header f This outputs the ELF header specified with the f option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the f option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified Section Header h This outputs the section header specified with the h option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the h option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified Program Header i This outputs the program header specified with the i option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the i option This check
61. 30 Assembly is stopped F3522 unknown cpu type Assembly cannot be executed because no target device is specified F3523 duplicated cpu type Target devices are specified in duplicate by an option or quasi directive 446 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F3524 can not find devicefile A device file corresponding to the specified target device is missing the specified device is incorrect or no device is specified F3525 illegal cpu family The specified device file is not for the V850 microcontrollers F3526 devicefile version mismatch cannot use version version The version of the specified device file is illegal Version version must not be specified F3527 nested command file file Command file file is nested It must not be nested F3528 tidata byte tibss byte size overflow size gt 128 The total size of the tidata byte section and tibss byte section exceeds 128 bytes F3529 tidata word tibss word size overflow size gt 256 The total size of the tidata word section and tibss word section exceeds 256 bytes F3530 tidata tibss size overflow size gt 256 The total size of the tidata byte section tibss byte section tidata word section tibss word section tidata section and tibss section exceeds 256 bytes F3531 too many symbols The number of symbols that can be described in one file has been exceeded The maximum number of symbols that can be described is 16
62. 777 215 including those registered internally by the assembler F3532 illegal object file string An error dependent upon the file system has occurred in the course of generating a linkable object file W3000 option az_info kind unmatched ignored option az_info_kind is specified at an illegal position It is ignored W3001 too many actual parameter Too many actual parameters are specified for the macro call W3002 can not use option1 with option2 option2 ignored Options option and option2 must not be specified at the same time Option option2 is ignored W3003 option option needs argument ignored An argument must be specified for option option The specified option is ignored W3004 illegal option option s value ignored The value specified for option option is illegal The specified option is ignored W3005 illegal option option s symbol symbol ignored Symbol symbol specified for option option is illegal The specified option is ignored User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 447 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W3006 illegal option option s argument ignored The argument specified for option option is illegal The specified option is ignored W3007 option cpu mismatch ignore cpu output core common object Option option that specifies generation of an object common to core core and the device file specified by the cpu option do not match The cpu option is ignored and an object common to core
63. Block Record HEX Format Range of Specifiable Values Default Value Intel expanded hex format 1 255 0x01 Oxff 31 0x1f Motorola type S hex format 1 251 0x01 Oxfb 80 0x50 Motorola type S hex format 1 250 0x01 Oxfa 80 0x50 32 bit address Expanded Tek hex format 16 255 0x10 Oxff 255 Oxff 6 Offset of Output Address d This option specifies the offset of an output address as a decimal number or a hexadecimal number that begins with Ox An output address is the offset value from a specified value The default is 0 7 Zero Initialization of NOBITS Section z This option generates as many null characters 0 as the size of the section for a section that has section type NOBITS and section attribute A That is a section for which initial vales of data are not specified such as the bss section or sbss section 8 Ignore Internal ROM Check rom_less When the U option is specified this option disables use of the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file and information of the internal ROM area to be converted into hex It also disables output of a warning message that is output if the area subject to hex conversion exceeds the internal ROM area If this option is omitted and if start size of the U option is omitted the internal ROM area defined in the device file is converted If the area to be converted exceeds the internal ROM area a warning messag
64. C language source program corresponding to that line s assembly source program is also displayed in this area User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 145 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 7 Cautions 4 7 1 Magic number Information indicating the target device for an object is automatically embedded into an object created by the as850 This information is called a magic number A model specific magic number is embedded if only a particular type of device is the target device if an entire core can serve as target devices a common magic number is embedded An object that has been assembled by the as850 when the cn option has been specified contains a common magic number and therefore can be linked to other objects for which a different device type has been specified as long as the specified device belongs to the same core Id850 does not output an error when they are linked As a result any object that is created after the cn option has been specified can be used as an object common to any device in the specified device s core Figure 4 5 Image of Creating Common Object with as850 as850 cn Device specification A A Common magic number L A Link _ gt rs ae Executable object file Device specification B Model specific magic number co Device specification C Model specific magic number 0x70D1 146 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER Caution Magic numbers common to c
65. Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected kd Function Saves the call chain with the maximum stack starting with the selected function to a file Same operation as View Recalculate Stack Size Recalculates the stack size Same operation as View Stop Stops the currently running jobs Same operation as Option Adjust Stack Size dialog box S Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Same operation as Help stk850 Help Opens Help for the stk850 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 389 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 3 Tree display area This area displays the function call tree Icons are not sortable or movable using drag and drop in this area The following icons indicate function conditions in the order of precedence For example the icon of the function whose stack size was modified and becomes the maximum in the callee functions is not light blue but red Table 14 2 Function Icons for stk850 Icon Description Qa Red Function whose stack size is maximum in the callee functions Qo Light blue Function whose stack size is changed or to which a callee function is added m Green Recursive function or function in the chain of recursion m Yellow Function whose stack size is not determined White Other function T Task Task declared with pragma rtos_tsk Context menu Adjust Stack Size dialog box Opens the Adjust Stack Siz
66. Debug Information 90 Optimization Level 81 Option 137 174 235 249 270 289 Option Byte 203 Options 33 Os 120 Ot 120 Other 62 Others 109 177 237 252 292 Output Code 100 Output File 98 Output File 35 171 Output Index dialog box 302 Package Configuration 21 Packing of Structs 102 PM 32 Preprocessor 86 Preprocessor 41 PROGBITS Data 309 Program Header Table 306 310 408 Programmable Peripheral I O Register 202 Prologue Epilogue Runtime 50 101 200 RAM map 373 379 RAM map option 375 RAM map option dialog box 375 _rcopy 219 _rcopy1 220 _rcopy2 221 _rcopy4 222 Register 49 Register Mode 101 176 Register Mode Information 308 Relink function 181 Relocation Error 175 Relocation Information 307 Rescan 176 Reserved Register 108 139 Reserved Sections 413 Reserved Symbols 198 ROM 74 78 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 499 APPENDIX C INDEX ROM Area 250 U ROM Processer Options dialog box 231 Undefine Macro 87 ROM Processor Options 231 Uninstallation 26 ROMization 40 201 Use Individual Option 72 ROMization Processor 204 Copy Functions 218 V Creating Object 212 V850 core 199 File 227 V850E2 core 199 Flow of Operation 204 V850Ex core 199 Input Output Files 20
67. I O register bit number I O register The bit number specified for I O register name O register is incorrect E3258 cannot access I O register I O register Accessing the on chip peripheral I O register O register specified as an operand is prohibited E3259 can not use rl as destination in mul mulu An assembler reserved register r1 must not be specified as the destination register of the mul mulu instruction E3260 token too long The length of the token exceeds the limit The limit value is 1037 E3261 illegal condition code The specified condition code is illegal Oxd cannot be specified to the condition codes for adf and sbf commands V850E2 F3500 too many files More than one file must not be specified F3501 illegal bit width The bit width specified for the byte hword or word quasi directive is illegal F3502 illegal file name must be s file The extension of the input file is illegal Use extension s F3503 can not open file file File file cannot be opened F3504 illegal section kind The type of the section specified for the section quasi directive is incorrect F3505 memory allocation fault The memory capacity is insufficient F3506 memory allocation fault string Allocating an internal data area string has failed User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 445 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F3507 overflow error string The work area is insufficient for processing the e
68. In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external variables A global variable defined in the fixed ROM can be referenced from the flash memory 184 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 6 3 Realizing relink function This section describes specifically how to realize the relink function 1 Project of PM To realize the relink function a fixed ROM area and flash memory area must be separately created This means that only the flash memory area is modified after the fixed ROM area has been created after a program has been stored in ROM When creating a project with PM therefore divide the project as follows a Project to be allocated to the fixed ROM area b Project to be allocated to the flash memory area project that may be modified in the future In addition separately prepare a startup routine and link directive file for each project 2 ext_func quasi directive When calling a function in the flash memory area from the fixed ROM area the name of the function to be called label name and ID number are assigned to the fixed ROM area by using the ext_func quasi directive The format of the ext_func quasi directive is as follows ext_ func function name ID number Specify a positive number as the ID number A different ID number must not be specified for the same function name or the same ID number must not be specified for different function names When a function
69. No data is copied if data may be overwritten as a result of copying Specify a global label having an absolute value or an absolute address as the first argument of _rcopy2 label If any other value or address is specified the result is not guaranteed User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 221 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR _rcopy4 Overview _rcopy4 Copies default data or RAM text te 4 byte Note Data section with initial value which is to be allocated to RAM and text section for internal RAM Format int _rcopy4 amp label number unsigned long label long number Description _rcopy4 amp label number copies the initial value data of section number number to be copied or text to be allocated to RAM to the RAM area 4 bytes at a time based on the information in the rompsec section allocated starting at the address following the address indicated by label If 1 is specified as number all sections in the rompsec section are copied Section number number is a positive number that starts from 1 By default sections are allocated in the order in which they appear in the input file If sections to be allocated to the rompsec section are specified by the p or t option of the romp850 they are allocated in the order in which they are specified If a ROM section file is created with PM however a C language source header file that makes number and label correspond to each other by define is generated and number can
70. Not Outputf cl 0 Do not output comments b Level 1 Output date and other file creation information as well as variable information and its explanation default Variable information is section name size and frequency of use If the section name is not determined for an external variable is output c Level 2 cl 2 In addition to Level 1 output a format guide If Optimize Location is specified variables determined not to be in the tidata section also are output as comments 7 Verbose Mode v This option displays the execution status of the section file generator 290 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 8 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 291 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR This tab is used to set other options of the sf850 Figure 9 6 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box Others Tab Section File Generator Options File Option Others Any Option MV Use Command File Command Line Options j b sf OK Cancel Help Ee 1 Any Option This edit box is used to specify an option other than one described above in the Section File Generator Options dialog box Describe an option in this edit box in the same format as on the command line At present however no option has to be specified in this
71. Optimization and Debug Information Source Files Optimization Optimize for Debugging Od Default Optimization Standard Optimization Og Level 1 Advanced Optimization 0 Level 2 Advanced Opt Object Size Os Level 2 Advanced Opt Exec Speed Ot V Generate Debug Information g Command Line Option is 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Source Files This is a list of source files registered for the current project When a source file is selected from this list the optimization options and debug information setting for that specific C language source file are displayed If you select Common Option from this list the settings that apply to all options are displayed At that point the Use Common Optimization Option check box becomes invalid In the optimization options that are displayed when a source file is selected from this list the Use Common Optimization Option check box is checked if the specified settings are the same as the default settings which apply to all options If any of the specified settings differ from the default settings the currently specified optimization level is checked The Generate Debug Information g check box is checked if generation of debug information has been specified 90 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 2 Optimization a Use Common Optimization Option This option is checked when using settings that apply to all options without using the optimizat
72. Organization Install Folder 24 bin Command group inc850 Include file group lib Module group internally called by C compiler Library for 22 register mode m r22 startup module r26 Library for 26 register mode startup module ib8S0 Library for 32 register mode r32 startup module Library for 32 register mode r32msk with mask register support startup module smp850 ca850 Link directive sample hip Online help doc Online manual User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 2 1 Folder organization of stack usage tracer Figure 2 2 shows the organization of the file folder that is read from the supply medium when the stack usage tracer is installed Below is the standard folder for the stack usage tracer default C Program Files NEC Electronics Tools STK850 Vx xx bin Install Folder dat850 Figure 2 2 Folder Organization of Stack Usage Tracer Command group Stack size specification file for standard library functions User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 25 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 3 Uninstallation This section describes the method for uninstallation of the CA850 1 Start Windows 2 Start Add or Remove Programs Add Remove Programs in Windows other than Windows XP on
73. Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office
74. Tab Description Dump Setting of options related to dump command Disassembler Setting of options related to disassembler RAM map Setting of options related to RAM map User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 317 CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER Disassembler For the disassembler activation dialog box set the project settings in the PM then select the Disassembler tab in the dialog opened by selecting Tool Startup Object Analysis Tool Figure 11 2 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box Disassembler Tab Object Analysis Tool Dump Disassembler RAM Map File List 1 Save 2 Browse Save V 3 Save Open Output Items Start Address s Specific ltems 4 F Address a I Codef c Size l F Assembler Source m F Output Comment v M Offset o l Opeodef p End Address e l Register Namef 1 F Titlef t Any Option _ Command Line Option Cancel Help 1 File List Object files for building in the project are displayed in the drop down list Paths are not displayed in the list The following files are displayed in the list ROMization processor output files only when ROMization is specified for projects in which executable object files are built Linker output files only for projects in which executable object files are built Archiver output files only for projects that output libraries Compiler output files Assembler output files O
75. Tag Information Output Example cxref 355 Call Tree Text Format Output Example cxref 357 Call Tree CSV Format Output Example cxref 358 Function Metrics Text Format Output Example cxref 360 Function Metrics CSV Format Output Example cxref 361 Call Database Text Format Output Example cxref 363 Call Database CSV Format Output Example cxref 364 Flow of Operation in rammap 366 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box RAM map Tab 373 RAM map option Dialog Box Common option Tab 376 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box RAM map Tab 379 Memory Map Table Text Format Output Example rammap 381 Memory Map Table CSV Format Output Example rammap 382 Estimation Flow in stk850 383 Main Window of st850 388 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box 392 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box 394 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 17 14 5 About stk850 Dialog Box 396 A 1 Object File Structures 406 B 1 Example of Message Dialog Box 486 18 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM LIST OF TABLES Table No Title Page I RPWNAHAWNHAWNHAN A UHTKRWNHA AN DARWDND SF ODODOMOAONNNDMDDAAAAAAPARPWWWWWWWW I oO 1 11 1 12 1 12 2 13 1 13 2 13 3 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 A worrrrrrrP r NAONOORWNA Register Mode 49 Correspondence Between CPU Core and Xv850patch Option for This Bug 63
76. The default size is 128 c Stack Threshold Wp G This limits the stack size in the intermediate language of a function subject to inline expansion to the specified number of bytes and does not execute inline expansion of a function exceeding this number of bytes Fora stack size guideline refer to Output Function Report Wp l below The default size is 32 d Expand Static Function Wp S This performs inline expansion of static functions that are referenced only once User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER e Output Function Report Wp I This displays information on functions The displayed information serves as a guideline for specifying the upper limits of Code Threshold Wp N and Stack Threshold Wp G When nothing is specified to the edit box output is to standard output When specifying a file name to the edit box output is to the specified file Figure 3 17 Output Example Function Name func function name code stack Note that the stack size output by this option is the size in the intermediate language that the pre optimizer outputs It therefore differs from the stack size the function actually uses 2 Loop Unrolling a Number of Loop Unrolling Wo Ol This option unrolls a for while or other loop num times It can be specified only when Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed Execution of a loop to be executed N times N is a constant is transformed into execut
77. The library reference is automatically specified after the input object file and the standard library is linked after the other libraries The path of a library is automatically specified before the library reference rompcrt o which is necessary for ROMization is automatically linked after a library This is to place the rompcrt section for ROMization after the text section of the other input files 5 Library List When this button is clicked a list of libraries to be linked specified by the options currently set on this page is displayed Figure 5 10 Library List Dialog Box Library List C Program Files NEC Electronics Toolsi CASSO x xe ibB50 r32 lid C Program Files NEC Electronics Tools CA8504 x xxMibB50 r32 ME 6 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 173 CHAPTER 5 LINKER This tab is used to set options of the linker Figure 5 11 Linker Options Dialog Box Option Tab Linker Options File Library Option Others Entry Symbol e Suppress Warning w I Ignore Relocation Error E Check All Multi Defined Symbol M Ignore Undefined External Symbol Error t F Output GP Information 4 2Pass Mode B F Output Link Mapf m F Output Old Style Link Map mo F Strip Debug Information s Ignore External Symbol Error T Check M
78. This message is output if an old link directive convention of CA850 Ver 2 50 or earlier is specified by the Xolddir option W4873 string option is not supported for this device The string option is not supported by the specified device The specified option is ignored W4911 multiple inclusion of same file attempted ignored The same file is specified more than once as an input file 466 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE Caution When PM is used and if the assembler file of the startup file is registered as a source file and the object file of the startup file is specified by a linker option as a startup file this warning message is output Take either of the following actions 1 Delete the startup file from the source file registration and specify a startup file as Startup tab on the Compiler Common Options dialog box 2 Create a dummy assembler file assemble it and create o file and specify it as Startup tab on the Compiler Common Options dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 467 APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 5 ROMization process F8400 b option needs argument The number of arguments for the b option is not enough F8401 o option needs argument The number of arguments for the o option is not enough F8402 p option needs argument The number of arguments for the p option is not enough F8403 t option needs argument The number of arguments for the t
79. This option expands a loop num times using for and while This option can be specified only for Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed The loop is converted into execution of a loop that is executed N times N is a constant and execution of a loop that includes a code expanded num times If the code size after expansion is too great or if the number of times of execution of the loop is too few the number of times of expansion may decrease or the loop may not be expanded at all In addition a loop having a complicated structure such as having inner loops may not be expanded If 0 or 1 is specified as num expansion is suppressed If num is not specified it is assumed that 4 is specified Specify num in decimal numbers Example To expand a loop that is executed 10 times four times i 0 i 50 while i lt 10 Processing Processing i i 41 Processing ILe 23 while i lt 10 Processing i Processing i Processing i Processing i Note This option is useful when loop expansion does not need to be performed with Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed specified Wo Xlo PM This option expands a loop by fixing the number of times of expanding the loop to the value specified by Wo Olnum User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 47 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 6 strcpy strcmp expansion option Xi PM This option sets a four byte alignment con
80. U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 387 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER The Main window appears first after the stk850 starts up It displays the call tree and the stack size for each function Figure 14 2 Main Window of st850 DER si sample prj stk850 File View Option Help 1 Ed 2 E main W sample C sample main c 3 Function C sample main s Reading C sample main s Reading completed 5 C sample sample s Reading C sample sample s Reading completed G Program Files NEC Electronics Tools STK850 V2 10 dat850 libsize32 txt Reading G Program Files NEC Electronics Tools STKS50 2 10 dat850 libsize32 txt Reading completed For Help press F1 1 Menu bar a File Open Project Opens a project file and recalculates the stack size Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected Function Saves the stack size of the largest path of the selected function s stack size to the file Save All Call Chains from Selected Function Saves the stack sizes of all the paths under the selected function to the file Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Every Root Saves the stack size of the largest path of all the root function stack sizes to the file Save All Call Chains from Every Root Saves the stack sizes of all paths to the file Load Stack Size Specification File Reads the informat
81. U18512EJ1VOUM 303 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 5 Dump List 10 5 1 1 This section describes the display format of the dump850 command Dump list display contents Archive header Display the contents of the archive header ARCHIVE HEADER 2 Date a Uid b Gid c Mode d Size e Member Name f 0x3158DE73 0 0 0100664 Ox2B8 atof o a Member updatedate b User ID c Group ID d File permission e Total number of bytes for members Member name Archive symbol table Display the contents of the archive symbol table DARCHIVE SYMBOL TABLE Offset a Ox1lf3c Name b _abs 3 a b Offset in file to member including symbol Symbol name Archive string table Display the contents of the archive string table ARCHIVE STRING Offset a 0x1100 TABLE Name b foo o 304 Offset Member name b User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 4 ELF header Display the contents of the ELF header xELEF HEADER Class a Data b Type c Machine d Version e Entry f Phoff g Shoff h Flags i Ehsize j Phentsize k Phnum l Shentsz m Shnum n Shstrndx 0 1 1 1 070377 T 0x0 0x0 Ox2A4 0x84 0x34 0x20 0 0x28 6 5 a Class b Byte order c Type d Processor e Version number Entry point address Offset in file of program header table Number of entries i
82. When the function is a static function its name is displayed in the form of file name function name where the file name excludes the path If the file including the definition of the function is unknown the function name is bracketed 3 System Library Functions This list shows standard library functions used in the registered intermediate assembly language file If 394 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER Reset operations are executed the stk850 automatically retrieves the predefined setting for these functions If the stack size information is changed from the default setting the function is moved to the Adjusted Functions 4 Other buttons Close To close the dialog box Adjust Size To open the Adjust Stack Size dialog box for the selected function Help To open the help for this dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 395 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER About stk850 dialog box This dialog box is used to display the stk850 version information Figure 14 5 About stk850 Dialog Box About stk850 Stack Usage Tracer stk850 V xx Dex Xxx 200x Copyright C NEC Electronics Corporation 2003 2004 All nohts reserved 1 Button OK To close the dialog box 396 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 14 5 Cautions This section describes cautions for the stk850 14 5 1 Quantitative limit of the stk850
83. Wo Ol To execute inline expansion only on a specific function regardless of the option use pragma inline This can give priority to the execution speed of only a specific function while size priority is specified Depending on the contents of the application optimization may be able to be reinforced by using a mask register in the same manner as when Os is specified In addition optimization giving priority to the execution speed can be reinforced by using the following function Expanding strcpy If the option Xi which executes expansion of strcpy for an application that often uses the character string copy function strcpy is specified the execution time is shortened The size increases however Wp r option An unnecessary function may be generated as a result of inline expansion that has merged source files If the Wp r option is specified in this case the unnecessary functions may be deleted and the size may be reduced Of the optimization of the CA850 giving emphasis to the execution speed the execution speed of this option is the highest This option is equivalent to the execution speed priority option Ot optional optimization option OIl of the CA850 Ver 2 4x As explained above the CA850 has several levels and items of optimization To specify optimization the following criteria must be noted Giving priority to size Giving priority to the execution speed at the expense of size Most opt
84. a message box indicating that the specified value is outside the range is opened If the start and end addresses are selected from the list and then the Change button is clicked the Set output range dialog box is opened and the addresses are changed into the start and end addresses selected in this dialog box The default addresses are the start and end addresses selected from Specified output ranges In the Set output range dialog box data can be input in hexadecimal number and can be set in the range of O to Oxffffffff No range is displayed in the default condition If a value outside the range is specified a message box indicating that the specified value is outside the range is opened and the value is ignored Clicking the Delete button deletes the function selected from the list The Change and Delete buttons can be selected only if the start and end addresses are selected from the list If Output all range is selected this setting box and the Add Change and Delete buttons cannot be selected Button a Set default option button This button returns the current setting of the dialog box to the default status If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the RAM map however Normal format and CSV format remain on User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 377 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 13 5 3 Object Analysis Tool dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the follow
85. a non negative decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox W9463 Illegal value character for recursion depth The recursion depth includes an incorrect character Specify a positive decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox W9464 Too big additional margin The limit is 2147483647 A value greater than 2147483647 is specified as the additional margin Specify a value smaller than 2147483647 W9465 Total stack size exceeds 2147483647 in function function Reduce recursion depth The amount of the stack to be used in the function exceeds 2147483647 Reduce the value of the recursion depth W9466 Total stack size exceeds 2147483647 in function function Reduce stack size in the maximum call chain The amount of the stack to be used in the function exceeds 2147483647 Reduce the stack size of functions in the call chain with maximum stack 19500 Exit stk850 Click the OK button to endexit the stk850 T9501 Do you want to overwrite it Click the Yes button to overwrite the existing file Click the No button to cancel T9502 Do you want to cancel adjustments to the selected function function Click the Yes button to cancel adjustments to the selected function Click the No button to do nothing 19503 Do you want to cancel adjustments to all functions Click the Yes button to cancel adjustments to all functions Click the No button to do nothing User s Manua
86. archiver is performed once for each project and settings for each file are not necessary When starting the ar850 from the command line collect a group of object files and create an archive file Various detailed operations can be performed within archive files such as manipulation of archive file objects By contrast when using PM to create an archive file start by compiling and assembling source files then gather the resulting objects into an archive file Operations cannot be executed within complete archive files via PM The user should keep this difference in mind when choosing between command line activation and activation via PM The differences between command line option settings and option settings via PM are described below 264 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER 8 3 Types and Features of Keys and Options This section describes keys and options A key is an item that must be specified for activation while an option can be omitted Symbols used in key option list PM Key option exists as specification item under the PM User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 265 CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER 8 3 1 Types and features of keys The following table lists the ar850 keys v This option outputs the ar850 version number via standard output and then terminates processing d This option deletes the specified member from the specified archive file m This option moves the specifi
87. are output However if a file name with a path is specified for each option these files are output there 3 Error File This edit box is used to set a file to which error and warning messages are output When this edit box is set the err_file option is set for all the compiler tools 70 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Remark If the folder specified as the Intermediate Output Directory or Final Output Directory does not exist when the OK or Apply button is clicked the following message box is displayed to check if a folder is to be created Figure 3 3 Checking Creation of Folder Compiler Common Options p ci sample Intermediate output directory is not exist make it If the Yes button is clicked in this message box a folder can be created If no folder is created options cannot be set User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 71 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to make settings related to the startup file Figure 3 4 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Startup Tab Compiler Common Options File Startup Link Directive ROM Flash Device tartup File Browse Edit by Text Editor This edit box can be specified an assembler source file or an object file When it isn t specified The default startup file is used By checking Use Individual Option check box the assembler option of the startup file can be used The assembler option of the startup f
88. be edited by using the Edit by Text Editor button In this edit box a space can be used in a folder name but not in a file name If an extension dir is recommended is not used in a file name a warning message indicating that build processing may not be performed correctly is displayed 2 Compatibility of Link Directive This edit box is used to specify compatibility of the link directive with that of a version earlier than CA850 Ver 2 70 The following four items can be specified in this edit box Default 2 40 or earlier 2 50 2 60 If a previous version is specified the Xolddir option is passed to the linker Caution V2 40 or earlier includes Ver 2 4x User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 73 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to make settings related to ROMization Figure 3 6 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box ROM Tab Compiler Common Options By checking this check box object files that uses ROM processor are created When it is checked r option of the compiler Ir option of the linker and rompert file is set and ROM processor is used OK Cancel Help OK 1 Create Object for ROM When this check box is checked an object supported by the ROMization processor is generated When this check box is checked the Xr option is passed to the compiler the Ir option and rompcrt file are passed to the linker and the ROMization processor is used 2 rompcrt File This edit box
89. be specified by a label name For a specific example refer to 6 5 2 Example Return value 0 Normal completion if copied correctly 1 Abnormal termination if not copied correctly Cautions Data is not copied if the address indicated by label is not at the start of the rompsec section _rcopy4 copies data in accordance with the information generated by the romp850 No data is copied if data may be overwritten as a result of copying Specify a global label having an absolute value or an absolute address as the first argument of _rcopy4 label If any other value or address is specified the result is not guaranteed 222 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 5 2 Example 1 To transfer all sections in 1 byte units extern unsigned long _S_ romp main intret ret rcopy amp S romp 1 Xr specifies a global label having an absolute value The label references an absolute address when the ca850 s ROMization option has been specified as shown above Therefore describe as follows to call _copy in an assembly language source program extern __S_romp 4 Declared as an external label Calls rcopy with absolute address of __S romp as first argument and 1 as second argument mov __S_romp r6 mov 1 r7 jarl__rcopy lp 2 To transfer sections 1 to 6 in 4 byte units and sections 7 to 11 in 1 byte units extern u
90. been specified by the l option W8716 S and x expect fT Options S and x are valid only when the extended Tektronix hex format is specified W8717 S expect fT Option S is valid only when the extended Tektronix hex format is specified W8718 x expect S and fT Option x is valid only when it is specified together with options S and fT W8719 option1 option overrides option2 option Option option2 is invalid because option option7 is specified W8730 section section overflowed lowest address of internal memory Section section falls below the lower limit of the internal ROM area or the area specified by the U option W8731 section section overflowed highest address of internal memory Section section exceeds the range of the internal memory space W8732 section section overflowed lowest address of program memory Section section falls below the lower limit of the program memory W8733 section section is converted from its midst Hex conversion is performed from the specified address in the middle of section section W8734 section section is converted until its midst Hex conversion is performed to the specified area in the middle of section section User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 473 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W8735 The address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that 474 can be expressed in the Intel expanded hex format The address exceeds the maximum value 20 bits of an addre
91. blocks other than an b Block length ber of characters in blocks other than and NL c Type of block te 1 d Checksum value of remainder resulting from dividing total value SS and NL by 256 and expressed as two digit hexadecimal number e Newline n Notes 1 6 data block 3 symbol block 8 termination block 2 The value for each character is determined as follows 0 to 9 0 to 9 A to Z 10 to 35 36 37 38 39 a to z 40 to 65 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM of characters in blocks other than 259 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 1 Data block This record indicates the value of a code LL T SS LA A D D NL a b c ole a Block type is 6 b Number of digits in load address and the load address c Code one byte of code expressed as two digit hexadecimal number Example 15 6 1C 3 1000 20202020202 NL a b c d e a Block length is 15 b Block type is 6 c Checksum is 1C which is remainder expressed as two digit hexadecimal number that results from dividing 1 5 6 3 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 28 by 256 d Number of digits in load address is 3 and load address is 100 e Code 2 Symbol block This block indicates the value of a symbol LL T SS LN N SEDFNote SYDF SYDF NL a b A B a Block type is 3 b Number of characters of the section name and the section name
92. boxes that are used to set the command option of the hx850 for the target project s source file 7 5 1 Hexa Converter Options dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following three tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 7 2 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box Tab Description File Setting of options related to a file Option Setting of hx850 options Others Other settings Note The option shown with in this dialog box is the option that is activated from the command line User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 247 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER This tab is used to set options related to a file of the hx850 Figure 7 2 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box File Tab Hexa Converter Options File Option Others IV Use This Output File o Browse Command Line Options 0 a hex Cancel Help 1 Use This If this check box is checked the hex converter is used This box is checked by default 2 Output File o This is used to specify the name of the hex file Spaces cannot be used in a file name If a file name is not specified the default output file name is the output file name for the linker ROMization processor when the ROMization processor is started up with the extension changed to hex To select a directive file either click on the desired directive file or use the arrow keys Sele
93. branch instruction 48 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 6 Generation code control Generation code control options are shown below 1 Register use control options rnum sym PM By using the rnum option an external variable can be allocated to a register Specify a register other than the mask register that is vacated by specifying the reg option Specify an external variable using a symbol name excluding The following external variables must not be specified volatile variable Variable using address operator amp Structure Array Internally coupled variable static Peripheral I O register The definition temporary definition and declaration of the specified external variable are deleted To use the default value of an external variable if initialization is not executed at the beginning of program execution assign a default value to a register using the startup file regn PM This option limits the number of registers used by the ca850 as n registers n register mode The specifiable range of values for n are Table 3 1 Register Mode Register Mode n Working Registers Registers for Register Variables 22 r10 r14 r25 r29 26 r10 r16 r23 r29 32 r10 r19 r20 r29 This option cannot be set independently for each source file and is always used for all files Since the settings by this option are also recognized by the linker a
94. characters other than numerals as the length of data to be allocated to sdata sbss Do you want to set your changed option for sources Check if all the modification contents of an individual source option are to be reflected in the source cannot use semicolon Do not use semicolon for an option for which two or more items can be input B 2 5 Linker Filling Number of Hole is illegal Do not use any characters other than hexadecimal numbers as the filling value of a hole Output File is illegal Do not use romp out illegal characters in the extension and blanks in an output file name 488 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE Startup File is illegal Do not use a file name that is the same as the source file name of the startup file excluding the extension in the source file list The default startup file is specified rompert File is illegal Do not use a file name that is the same as the source file name of the rompcrt file excluding the extension in the source file list The default rompcrt file is specified This project does not need boot object file The boot object file is not necessary for a project for which a flash supporting object is not specified This project does not need rompcrt file The rompcrt file is not necessary for a project for which ROMization is not specified You cannot delete your selected file from this project The startup file and rompcrt file c
95. code may be smaller than the 6 7 address of an executable instruction in a previous line or may be greater than the address of an executable instruction in a subsequent line If the sequence of executable instructions for if else statements has been rearranged or if loop unrolling has caused a sequence of executable instructions to be rearranged step execution may no longer be possible as in 2 above The entire function is regarded as the valid range scope for all automatic variables However if automatic variables have been allocated to registers they can be deleted or otherwise rendered invisible by optimization even when they are within the scope This can occur when the variables are being used as local variables within the scope or have been assigned as local variables as a result of optimization Example void f void int a Valid within function address 1 The a is used only within the range from address 1 to address 2 address 2 122 In the above example the scope of a is the entire function f However use of a is limited to section between address 1 and address 2 In this case if a is allocated to a register and optimization causes it to be deleted from the stack frame a will become invisible outside of the section between address 1 and address 2 This phenomenon occurs in order to make more efficient use of registers by making the register where a has been all
96. creates a ROMization object file without deleting them Therefore the debugger can debug the source even with a ROMization object file 206 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 2 Input Output Files The romp850 enables the following files to be handled as input files file1 out Executable object output by linker The file that is output is file2 out Executable object for ROMization The linker and the romp850 are both able to specify I O file names The default output file name is romp out User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 207 6 3 6 3 1 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR rompsec Section Types of sections to be packed The default setting for the types of data that can be packed in a rompsec section is data allocated to sections having a write enabled attribute In addition any section that has either the text attribute or const attribute can be specified for packing by specifying the t option Specific examples of packing targets are listed below 1 2 The reserved sections listed in Table 7 1 Any section created with any name as long as either the sdata attribute or data attribute has been specified for it by the section quasi directive in an assembly language program Table 6 1 Reserved Sections Packed by romp850 data sdata sedata Sidata tidata tidata byte tidata word Note however that if any user specified sections with either the text a
97. defined Segment segment has been already defined E4249 section section already defined at line number Section section has been already defined on the numberth line E4250 symbol symbol already defined at line number Symbol symbol has been already defined on the numberth line E4251 illegal segment type string string was specified it must not be specified as a segment type E4252 illegal section type string string was specified it must not be specified as a section type E4253 illegal section attribute character character was specified it must not be specified as a section attribute E4254 string in segment directive of non LOAD segment is illegal string must not be specified in a segment directive that does not specify LOAD as the segment type E4267 unknown symbol kind string string has been specified it must not be specified as a symbol type E4268 symbol kind string specified more than once in same or other directive Symbol type string has been defined more than once in the same or another directive E4271 section attribute attribute of section section and segment attribute attribute of segment segment do not match The section attribute attribute of section section does not match the segment attribute of segment segment to which this section is specified to be allocated F4001 cannot open command file file The command file file cannot be opened
98. definition is included in a header file the file name in the section file is not the header file name it is the C language source file name that includes the header file Comments in the form of or can be inserted However a section name or variable name must not be delimited by a comment A blank space is required immediately after a variable name ASCII code and EUC Japanese code can be used in comments If a variable for which data has been specified as the section type in a section file is referenced by another assembly language source file use the option quasi directive to specify data so that the assembler will be notified of the data bss attribute Also if a variable for which sdata has been specified is referenced by another assembly language source file use the option quasi directive to specify sdata so that the assembler will be notified of the sdata sbss attribute User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM Example CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR Section file data a c dati b c dat2 sdata a c sdatl1 b c sdat2 With default value allocation is to data section Without default value allocation is to bss section With default value allocation is to sdata section Without default value allocation is to sbss section Assembly language source file option text mov option text mov option text mov option text mov
99. displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 252 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 6 Output File Formats This section describes the hx850 output file formats 7 6 1 Intel expanded This section describes Intel expanded hexadecimal format files which consist of four records the start address record expanded address record data record and end record Note Each record is output in ASCII code The following figure shows a file configuration in Intel expanded hex format Figure 7 5 File Configuration in Intel Expanded Hex Format Start address record Expanded address recordNote Data recordNote Data record Expanded address record Data record Data record End record Note The expanded address record and data record are repeated Each record consists of the following fields CC AAAA TT field SS NL a b c d e f Record mark Number of bytes number of bytes that are expressed as two digit hexadecimal numbers of field c Location address Record type 03 start address record 02 expanded address record 00 data record 01 end record Checksum value expressed as two digit hexadecimal number in records other than SS and NL sequentially subtracted from initial value 0 and that lower 1 byte expres
100. edit box because all the options related to the section file generator can be specified in the Section File Generator Options dialog box 2 Use Command File In the Windows environment the length of character strings used to specify options for the ca850 is restricted If this check box is selected the option character string is output to a command file which enables the operation to be completed without observing the restriction on the character string length Check this check box if many options are set and not all of them can be recognized Under the default setting the check box is not checked For the details of command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 3 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 292 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND This chapter describes the outline operation and display format of the dump command dump850 10 1 Dump Command A dump command displays the contents or information of a specified object file or archive file It is used to check information such as the address attribute and symbol name of a section segment in a created object file or archive file The dump command of the C compiler package is dump850 Figure 10 1 Operation Flow of dump850 gt dump850 p Outputs input file contents via standard output Object file or Archive file
101. equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under ce
102. flash mask option access file file address num1 bit num2 A function of the option byte which is prohibited from being set is set W4614 section section alignment must be 4 in internal instruction RAM Specify a multiple of 4 for the alignment condition of section section allocated in the internal instruction RAM W4615 section section attribute is illegal in internal ROM internal instruction RAM Allocating section section having a write attribute in the internal ROM RAM is illegal W4651 relocation entry in section section has unknown relocation type number ignored this entry The relocation entry in section section has an illegal relocation type number This entry is ignored W4652 cannot find number th symbol table entry for relocation of reference at offset offset in section section this relocation is ignored The numberth symbol table entry to relocate a reference existing in offset offset of section section is not found This relocation was ignored W4653 relocation entry in relocation section sectioni used to relocate section section2 has illegal r_offset offset ignored The entry in relocation information section section used for relocation of section section2 has illegal relocation offset offset This entry is ignored 462 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W4655 cannot find GP symbol in segment segment or illegal label reference for local symbol in file file2 sec
103. for the source file of a given project 8 4 1 Archiver Options dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following one tab is displayed Table 8 1 Archiver Options Dialog Box Tab Description Option Setting of ar850 options User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 269 CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER This tab is used to set ar850 options Figure 8 2 Archiver Options Dialog Box Option Tab Archiver Options Option Archive File Browse Suppress Message of File Creation c Verbose Mode v V Use Command File Cancel 1 Archive File This option specifies the name of the archive file to output extension a If this option is omitted the project file name with the extension changed to a is regarded as having been specified It can be selected by clicking or by using arrow keys A file also can be selected by using the dialog that is displayed by selecting the Browse button 2 Suppress Message of File Creation c Messages are not output on file creation if this option is checked 3 Verbose Mode v This option outputs the execution status in the following format a file Add d file Delete q file Create new m file Move r file Replace x file Extract 270 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER 4 Use Command File In the Windows environment the length of character strings used to specify
104. generated The Id850 behaves as if no section exists if a section that is actually allocated does not exist even if a mapping directive is described in the link directive file 198 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 7 4 May not be allocated to the expected sections Even if a directive file specifies an object file or archive file to be allocated to a section the object file or archive file may or may not be allocated to the expected sections depending on how the file name is described In such cases refer to the link map m and specify the directive file with the file name displayed on the link map and with the identical name including the path name then relink 5 7 5 V850 core and V850Ex core The V850Ex is upward compatible with the other V850 core microprocessors Source programs used for the V850 core can be used for the V850Ex In this case create the V850 core object file as an object file common to the core with the as850 option An object file created as common to V850E cannot link with a non V850Ex object file refer to 4 7 1 Magic number 5 7 6 V850 core and V850E2 core The V850E2 is upward compatible with the other V850 core microprocessors Source programs used for the V850 core can be used for the V850E2 In this case create the V850 core object file as an object file common to the core with the as850 option An object file created as common to V850E2 cannot link with a non V850E2 object file
105. has failed F8219 file has no member No member exists in archive file file F8220 version error file The version of the format of specified file file is not a version that can be handled by this archiver F8221 can not read archive header file The header of archive file file cannot be read W8306 can not open file file File file cannot be opened W8307 can not close file file File file cannot be closed W8308 can not read file file Nothing can be read from file file W8309 can not write file file Nothing can be written to file file W8310 can not seek file file File file cannot be sought W8311 can not find file file File file cannot be read W8315 can not find member member Member member does not exist in the archive file W8322 this symbol offset not true The symbol offset of the archive file is illegal 478 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 8 Section file generator F8000 cannot open output file file Output file file cannot be created F8010 cannot open input file file Input file file cannot be opened F8020 cannot write file file Nothing can be written to output file file F8030 unknown option option Option option that is not an option of the sf850 is specified F8040 cl level out of range 0 2 A wrong value is specified by the cl option F8050 option option need sub argument An argument is necessary for option option
106. in the edit box If a file name is specified for Setting of global options an assembly language source for the source compiled last is output because the same file name is overwritten A file name can be specified when a file name is specified for the individual source options setting This option is the same as the item set for Assembler Source Fs on the Output File tab 82 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 7 Assemble List Fv This check box is used to specify whether an assemble list resulting from compiling a C language source is output When it is checked the edit box below can be used to specify a folder name or file name If a folder name is specified in this edit box as Setting of global options and if the specified folder does not exist a message box asking you if a folder is to be created is displayed If nothing is specified in the edit box an assemble list is output to the project folder with the extension of the C language source file name changed to v To specify another output destination specify a folder name in the edit box If a file name is specified for Setting of global options an assembly language source for the source compiled last is output because the same file name is overwritten A file name can be specified when a file name is specified for individual source options This option is the same as the item set for Assemble List Fv on the Output File tab 8 Output Source
107. interrupt level cannot be set for interrupt request name name The interrupt level is not set W2690 Rtos task is specified for function function previously specified inline is ignored A function for which inline is specified is specified as a task for the RTOS The inline specification is ignored W2691 Startup routine for RTOS task cannot be inlined inline is ignored Inline expansion must not be specified for a function specified as a task for the RTOS The inline specification is ignored W2699 Function function is undefined previously specified GP symbol for rtos_ interrupt is ignored The function specified as an interrupt handler with a gp symbol specified is not defined in the file The interrupt handler specification is invalid W2700 cannot specify GP symbol function function is already defined The gp symbol cannot be specified for a function already defined The gp symbol specification is ignored W2703 GP symbol is not specified for RTOS interrupt function function A gp symbol is not specified for a function function specified as an RTOS interrupt handler W2704 Function function is undefined previously specified rtos_task is ignored Function function specified as an RTOS task is not defined in the file The rtos_task specification is invalid W2710 Section sectioni is already specified for symbol section2 is ignored section has bee
108. is output in the CSV format This is not checked in the default condition Specify the name of a file to which the analysis result in the CSV format is to be output by using the File name edit box The default file name is rammap csv The default file name can also be selected by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when CSV format is selected If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the RAM map however Normal format and CSV format remain on 376 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 2 Output all range If this is checked a function name can be specified by using a file It is not checked in the default condition If it is checked Specified output ranges and the Add button cannot be selected 3 Specified output ranges An output range is displayed in the list box that is blank in the default condition Clicking the Add button displays the start address and end address Addresses cannot be directly input Clicking the Add button opens the Set output range dialog box in which the start address and the end address can be specified The specified start and end addresses are displayed in the list In the Set output range dialog box data can be input in hexadecimal number and can be set in the range of O to Oxffffffff No range is displayed in the default condition If a value outside the range is specified
109. library of the appropriate mode is referenced 32 32 register mode is specified if this option is omitted By specifying this option the register mode of the software register bank function can be changed User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 49 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Xmask_ reg PM This option specifies use of the mask register function When this function is used the ca850 outputs codes assuming that an 8 bit mask value Oxff is set to r20 and a 16 bit mask value Oxffff is set to r21 Mask values must be set to the mask registers r20 and r21 by a user program such as the startup routine With the V850 microcontrollers byte data and halfword data are sign extended to word length depending on the value of the most significant bit wnen they are loaded from memory to registers Consequently the mask code of the higher bits may be generated when an operation on unsigned char or unsigned short type data is performed When the result of an operation is stored in a register variable a mask code is generated for unsigned byte data and unsigned halfword data to clear the higher bits In both the cases generation of the mask code can be avoided if word data is used If word data cannot be used and a mask code is generated the code size can be reduced by using the mask register function To decide whether the mask register function is to be used or not the following points must be thoroughly considered ls ita program that outputs ma
110. line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 371 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 13 5 Settings Made via PM This section explains the respective dialog boxes that are used to set command options of the rammap for a file of the targeted project 13 5 1 Static performance analyzer dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following two tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 13 1 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box rammap Tab Description Cross reference Setting of cross reference options RAM map Setting of RAM map options 372 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL RAM map This tab is used to set the RAM map Figure 13 2 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box RAM map Tab Static peformance analyzer sample prj Cross reference FAM map Analyze file ERSE AE ares Browse Output folder C sample Browse MV Generate all analyzing files Detail options Other options Command Line Options tammap all C sample sample out Bun
111. many registers Too many registers are specified for the pushm popm instruction E3242 illegal operand label is already defined on section The label specified for option sdata option data has already been defined in section section E3244 illegal origin value value The value value specified for the org quasi directive is incorrect E3245 identifier is reserved word Reserved word identifier is used where a reserved word should not be used E3246 illegal section An instruction that must not be described in a section is described E3247 illegal size value The specified size is incorrect E3248 illegal symbol reference symbol or is specified for a symbol E3249 illegal syntax The syntax is incorrect E3250 illegal syntax string The syntax of string is incorrect 444 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E3251 illegal id value The specified ID value is incorrect Specify an integer E3252 id already defined as symbol identifier The specified ID value has already been reserved as symbol name identifier E3253 symbol identifier already defined as another id The specified symbol name identifier has already been reserved as a different ID value E3254 can not reference ext_func symbol identifier The symbol specified by using the ext_func quasi directive cannot be referenced by any instruction other than a branch instruction E3255 cannot access for
112. memory map table is output in text format The default output file name is rammap txt The text format output is as follows Figure 13 5 Memory Map Table Text Format Output Example rammap Command input rammap m a out Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0x00000000 Ox00FFE000 crtN s __argc gt crtN s __argv gt test c LL29 5 0x00FFE010 gt test c _svar 4 gt _var 4 gt _gAppName 8 Ox00FFE020 gt _c gt _tmp 4 gt _buf 100 Ox00FFEOQ80 gt OxO00FFE090 _var2 4 gt _c gt crtN s __ stack 512 0x00FFE290 gt OxFFFFFFFO User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 381 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL The variable name and size are displayed left justified at the start of the relevant address A variable name that cannot fit in the memory layout frame is displayed as far as it fits A colon is output for a line that has no variable name and the line is omitted Unused area the text attribute section and the interior of large variables correspond to these kinds of lines 2 CSV format output example If the mc option is specified the memory
113. name in the flash memory area is specified in the fixed ROM area by using the ext_func quasi directive a branch table ext_table is created The address of this ext_table is specified by the user Specify the address as follows by using linker option ext_table when a load module of the internal ROM area and a load module of the flash memory area are created ext_table address address to be specified When execution branches to the body of a function the actual function address is obtained by referencing the offset of the ID number from the beginning of the created branch table and then execution branches User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 185 186 CHAPTER 5 LINKER Example func_flasho func_flashl func_flash2 If the above three C functions are allocated to the flash memory and they are called from the fixed ROM describe as follows in the fixed ROM using the as850 ext_func func flasho 0 ext_func func flashl 1 ext_func func flash2 2 To make this description in a C language source file use the pragma asm pragma endasm directives or __asm When the pragma asm pragma endasm directives are used the description looks as follows pragma asm ext_func _func_ flasho 0 ext_func _func_flashl 1 ext_ func func flash2 2 pragma endasm It is recommended to describe these ext_func quasi directives in one file and include this file in a
114. omitted cxref is assumed for the file name xstd This option outputs the cross reference to standard output default User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 331 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 4 3 Tag information The cxref tag information options are shown below t file This option outputs tag information in text format to the specified file If file is omitted ctags is assumed for the file name tstd This option outputs tag information to standard output 332 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 4 4 Call tree The cxref Call tree options are shown below c file This option outputs the call tree in text format to the specified file If file is omitted ccalltre lst is assumed for the file name cc file This option outputs the call tree in CSV format to the specified file If file is omitted ccalltre csv is assumed for the file name call file This option outputs the call tree in text format and CSV format to the specified files The file names are file Ist and file csv If an extension is appended to the specification for file that extension is ignored If file is omitted ccalltre lst and ccalltre csv are assumed for the file names cenum This option specifies the method of omitting output Any of the following can be specified for num 1 Output all information 2 Omit output for call trees at the same level 3 Omit output once the inf
115. optimization can be specified Optimize for Debugging Od This option generates codes emphasizing logic debugging without putting stress on the ROM capacity and execution speed Its function is equivalent to the default optimization of CA850 Ver 2 41 or earlier Default Optimization This option generates codes emphasizing logic debugging It executes optimization within a range where logic debugging is not affected User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 81 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Standard Optimization Og This option executes appropriate optimization It executes optimization that allows debugging of the C language source in most cases Because external variables are assigned to registers both the execution speed and code size are improved from those of the default option Level 1 Advanced Optimization O This option executes optimization emphasizing the ROM capacity Level 2 Advanced Opt Object Size Os This option executes the maximum optimization placing the utmost emphasis on the ROM capacity Level 2 Advanced Opt Exec Speed Ot This option executes the maximum optimization placing the utmost emphasis on the execution speed rather than on the ROM capacity For details of optimization refer to 3 7 3 Efficient use of optimization 3 Generate Debug Information g This check box is used to generate debug information Check this box to debug a program for example when a C language source is debugged with
116. options for the ca850 is restricted If this check box is selected the option character string is output to a command file which enables the operation to be completed without observing the restriction on the character string length Check this check box if many options are set and not all of them can be recognized Under the default setting the check box is not checked For the details of command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 271 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR This chapter describes the outline of the section file generator sf850 the sequence for using section files and sf850 operations 9 1 Section Files This section explains what section files are Section files are files that define the sections to which external variables global variables and static variables that have been declared in a C language source file are allocated The sections to which these variables are allocated can be determined at compilation by referencing these section files As the default setting as many high access frequency variables as possible are allocated to the tidata attribute tidata word attribute and tidata byte attribute sections assigned to the internal RAM area of the V850 microcontrollers The ca850 provides the following three methods for declaring external variables in C language source files and allocating the variables to sections 1 Use the compiler option Gnum to limit the data size whe
117. output in the following format Function Auxiliary Mark Total Stack Size Frame Size Adjustment Information The content of each parameter is the same as in the Text format In the case of the CSV format however 0 is output for the adjustment information of functions to which no additional information is specified a Example in which all the call chains are output Function Total Stack Size Frame Size Adjustment Information main 800 80 0 subl 720 240 0 sub2 480 200 0 sub3 280 280 O main 800 80 0 subl 720 240 0 sub2 480 200 0 sub31 160 160 0 main 800 80 0 sub11 500 30 20 10 sub11 500 30 20 10 main 800 80 0 sub12 amp 400 200 0 sub21 200 200 0 main 800 80 0 f c sub13 300 250 50 main 800 80 0 sub14 50 50 b Example in which the call chain with the maximum stack is output Function Total Stack Size Frame Size Adjustment Information main 800 80 0 subl 720 240 0 sub2 480 200 0 sub3 280 280 O User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 401 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 14 6 2 Stack size specification file A stack size specification file is a text files with an extension txt for collectively specifying information about stack sizes for functions e g functions written in assembly language library functions functions that include a indirect call and recursive functions whose stack sizes cannot be obtained from intermediate assembly
118. output to the project folder with the extension of the C language source file name changed to v To specify another output destination specify a folder name in the edit box If a file name is specified for Setting of global options an assembler list for the source compiled last is output because the same file name is overwritten A file name can be specified when a file name is specified for Individual Source Options Setting 3 Frequency Information File Xcre_sec_data This check box specifies whether an information file of how often the variables are used by the section file generator is to be output When this box is checked a folder name or a file name can be specified in the edit box below this button If a folder name is specified in this edit box as Setting of a global option and if the specified folder does not exist a message asking you if a folder is to be created is displayed If nothing is specified in the edit box a frequency information file is output to the project folder with the extension of the C language source file name changed to sec To specify another output destination specify a folder name in the edit box If a file name is specified for Setting of global options an assembly language source for the source compiled last is output because the same file name is overwritten To specify a frequency information file name for multiple C language source files therefore specify a file name using Individual Source O
119. register must be specified E3230 illegal operand range error in displacement The value specified as displacement exceeds the range of specifiable values E3231 illegal operand range error in immediate The value specified as immediate exceeds the range of specifiable values E3232 illegal operand local parameter The parameter specified for the local quasi directive is illegal User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 443 APPENDIX B MESSAGE E3233 illegal operand local symbol parameter The parameter specified for the local quasi directive is not a symbol E3234 illegal operand macro parameter The parameter specified for the macro quasi directive is illegal E3235 illegal operand macro name The macro name specified for the macro quasi directive is illegal E3236 illegal operand macro argument The parameter specified for the macro call is illegal E3237 illegal operand irepeat argument The argument specified for the irepeat quasi directive is illegal E3228 illegal operand irepeat parameter The parameter specified for the irepeat quasi directive is illegal E3239 illegal operand can not use r0 as source in V850E mode rO must not be specified as the source operand when the V850Ex core is specified E3240 illegal operand can not use r0 as destination in V850E mode rO must not be specified as the destination operand when the V850Ex core is specified E3241 illegal operand too
120. return type mismatch typel type2 The type of return value type2 indicated by the return statement does not match return type type7 of the function E2290 argument type mismatch typel type2 The type of actual argument type2 does not match the type of dummy argument type7 at the time of the function declaration E2292 Argument name is missing Dummy argument name name declared in the function definition cannot be found E2296 illegal first argument requires a named argument cannot be used as the first argument of a function E2300 Struct union size must not be zero The size of a structure union must not be zero E2301 illegal bit field type A type which must not be specified for a bit field has been specified E2303 illegal bit field size The value of a constant expression that specifies the width of a bit field must not exceed the number of bits constituting the object of the specified type 420 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2304 name has incomplete type The type of name is incomplete E2305 Field name declared as a function The type of member name is a function type E2347 Local extern symbol is put into the next unit The externally linked declarator symbol was initialized by the local scope E2349 Initialization of non auto pointer using non number initializer is not position independent The code for an initialization co
121. section entsize Size of entries in corresponding section User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 409 APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE A 4 1 Section types The section types indicated by the constituent element type in the section header table are shown with an explanation of their meanings in the following table Table A 4 Section Types and Their Meanings Section Type Meaning GPTAB Global pointer table size with first entry aligned with num of Gnum specified for compiler and assembler and entries 0 2 and subsequent entries aligned with data size and word units NOBITS Section for data that does not have an actual value in the object file e g data for which no initial value is specified PROGBITS Section for data that has an actual value in the object file e g data for which a machine language instruction or initial value has been specified REGMODE Section existing in relocatable object file created using the register mode function stores information on the number of registers internally used by the ca850 REL not supported Relocation information RELA Relocation information SYMTAB Symbol table refer to A 4 1 STRTAB String table refer to A 4 2 Note Refer to the explanation of the CA850 s reg option A 4 2 Constituent elements link info dependent on section type The meanings of the section header table s constituent elements link and info which ar
122. separating ranges with commas rammap a out mr0x10000 0x20000 0x30000 0x40000 When specified ranges overlap they are handled as follows Example1 This case is handled as one in which the two ranges a to b and c to d are specified Example2 This case is handled as one in which the one range a to d is specified Example3 This case is handled as one in which the one range a to d is specified Example4 This case is handled as one in which the one range a to b is specified 370 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL Cautions1 The actual address range is aligned at 16 bytes For the starting address the specified value is rounded to 16 bytes logical AND with Oxfffffff0 For the ending address the specified value is rounded to 16 bytes and added to OxF mr0x10000 0x20000 0x10000 0x2000f mr0x10004 0x10000 0xffffffff mr 0x20005 0x0 0x2000f Cautions2 _ If the range specification is illegal an error message is output and processing is interrupted mstd This option outputs a text format memory map table to standard output o path This option specifies the path of the output file If this option is omitted the information is output to the current path cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command
123. set to a label that is to be deleted Unnecessary instructions are deleted Breakpoints and step execution may not be set as intended by the user Peep hole optimization rearrangement of five or less instructions to an efficient instruction string is performed Breakpoints and step execution may not be set as intended by the user This optimization is equivalent to the object size priority option Os of the CA850 Ver 2 4x This option does not perform inline expansion of a static function that is referenced only once which is performed with the CA850 Ver 2 4x User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 119 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 5 Os Level 2 Advanced option Object Size An optimization module is executed until processing of O can no longer be optimized This option executes optimization giving priority to object size and is the most powerful option for an embedded system It executes all optimization to not increase the code size of the optimization supported by the CA850 and reduces the size as much as possible Depending on the contents of the application optimization can be reinforced by using the following options and functions in addition to the above option Specifying Wi O4 The data flow is analyzed and optimization is reinforced However the compilation time tends to increase considerably Using mask register In the case of an application that often uses mask codes for operations of unsigned char and unsigned short
124. start address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that can be expressed in the Intel expanded hex format The first address exceeds the maximum value 20 bits of the address that can be expressed in the Intel extended hex format Processing is continued with the range that can be expressed output as addresses Supplement The possible causes of this message are the following 1 The address of the section is too large The address where the section is allocated may exceed the range that can be expressed Specify the start address of the area to be converted into hex format by using the d option and use an offset from that address 2 The value specified by the d option is incorrect By specifying the d option an offset from a value specified as an address can be used The offset from this value may exceed the range that can be expressed Specify an appropriate value User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 475 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W8738 The start address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that can be expressed in the Motorola S type hex format standard address The start address exceeds the maximum value 24 bits of the address that can be expressed in the Motorola S type hex format standard address Processing is continued with the range that can be expressed output as addresses Supplement The possible causes of this message are the following 1 The address of the section is too larg
125. terminates processing ns PM This option arranges variable names in section files to be output in the order they appear instead of sorting them If this option is omitted the variable names are arranged in order of highest use frequency If two variable names have the same use frequency they are arranged so that the smaller of the two is first 0 name PM This option specifies the section file name to be output as name If this option is omitted the section file is output via standard output size tidata num PM This option specifies the upper size num bytes limit of variables allocated to the tidata word tidata byte section when the O option is specified size tidata_byte num PM This option specifies the upper size num bytes limit of variables allocated to the tidata byte section when the O option is specified sname PM This option arranges the variable names in section files to be output according to the dictionary order of variable names If two variables have the same name they are arranged according to the dictionary order of file names and function names ssection PM This option arranges the variable names in section files to be output according to their size smallest first If two variables have the same size they are arranged in order of highest use frequency ssize PM This option arranges the variable names in section files to be output according to their size smallest fi
126. that is provided by the CA850 The following figure shows an outline of the operation flow in creating objects for ROMization Figure 6 1 Creation of Object for ROMization ROMization area reservation code default rompcrt o Source program Cc Link Compile with option Xr romp850 apscilyinig HOMIzalion Executable object ROMization object Additional code Copy function _rcopy ROMization library libr a _rcopy function 204 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR When ROMiczation objects are created as shown in the figure execution of the _rcopy function copies the data to be allocated to RAM from the packed ROM section An image of this operation is shown below Figure 6 2 Image of Processing Immediately After _rcopy Function Call RAM area for data with default value RAM area for data with default value RAM area for data without default value RAM area for data without default value RAM allocation program area Copy data to RAM Text area Text area Copy text to RAM Constant data area Constant data area Data with default value Data with default value Text for RAM allocation Text for RAM allocation Image of object for ROMization Image after data is copied by _rcopy function User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 205 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR The default values for the section name and the section s start address label name r
127. that local symbols are also converted when a symbol table is converted It is valid only when it is specified together with Convert Symbol Table S If this option is omitted only global symbols are converted If this option and the U option are specified together this option is ignored User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 249 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 3 ROM Area a Convert ROM Area U This option converts into hex format and outputs all the codes in the area of the specified size starting from the specified start address If no start address and size are specified all the codes in the internal ROM area defined by the device file are converted into hex format and output Any unused are in the specified area is filled with a filling value This option cannot be used when the extended Tektronix hex format is specified When this option is specified options Converting Section I Convert Symbol Table S Include Local Symboll x and Zero Initialization of NOBITS Section z are ignored b Filling Number A filling value of 1 or 2 bytes can be specified Specify a filling value in hexadecimal numbers The prefix Ox must not be omitted If the filling value is of less than 2 or 4 digits it is assumed that as many Os as the number of deficient digits are specified at the beginning If this option is omitted the unused area is filled with Oxff c Start Address This option specifies the starting address of the area
128. the area to be converted exceeds the internal ROM area a warning message is output 244 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER Z PM This option generates as many null characters 0 as the size of a section for a section with the section type NOBITS and section attribute A section for data for which no default value is specified such as bss section and sbss section If this option is specified together with the U option this option is ignored User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 245 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 4 3 Other The specifications set other options F devpath PM This option sets the device file search to begin in the devpath folder If this option is omitted only the standard folders are searched V This option outputs the hx850 s version information via standard error output then terminates cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 246 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 5 Settings Made via PM This section describes dialog
129. the global pointer symbol used for linking If the created object file is a relocatable file NOT AVAILABLE is displayed b Section name This is the name of the sdata attribute section or sbss attribute section to which data are allocated Because a relocatable object file cannot determine allocation of an undefined external symbol to a section the Id850 internally creates a virtual section GpCommon and temporarily allocates the data to this section c Actual size of section This is the actual size of the section that is considered for use as the area for the hole generated by data alignment d Assumed size of section This is the size of the section that is assumed if the ca850 is started with the Gnum option specified with the value shown in the column at the right to this column specified as num Because the calculation of this size assumes an alignment condition of more than 4 bytes without taking the actual alignment condition into consideration the value shown in this column does not necessarily agree with the actual size of the created section e Value of num of Gnum option assumed This is the value of the Gnum option num upon starting the ca850 and the as850 that is assumed as a result of calculating the assumed size of section shown on the column to the left of this column User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER f Judgement result This is the result of the judgment ote as to whether or not the size
130. the information in the include file on the execution result default Display nothing Hides all the information in the include file Display specified Makes Non display include files and the Add button selectable User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 341 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 Non display include files The include file name to be hidden is displayed A function name of 38 characters or more is displayed in the form of first 18 characters last 18 characters This can be selected if Display specified is selected for Information in include file Clicking the Add button opens the Set analyze file dialog box If an include file is selected in this dialog box it is added to the list In the Set analyze file dialog box the default position is determined in the following sequence 1 Analyze folder on the Cross reference tab 2 Path of Analyze file on the RAM map tab 3 Install folder If an include file is selected from the list and the Change button is clicked the Set analyze file dialog box is opened and the include file is changed into the one selected in the dialog box Clicking the Delete button deletes the include file selected from the list The Change and Delete buttons can be selected only if an include file is specified in the list 3 Read non display identifications The name of the identifier whose information name is not to be output is displayed By checking this
131. the list display area by icon types Stack Size Sorts the list display area in the order of total stack sizes Frame Size Sorts the list display area in the order of frame sizes Additional Margin Sorts the list display area in the order of additional margins File Name Sorts the list display area in the order of file names 5 Message display area This area displays warning messages and the execution status Context menu Copy Copies the selected part to the clipboard Clear Clears the message display area User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 391 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER Adjust Stack Size dialog box This dialog box is used to specify additional stack size information of a function Figure 14 3 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box Adjust Stack Size Function Name main Frame Size Cancel Additional Margin Callee Function List for Indirect Call Callee Functions All Functions main 4 4 sample 4 4 1 Function Name This field displays the name of the selected function 2 Frame Size This field displays the size of the function s own stack frame excluding those of its callee functions is displayed when the frame size is unknown is regarded as size 0 in the calculation formula 3 Additional Margin In this field enter the value that is to be added to the stack size Specify a non negative decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox If th
132. the overall project and options for individual sources are displayed in the command line format This area is for reference and cannot be written to 2 Project Whole Option Only Options specified as options for the overall project and not as options for individual sources are displayed in the command line format This area is for reference and cannot be written to 3 Source Individual Option Only Options specified as options for individual sources and not as options for the overall project are displayed in the command line format This area is for reference and cannot be written to 4 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 111 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Button a Delete Source Option button This button can be selected when option settings for individual source files have been made and is not displayed is dimmed and cannot be selected when options for the overall project have been specified When selected this button deletes any option specified for a particular source file and applies only global options 112 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 6 3 Edit Option dialog box On the Edit Option dialog box items can be selected from a list and edited Figure 3 25 Edit Option Dialog Box Edit Option Delete Down Bee pe Cancel 1 Ad
133. the specification for file that extension is ignored If file is omitted cprofile dat and cprofile csv are assumed for the file names bstd This option outputs the text format call database to standard output User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 335 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 5 Settings Made via PM This section describes the dialog boxe that is used to set command options of the cxref for a file of the targeted project 12 5 1 Static performance analyzer dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following two tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 12 1 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box cxref Tab Description Cross reference Setting of cross reference options RAM map Setting of RAM map options 336 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Cross reference This tab is used to set the Cross reference Figure 12 2 Static performance analyzer Dialog Box Cross reference Static peformance analyzer sample prj Cross reference RAM map Preprocessor Control Use V850 preprocessor lt Preprocessor option ooo Analyze folder Esame Anallyze files main c q Delete Output folder C sample Browse V Generate all analyzing files Detail options Other options Command Line Options cxref all cpp850 C sample main
134. this option is omitted When PM is used this option is automatically specified for all compilation m This option simply executes the front end generates an ic file then terminates processing If this option is omitted modules after the front end are also executed 3 ROMization control option Xr PM This option is necessary when creating an object for ROMization and starts up the ROMization processor after link processing The created object file default name romp out is the file with the ROMization information The compiler processing is as follows a The label of the first argument for _rcopy specifies the first address aligned according to the four byte alignment condition that exceeds the end of the text section in the object b Consequently this specifies the area securing code for the rompsec section default name rompcrt o and the libr a file to be linked by the linker Id850 Refer to 6 4 Creating Object for ROMization for details of ROMization object creation methods 40 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 4 Preprocessor processing setting options C PM The C option includes source program comments in a C language source program s preprocessing output This option is valid only when either the E option or the P option has been specified Dname def PM When this option is specified it is assumed that define name def is entered before the C language source
135. to link the compiler s mathematical library libm a The mathematical library is valid when the lc option is set because it also references the functions in the standard library lstring PM When resolving an unresolved external symbol reference this option references the archive file libstring a If several archive files are specified by this option the files are searched in the order of their specification 1 Use no more than 64 characters to specify string 2 When this option has been specified the Id850 references only the archive files that are specified as having unresolved external references at the time they are specified Therefore when activating from the command line specify this option after specifying the object file that will reference the specified archive files 3 The mathematical library supplied by the CA850 references the libc a file of the standard library Therefore specify standard library reference specification Ic after mathematical library reference specification Im when the Id850 is activated from the command line User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 161 5 3 4 CHAPTER 5 LINKER Flash ROM This specifies options related to the flash ROM of the Id850 ext_table address PM 162 This option creates an object file for the flash external ROM relink function using the specified 8 digit hexadecimal address value as the start address value of the analysis table Refer to 5 6 Flash Me
136. to specify which section files will be output to the sf850 at compile time The sf850 merges the information from several files that have been input and outputs a single section file as specified via the ca850 s options The following figure shows an example of a section file output by the sf850 Figure 9 2 Example of Section File Output by sf850 Created by sf850 at Thu Jan 22 17 26 25 2004 tidata file func variable section size total _freq Byte freq Word freq main c valil data 4 10 10 0 main c val2 data 4 8 8 0 main c funcl val3 4 55 0 i 4330 nj 2110 On each line all content that follows is regarded as comments Variables are displayed in section files as shown below Section type file name function name variable name comment file name variable name comment variable name comment There are three ways to display variables according to the type of variable The variable types and display variations are listed below Table 9 1 Variable Types and Displays Display Meaning file name function name variable name Static variable declared in a function The function name and file name are also displayed file name variable name Static variable declared in a file The file name is also displayed variable name External variable Only the variable name is displayed Comments are output in the follow
137. types the mask register function can be used to reduce the code size However this function decreases the usable number of registers for register variables by two Using section file If data is allocated to the internal memory or a section that is referenced by one instruction per gp r0 the code size can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased If data is not allocated to a section by program it is allocated to tidata byte tidata word sidata sedata sconst sdata by a section file dur ing compilation refer to 9 1 Section Files Of the optimization of the CA850 giving emphasis to the code size this optimization minimizes the size It is equivalent to the object size priority option Os and optional optimization option Ol of the CA850 Ver 2 4x This option does not perform inline expansion of a static function that is only referenced once which is performed by the CA850 Ver 2 4x 6 Ot Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed This option executes optimization giving priority to the execution speed It is used to shorten the execution time even at the expense of the size in applications such as data processing In addition to the optimization performed by options up to O this option executes optimization of suppressing 4 byte alignment of label and 4 byte alignment at the beginning of a function In addition it also executes tail recursion optimization inline expansion and loop expansion If a ret
138. used cnv850e2 option instead Option cn must be used with a V850 core device Option cnv850e2 is used instead W1130 cnv850e option must be used with V850E core used cnv850e2 option instead Option cnv850e must be used with a V850Ex core device Option cnv850e2 is used instead W1308 output file of option1 overrides output file of option2 The output file of option option is overwritten because the output file of option option2 is specified W2015 illegal warning message number num specified by option num specified by option is not a correct warning message number W2042 illegal argument for _rcopy The argument of copy routine _rcopy is illegal W2107 Non empty file is expected to end in new line character A file that is not empty must be terminated with a carriage return W2127 redefined macro name name Macro name name is redefined The name defined afterward is valid W2132 macro recursion name Macro is expanded only one time Macro recursion was found The macro is expanded only once W2150 unexpected character s following directive directive An unnecessary token was found after preprocessing directive directive The unnecessary token is ignored W2161 unexpected non whitespace before preprocessing directive A character other than a blank character exists before a processing directive W2162 unrecognized pragma directive pragma directive ignored pragma
139. used for sorting All specified files are compiled and linked after all sources have been compiled In the edit box a file name having the same base name as a source file file name excluding the extension or a file name not having extension ic must not be specified The Wo Op option is not displayed as a command line option User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 93 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 4 Optimize Size of Branch Code Wo XFo This check box is used to specify whether the branch instruction specified by the XFo option of the wide range optimization block is output giving a priority to the code size This check box can be used only when Og O Os or Ot is specified 5 Save Memory of Preoptimizer Wp D This check box is used to decrease the memory capacity used by the pre optimizer during compiling Specify this option if the memory of the machine runs short and compiling is not correctly completed When this option is specified the compiling speed drops 6 Save Memory of Improver Wi D This option is used to decrease the memory capacity used by the machine dependent optimization block during compiling Specify this option if the memory of the machine runs short and compiling is not correctly completed 7 Pack Alignment Wi P This option suppresses optimization that aligns branch destination labels As a result the size of the execution code can be decreased This option is valid when Level 1 Advanced Optimization or th
140. when an assembly language source is debugged with the debugger If the optimization option O is specified at the same time and if a section for debug information is in the source file this option is ignored If there is no section for debug information the optimization option O is ignored and this option is valid In other words this option takes precedence if there is no debug information 138 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 7 Use Mask Register m This option specifies use of the mask register function When this function is used the ca850 outputs codes assuming that an 8 bit mask value Oxff is set to r20 and a 16 bit mask value Oxffff is set to r21 Mask values must be set to the mask registers r20 and r21 bya user program such as the startup routine To decide whether the mask register function is to be used or not the following points must be thoroughly considered Isita program that outputs many mask codes Two register variable registers are used as mask registers Does this have any effect If an object that uses a mask register and an object that does not use a mask register exist together when this option is specified the Id850 outputs an error 8 Do Optimization O This option executes optimization to rearrange instructions to avoid register and flag hazards If this option is specified together with the g option which outputs information for the debugger this option is i
141. will enable the object to be used within the V850Ex core If this option is omitted a magic number defined for the specified target device is set cpu devicename This option specifies the target device This option takes precedence over the option cpu quasi directive If a target device is specified by this option or the option quasi directive and the cn cnv850e cnv850e2 option are specified a core common object including information peculiar to the target device can be created If neither the option cpu quasi directive nor cn cnv850e cnv850e2 option is specified and if this option is omitted assemble is stopped F devpath This option specifies the folder where the device files are stored If this option is omitted the standard folder is specified The as850 handles folders from the as850 s installation folder to the folder at the dev position as the standard folders for device files f This option creates an object file having information a new format of function calling It is useful for using the assembly language source file created with the ca850 of the previous version Ver 1 xx The present version executes assemble assuming that this option is specified by default g PM This option outputs symbol information for the source debugger This means that when this option is specified debugging can be executed at assembly language source level When the optimization O option is specified simultaneous
142. 0 4 delete 1 217 void void 5 search 1 38 void void CallDataBase No FuncNo ChildFuncNo CallCnt 1 87 45 1 25 874241 3 8 9 1 4 LL Bip A 5 Ply hos 2 Explanation of Output Contents 1 SrcFileList The name of the source file in which the functions used by the program are defined is output FileName Source file name FilePath Source file path This is output only when the p option is specified 364 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 Funcs All of the functions used by the program are output FuncName Function name SrcFileNo Source file number Uses the No value in SrcFileList to indicate the source file in which that function is defined LineNo Line number Indicates the line at which that function s definition begins in the source file Ret1 Retz2 Return values of the function When the analysis cannot be performed nothing is output Arg1 Arg2 Arguments of the function When the analysis cannot be performed nothing is output User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 365 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL This chapter presents an overview of the memory layout visualization tool rammap and describes its operation and output file format 13 1 Memory Layout Visualization Tool The memory layout visualization tool displays the memory map information of a s
143. 0 int i offset 1 4 test int ip i void func i ip void func2 ip amp test i W2380 function returns address of local variable The address of an automatic variable is specified as the return value of a function Do not return the address of an automatic variable Do not use the address of an automatic variable as a return value as follows Example void func void Ant Ass return amp i W2416 over 0x2000 tables ignored Xcase table option Because the number of tables exceeds 0x2000 they are output in the if else format Xcase table is ignored W2520 Immediate for shift operator is out of range The immediate value specified for the shift directive exceeds the value of the range that can be specified It is assumed that only the lower valid digits have been specified W2521 division by zero Division by zero is executed during the operation of a constant expression that is executed upon compiling It is assumed that 0 is specified for the constant expression W2525 illegal type combination for operator typel type2 The combination of types type1 type2 for operator operator is not correct Type conversion is executed and processing continues This warning message is error message E2524 when the ansi option is specified W2527 Operands of operator operator must have same type typel type2 The types to the left and the right o
144. 000e sdata 0x00000088 0x0000000e sbss 0x00000098 0x00000008 sbss 0x00000098 0x00000004 sbss 0x0000009c 0x00000004 6 7 8 9 SIZE 10 INPUT FILE crtN o main o func o stremp o 1ib850 r main o func o GpCommon 10 MEMORY ALLOCATION MAP in the link map displays the following information 1 Output segment Names of output segments configuring the object file to be generated names of the output segments are not stored 2 Segment attribute R Read W Write X Executable 3 Address 4 5 Start address of the output segment Size hexadecimal Size of the memory including the alignment conditions between sections and the align hole hexadecimal Size decimal Size of the memory including the alignment conditions between sections and the align hole decimal LINK EDITOR ALLOCATION MAP of the link map displays the following information User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 179 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 6 Output section Section name output to the load module displayed up to 12 characters 7 Input section Name of input section configuring output section displayed up to 12 characters 8 Address The start address of output section or input section 9 Size Size of output section or input section 10 Input file Object file names belonging to an input section If an area is allocated by using the comm quasi directive of the as850
145. 05 APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE 406 A 1 Structure of Object File 406 A 2 ELF Header 407 A 3 Program Header Table 408 A 4 Section Header Table 409 A 4 1 Section types 410 A 4 2 Constituent elements link info dependent on section type 410 A 5 Sections 411 A 5 1 Symbol table 411 A 5 2 String table 412 A 5 3 Reserved sections 413 APPENDIX B MESSAGE 415 B 1 Output Message 415 B 1 1 Message format 415 B 1 2 Compiler 416 B 1 3 Assembler 442 B 1 4 Linker 450 B 1 5 ROMization process 468 B 1 6 Hexadecimal converter 471 B 1 7 Archiver 477 B 1 8 Section file generator 479 B 1 9 Dump commana 480 B 1 10 Disassembler 481 B 1 11 Cross reference tool 482 B 1 12 Memory layout visualization tool 484 B 2 Messages from PM 486 B 2 1 Format of message 486 B 2 2 Messages common to compiler 486 B 2 3 Compiler 487 B 2 4 Assembler 488 B 2 5 Linker 488 B 2 6 ROMization processor 489 14 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM B 2 7 Hexadecimal converter 489 B 2 8 Archiver 490 B 2 9 Section file generator 490 B 2 10 Cross reference tool and memory layout visualization tool 491 B 3 Messages from stk850 493 B 3 1 Message formats 493 B 3 2 Messages 493 APPENDIX C INDEX 498 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 15 LIST OF FIGURES Figure No Title Page I SBRaBAOANDOAARWN AN A WWWWW
146. 0x1234 0x8000 0x9234 st hr10 BPC User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 131 132 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER The assembler outputs a bpc section in the special reserved sections when the programmable peripheral O register is referenced regardless of whether this option is specified or omitted This section is used for checking when linking The bpc section is a special reserved section for information and is never loaded into memory Therefore it need not be specified in a link directive like a normal section User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 444 Other This sets the other options of the as850 for the assembly language source file cn The common magic number value common to V850 core is embedded in the generated object as the magic number which enables the object to be used as a common object within the V850 core If this option is omitted a magic number defined by the specified target device is embedded For further description of magic numbers refer to 4 7 1 Magic number cnv850e V850E This option sets the common magic number common to the V850Ex core as the magic number of the object to be generated This will enable the object to be used within the V850Ex core If this option is omitted a magic number defined for the specified target device is set cenv850e2 V850E2 This option sets the common magic number common to the V850E2 core as the magic number of the object to be generated This
147. 1 2512 Bank of China Tower 200 Yincheng Road Central Pudong New Area Shanghai P R China P C 200120 Tel 021 5888 5400 http www cn necel com NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2886 9318 http www hk necel com NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 02 8175 9600 http www tw necel com NEC Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 238A Thomson Road 12 08 Novena Square Singapore 307684 Tel 6253 8311 http www sg necel com NEC Electronics Korea Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 02 558 3737 http www kr necel com GO07 1A
148. 1 File 128 4 4 2 Option 129 4 4 3 Device 131 4 4 4 Other 133 4 5 Settings Made via PM 135 4 5 1 Assembler Options dialog box 136 Option 137 Difference 141 4 6 Assemble List 143 4 6 1 Output method 143 4 6 2 Output example 144 4 7 Cautions 146 4 7 1 Magic number 146 4 7 2 Options for avoiding CPU faults 148 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 153 5 1 Flow of Operation 153 5 1 1 Link procedure 155 5 2 Operation Method 157 5 2 1 Command input method 157 5 2 2 Method using PM 157 5 3 Types and Features of Options 158 5 3 1 Input file 159 5 3 2 Output file 160 5 3 3 Library 161 5 3 4 Flash ROM 162 5 3 5 Device 164 5 3 6 Option 165 5 3 7 Other 168 5 4 Settings Made via PM 170 5 4 1 Linker Options dialog box 170 File 171 Library 172 Option 174 Others 177 5 5 Link Map 178 5 5 1 When starting the Id850 from the command line 178 5 5 2 When starting from PM 178 5 5 3 Link map output example 178 5 6 Flash Memory External ROM Relink Function 181 5 6 1 Relink function 181 5 6 2 Image of relink function 182 10 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 5 6 3 Realizing relink function 185 5 7 Supplementary Information 194 5 7 1 Using A option 194 5 7 2 Archive files 197 5 7 3 Reserved symbols 198 5 7 4 May not be allocated to the expected sections
149. 10 name not defined name is not defined E2211 redeclaration of name name has been redeclared E2213 Nothing is declared No declarator is specified E2214 Void object is not allowed void object is not allowed 418 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2217 Undeclared function function is called Function function without declaration has been called E2220 Both signed and unsigned are specified Both signed and unsigned have been specified E2221 illegal type specifier combination The combination of type specifiers is incorrect E2236 Typedef declaration must not have initializer The typedef declaration cannot include an initializer E2237 too many initializers Too many initializers are used E2238 illegal initializer The initializer is incorrect E2240 Local static function is not allowed A static function cannot be declared in the local scope E2250 Array size is not given The size of the array is not given E2251 Array size must be greater than zero The size of the array must be greater than zero E2252 Array type has incomplete element type The type of the array element is incomplete E2253 compiler limit array size is too large 0Oxfffffff The size of the array is too large Maximum value is Oxfffffff E2260 compiler limit complicated type modifiers num Too many derivative modifiers are used The maximum value for
150. 12EJ1VOUM 90 147 a 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 1 E j 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 1 AUON aO N gt L 0 OOO O O WONNNNNNNDDDAADAAAAAMAAAVAAANAMNAAAUN I O 1 OORWNANANDTAWNH HA BPHBRBAABABOANDARWNANND 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 1 11 2 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 12 13 12 14 12 15 12 16 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 Example of Output Information on Executable Object File 195 Example of Output Information on Relocatable Object File 196 Creation of Object for ROMization 204 Image of Processing Immediately After _rcopy Function Call 205 Link Directive Taking ROMization Processing into Consideration 210 Link Directive Taking ROMization Processing into Consideration Size Considered 211 Example of Using Copy Function _rcopy 1 212 ROMization Image 1 214 Example of rompack s 215 Example of Using Copy Function _rcopy 2 215 Link Directive Specification Example 216 ROMization Image 2 217 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box File Tab 232 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box Section Tab 233 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box Option Tab 235 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box Others Tab 237 Operation Flow in hx850 238 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box File Tab 248 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box Option Tab 249 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box Others Tab
151. 2783 statement with no effect There is a statement without meaning E2785 Conversion may lose significant digit The data may be lost E7201 multiple defined symbol symbol Multiple defined symbol symbol exists E7202 redeclaration of symbol symbol is redeclared E7203 undefined symbol symbol symbol is undefined E7204 undefined label Lnum The label Lnum is undefined E7205 Argument type mismatch is detected where caller calls callee The argument types of caller and callee differ during inline expansion E7206 Return value type mismatch is detected where caller calls callee The types of the return values of caller and callee differ during inline expansion E7207 interrupt request name already specified Interrupt request name name has already been specified E7208 inconsistent section for symbol The section contradicts symbol F1001 out of memory Memory capacity is insufficient F1002 cannot recover from previous errors Processing cannot continue due an error that occurred previously F1102 invalid argument of option option The argument of option option is illegal F1103 nested command file file The command file file is nested It must not be nested F1104 Argument of reg option requires 26 or 22 Specify either 26 or 22 as the argument of the reg option F1105 cannot use optionl1 option with
152. 32bit Jump Inst Xfar_jump V850E2 When a V850E2 core is specified as the device type in the assembler far jump is specified for branch instructions jarl jr that do not include 22 32 To change the setting in instruction units explicitly describe jarl22 jarl32 or jr22 jr32 Also the jmp instruction is not affected by this option User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 139 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 14 Use Command File In the Windows environment the length of character strings used to specify options for the ca850 is restricted If this check box is selected the option character string is output to a command file which enables the operation to be completed without observing the restriction on the character string length Check this check box if many options are set and not all of them can be recognized Under the default setting the check box is not checked For the details of command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 15 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to Button a Delete Source Option button This button can be selected when option settings for individual source files have been made and is not displayed is dimmed and cannot be selected when options for the overall project have been specified When selected this button deletes any option specified for a particular source file and applies only global options
153. 41 7 4 1 File 242 7 4 2 Format 243 7 4 3 Other 246 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 11 7 5 Settings Made via PM 247 7 5 1 Hexa Converter Options dialog box 247 File 248 Option 249 Others 252 7 6 Output File Formats 253 7 6 1 Intel expanded 253 7 6 2 Motorola S type 257 7 6 3 Expanded Tek 259 CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER 263 8 1 Archiver 263 8 2 Operation Method 264 8 2 1 Command input method 264 8 2 2 Method using PM 264 8 3 Types and Features of Keys and Options 265 8 3 1 Types and features of keys 266 8 3 2 Types and features of options 268 8 4 Settings Made via PM 269 8 4 1 Archiver Options dialog box 269 Option 270 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 272 9 1 Section Files 272 9 2 Section File Format 275 9 3 Operation Method 280 9 3 1 Command input method 280 9 3 2 Method using PM 280 9 3 3 Use from command line 281 9 3 4 Use via PM 282 9 4 Types and Features of Options 283 9 4 1 Options 284 9 5 Settings Made via PM 287 9 5 1 Section File Generator Options dialog box 287 File 288 Option 289 Others 292 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 293 10 1 Dump Command 293 10 2 Operation Method 294 10 2 1 Command input method 294 10 2 2 Method using PM 294 10 3 Types and Features of Options 295 10 4 Settings Made via PM 297 10 4
154. 6 Strict Integer Extension Xe Note are used When this box is checked ___mul ___mulu and ____div ___ divu from the runtime library instead of mulh and divh directives for integers having data lengths of 16 bits or less Multiplication and division are performed strictly according to the ANSI standards although this slows down the processing speed If this check box is not selected the mulh and divh instructions are used Note The runtime library in the CA850 is provided as the ca850 s standard library in order to fulfill the ANSI standards with regard to instructions that are not included in the V850 microcontrollers architecture For details of the runtime library refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual 7 Treat Tentative Definition as Definition Xdefvar When this box is checked tentative definitions are treated as definitions 8 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 89 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Optimization and Debug Information This tab is used to set optimization level in source units and debug information Figure 3 15 Compiler Options Dialog Box Optimization and Debug Information Tab Compiler Options Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others General InputFile Preprocessor C Language
155. 7 Variable Placement 51 Operation Method 225 Options 228 Ww Other 230 Warning Level 82 105 rompcrt 74 Warning Message 60 rompsec Section 208 Windows version 22 S Z sconst 101 Zero Register 108 139 sdata sbss 138 Section 233 Section File 84 Section File Format 275 Section File Generator 272 Operation Method 280 Options 284 Section File Generator Options 287 Section File Generator Options dialog box 287 Section Files 272 Section Header Table 306 311 409 Section Types 410 Sections 411 Security ID 77 Signed 53 Source Debugger 37 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box 394 Standard Folder 24 Standard Library 172 Startup 72 Startup File 72 Startup Routine 188 Static performance analyzer 336 372 Static performance analyzer dialog box 336 372 strcmp Expansio 48 strcpy 103 strcpy Expansion 48 Strict Integer Extension 89 String Table 307 412 Structure of Object File 406 Structure Packing 55 Suppress Warning 175 switch 54 102 Symbol Table 249 307 311 411 Tag information 345 Tag information 355 Temporary Directory 109 tidata Section 289 tidata byte Section 289 500 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM For further information please contact NEC Electronics Corporation
156. 850 to create a ROMization module from the executable module completed at step 6 If Create Object for ROM has been specified via PM the processing from steps 6 to this step is performed automatically up to the creation of the hexadecimal file If activation was via the command line after the Id850 has been activated from the ca850 and the executable module has been created the romp850 is activated to create the object for ROMization A corresponding mapping image is shown below Figure 6 10 ROMization Image 2 Executable object output by the Id850 Executable object output by the romp850 Peripheral I O Peripheral I O sidata section tidata section sedata section sdata section data section sidata section romp850 rompack section Copied information __rompack __rompack text section text section const section const section sconst section sconst section Interrupt Interrupt 0x0 0x0 hx850 Hex file ROM writer Target system User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 217 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 5 Copy Functions 6 5 1 Copy routine This section describes the copy routines _rcopy necessary for the program to be stored in ROM Table 6 2 Copy Routines Function Name Feature _rcopy Copies ROMization section 1 byte transfer _rcopy1 Copies ROMization section 1 byte transfer _r
157. 9408 Illegal file format path line line as type The specified file is not correct as type Specify the correct file This message appears when the project file specified in the menu after the stk850 starts is incorrect the stk system file is incorrect or an incorrect file is specified as a stack size specification file W9410 Unknown function name function in file path line line Only functions explicitly referred to in the project are allowed In the stack size specification file a setting for a function function that is not used in the project was found Check the function name A Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output Table B 2 Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box Button Description Stop To stop reading Restart To ignore the error line and start reading the next line Ignore To ignore the error line and start reading the next line Display of the dialog box is suppressed for subsequent warnings W9410 to W9426 however the warnings are output to the message display area W9411 Too long file name qualifying static function name in file path line line The limit is 255 In the stack size specification file a file name for which a static function is declared and which is too long was found Reduce the number of characters to 255 or less The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9412 Too long callee function name in file path line line The limit is 1022 In
158. Comment Xc This check box is used to output a C language source program as a comment to the assembly language source file and assemble list that are output This option is the same as the item set for Output Source Comment Xc of the Output Code tab 9 Define Macro D This edit box is used to specify a macro name to be defined in the form of macro name defined value def If defined value def is omitted def is assumed to be 1 Example test 2 macro test is defined as 2 It is assumed that define name def is described before a C language source program To define two or more macros delimit each with semicolon By selecting the Edit button the Edit Option dialog box can be displayed and the defined macro can be edited in this dialog box Blanks must not be used in a macro name This option is the same as the item set for Define Macro D on the Preprocessor tab 10 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to Button a Delete Source Option button This button can be selected when option settings for individual source files have been made and is not displayed is dimmed and cannot be selected when options for the overall project have been specified When selected this button deletes any option specified for a particular source file and applies only global options
159. Compiler Options Dialog Box Message Tab 105 Compiler Options Dialog Box Assembler Tab 107 Compiler Options Dialog Box Others Tab 109 Compiler Options Dialog Box Difference Tab 111 Edit Option Dialog Box 113 Add Option Dialog Box 113 Optimization Processing and Parameters 117 Operation Flow of as850 124 Assembler Options Dialog Box Option Tab 137 Assembler Options Dialog Box Difference Tab 141 Example of Output Assemble List 144 Image of Creating Common Object with as850 146 SS Example of as850 CPU Core Compatibility V850Ex Core and V850 Core Operation Flow of Id850 153 Id850 Operation Image Example 154 Batch Processing 154 Modular Processing 154 Creation of Output Section 155 Allocation to Memory Space 155 Linker Options Dialog Box 170 Linker Options Dialog Box File Tab 171 Linker Options Dialog Box Library Tab 172 Library List Dialog Box 173 Linker Options Dialog Box Option Tab 174 Linker Options Dialog Box Others Tab 177 Link Map Output Example 179 In Fixed ROM 182 In Flash Memory 182 From Fixed ROM to Flash Memory 183 From Flash Memory to Fixed ROM 184 Compiler Common Options for Flash Memory 191 Compiler Common Options for Fixed ROM 191 Memory Allocation Image of gp Offset Reference Section 194 User s Manual U185
160. DECIMAL CONVERTER 7 3 Operation Method This section describes how the hx850 operates 7 3 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt hx850 option file name Can be omitted Pattern in immediately before can be repeated 7 3 2 Method using PM The Hexa Converter Options dialog box that is used to set the hex converter options can be displayed via the following methods once a project has been established under PM Select Tool Hex Converter Options Since the hex converter is activated once per project there are no file specific settings The name of the output file that is output by the hex converter is identical with the output file name from the Id850 or romp850 with the suffix changed to hex To modify the name of the object file specify a file name in Output File o field on the File tab 240 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 4 Types and Features of Options The hx850 options are shown below Symbols used in option list PM Option exists as specification item under the PM User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 241 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 4 1 File This specification specifies the name of the file to be output by the hx850 err file file This option adds and saves error messages to the file file err file file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the file file
161. E core common cnv850e is specified as the magic number by an assembler option code 5 to 10 is output Code 1 to 4 is output if the target device is the V850 core If V850 core common cn is specified as the magic number by an assembler option code 1 to 10 is output Note 148 To determine whether or not a fault that has occurred is from the CPU being used refer to the CPU s documentation If p option and as850 optimization option O are specified at the same time when the target device of the V850 core is specified or if a V850 core common object is created p takes precedence and O is ignored If p option and as850 optimization option O are specified at the same time when a target device of the V850Ex core V850E2 core is specified or if a V850Ex core V850E2 core common object is created both p and O are valid If a code pattern that generates a fault covers different sections this option s function becomes invalid Only the Xv850patch 11 option is handled by the ca850 The correspondence between CPU core and p option is as follows for the newest version uPD70 F 3xxx not including maintenance or obsolete products To check whether or not the failure affects the CPU used refer to the CPU s documentation User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER Table 4 4 Correspondence Between CPU Core and p Option CPU Core p1 p2 p3 p4 p4a p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 V850 co
162. F Display source file names line number Ps Omi same level i s A Q it outputed I Display with reference information Doral UTE ns Set default option Cancel __Help 1 Output format If Normal format is checked the analysis result of the leaf list is output in the text format It is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in the normal format by using the File name edit box The default file name is ccalltre Ist The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when Normal format is selected If CSV format is checked the analysis result of the leaf list is output in the CSV format It is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in the CSV format by using the File name edit box The default file name is ccalltre csv The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when CSV format is selected 346 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 Output function specification method Select the method of specifying the functions to be output Output all All functions are output default Specified functions Only the specified function is output If this is selected Read Function Function n
163. Hexadecimal Converter 238 File 242 Flow of Operation 238 Format 243 Input Output Files 239 Operation Method 240 Other 246 Output File Formats 253 Include 86 107 137 Individual Warnings 106 Inline Expansion 45 Input File 84 Input Output Files 29 Installation 23 Intel expanded 253 Intermediate Output Directory 70 Internal ROM 176 Library 172 Library 59 Line Number Information 308 Link Directive 73 Link Directive 189 Link Map 171 175 178 Linker 153 Device 164 Flow of Operation 153 Input File 159 Library 161 Operation Method 157 Option 165 Other 168 Output File 160 Linker Options 170 Linker Options dialog box 170 Loop Expansion Optimization 47 Magic number 146 main function 199 Mask Register 103 139 176 Mathematics Library 173 199 Memory Layout Visualization Tool 366 Input File 367 Operation Method 368 Options 369 Output Files 381 Output Information 367 APPENDIX C INDEX Memory Map 235 Message 105 Message 415 Message Dialog Box 486 Message Format 415 Motorola S type 257 NOBITS 251 O 119 Ob 118 Object Analysis Tool dialog box 297 317 378 Od 118 Og 119 Operating Environments 22 Operation Method 32 Optimization 44 91 Optimization and
164. If an archive file is input to the dump command and if a member that is not an object file exists in the archive file a warning message is output and the next member is processed except however when the e option is specified For details of the options refer to 10 3 Types and Features of Options User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 293 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 2 Operation Method This section describes how to operate the dump850 command 10 2 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt dump850 option filel file2 Can be omitted Pattern in immediately before can be repeated 10 2 2 Method using PM The Object Analysis Tool dialog box that is used to activate the dump command can be displayed via the following methods once a project has been established under PM Select Tool Startup Object Analysis Tool then click the Dump tab Since the dump command is activated once per project there are no file specific settings 294 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 3 Types and Features of Options The dump850 options are shown below A This option displays the entire contents of the specified object file or archive file Specifying the A option is the same as specifying abcfghiklmrst d If no option is specified it is assumed that the A option is specified This option does not display the member update date among the dis
165. If this option is not specified the memory space is handled as a 64 M bytes space and addresses are resolved Set this option in accordance with the chipset to be used The physical address space of the V850Ex core has 256 M bytes in many cases When creating an application that uses a space between 64 M bytes and 256 M bytes specify this option Xsid id PM This option sets the security ID of an on chip flash memory device It cannot be used if a device not supporting the security ID function is used Specify the ID in a hexadecimal number of 10 bytes or less including the first Ox If the specified value runs short of 10 bytes the higher bits are filled with 0 If 10 bytes are exceeded an error is output If the specification of a security ID is omitted for a device supporting the security ID function it is assumed that Ox fFTFFTFTTTTFTTTT is specified If the security ID is set using a method other than the above the compiler judges that the security ID is duplicated with the security ID that is generated by the linker and outputs the following error F4264 start address 0x00000070 of section SECURITY_ID overlaps previous section section name ended before address OxXXXXXXXXX In such a case specify the Xsid option to suppress security ID generation by the linker If an object for a device not supporting the security ID function is specified when the linker is executed a warning message is output and t
166. Intel extended hex format and no error occurs even if the result of adding the offset of the data record exceeds 20 bits User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W8736 The address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that can be expressed in the Motorola S type hex format standard address The address exceeds the maximum value 24 bits of an address that can be expressed in the Motorola S type hex format standard address Processing is continued with the range that can be expressed output as addresses Supplement The possible causes of this message are the following 1 ROMization was skipped It is possible that an attempt was made to execute hex conversion of a section in internal RAM together with a section allocated to ROM Execute ROMization before hex conversion 2 Wrong section is specified for hex conversion The addresses of the sections that are to be converted into hex format at the same time may be widely apart If two or more ROMs are used execute hex conversion on each ROM Check if the section to be converted into hex format is correct and if the allocation address of the section is correct 3 The section itself is too large If the area to be converted into hex format is too large and the range that can be expressed is exceeded hex conversion cannot be executed Either divide the area into segments within the range that can be expressed or use another hex format W8737 The
167. LOAD RX V0x400 text SPROGBITS AX text be Size of TEXT segment is 0x100 bytes or more An error occurs as a result of linking because the branch table cannot be allocated to address 0x500 Change the value specified by ext_table User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 189 190 CHAPTER 5 LINKER If another segment is allocated to the address specified by ext_table before the relink function is used but the address of that segment is not specified in the link directive file the branch table is allocated to the address specified by ext_table and the original segment is moved behind the branch table If the segment overlaps a segment for which an address is specified as a result of moving however an error occurs Address specification of branch table ext_ table 0x500 Link directive file part TEXT LOAD RX text SPROGBITS AX text It is assumed that the TEXT segment is allocated from address 0x500 as a continuation from the segment ahead of the TEXT segment At this time the branch table is allocated to address 0x500 because no address is specified for the TEXT segment and the TEXT segment is allocated behind the branch table User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 Assembler and linker options To assemble an object in the flash memory specify the assembler option zf When the as850 alone is activat
168. Library lc IV Link Mathematics Library Im Library List Library Options OK Cancel Help OK 1 Library I This option specifies the string portion of the archive file library file libstring a to be accessed When specifying several files delimit each name with a semicolon Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where the library items can be edited The archive file is searched in the folder specified by Library Search Path L and the standard 2 Library Search Path L This specifies the folder where the archive file library file to be accessed is stored When specifying several folders delimit each name with a semicolon Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where the path items can be edited If a folder is specified by this option the library is searched from the specified folder before the standard folders of the library If two or more folders are specified the library is searched in the sequence in which the folders were specified in the text box 3 Link Standard Library Ic This check box is used to reference the standard library libc a provided in the package This check box is selected as the default setting 172 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 4 Link Mathematics Library Im Because the mathematics library references the standard library also check the standard library as a reference library
169. M 456 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4258 segment directive of segment segment needs string A string is required for the segment directive of segment segment F4259 section directive of section section needs string A string is required for the section directive F4260 symbol directive of symbol symbol needs string A string is required for the symbol directive of symbol symbol F4263 start address numberl of segment segmenti overlaps previous segment segment2 ended before address number2 The start address number1 of segment segment overlaps the area of segment segment2 allocated up to address number2 Caution If a segment that must not overlap overlaps during linking and thus an error occurs check that the segment of the higher address is described first in the specification of the link directive Here is an example of the error Example DATA1 LOAD RW V0x300000 data PROGBITS AW sdata SPROGBITS AWG sbss SNOBITS AWG bss SNOBITS AW TEXT LOAD RX VOx100000 L0x100000 text SPROGBITS AX text Sequentially specify the addresses of the segment starting from the lowest address Therefore describe a segment to be allocated to the lower address first F4264 start address numberl of section sectioni overlaps previous section section2 ended before address number2 The start address number1 of section section overlaps the area of sect
170. M 233 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR b Add t This button adds a section to Section List as a t option It adds the section specified in Section to Section List as a section to be specified by the t option In other words if a section specified in Section has a text or const attribute it is added to the section list by using this button c Delete This button deletes the section currently selected in Section List d Up This button moves the section currently selected in Section List up by one position e Down This button moves the section currently selected in Section List down by one position 3 ROM Section File A ROM section file makes it easy to specify the number specified by the second argument of _rcopy _rcopy1 _rcopy2 or _rcopy4 in an application and is a C language source header file in which number and label are made to correspond by define Therefore the section to be copied from the rompsec section can be specified by specifying a label as the second argument For example the following is output if text data const and text1 are registered to the section list and the ROM section file is output define ROMPSCN text 1 define ROMPSCN_ data 2 define ROMPSCN const 3 define ROMPSCN textl1 4 a File Name If a file name is specified in this text box the file is output according to b or c b Output If Change If this check box is checked the file specified in the above text b
171. M Flash Device Branch Table Address 0 200000 Boot Object File Browse By checking this check box object files that uses re linking function of the flash area are created Check is necessary with both the flash area side and the boot area side Cancel Apply Help User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 191 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 6 ext_ent_size quasi directive When an actual function is called from the branch table in the flash memory jr branch instructions are output as follows by default ___ext_table_ head jr _func_flasho jr _func_flashl jr _func_flash2 However the jr instruction can branch only within a 22 bit range because of a restriction of the architecture To branch in the entire 32 bit space additionally specify the ext_ent_size quasi directive The format of this directive is as follows ext_ent_size size Entry size of table The value that can be specified as the entry size is 4 8 or 10 Entry size of table above means instruction size necessary for one branch processing The default entry size is 4 In this case a 4 byte instruction is allocated as follows jr _flash_funco 4 byte instruction If 8 is specified a total of 8 bytes of instructions are allocated as follows mov flash _funcO r1 6 byte instruction jmp r1 2 byte instruction If 10 is specified a total of 10 bytes of instructions are allocated
172. O register must not be specified as an operand E3218 illegal operand cannot write I O register which does not have write access Writing the on chip peripheral I O register specified as the operand is prohibited E3219 illegal operand inconsistent bit position The bit position specified by the bit manipulation instruction is contradictory E3220 illegal operand identifier is reserved word Reserved word identifier is used in a name E3221 illegal operand label label An expression in the format of label label is specified for a branch instruction E3222 illegal operand label not allowed A label is specified for an instruction for which a label must not be specified as an operand E3223 illegal operand label not allowed for setf shl A label is specified for the setf or shift instruction E3224 illegal operand label reference for jmp must be label An absolute address reference label is not specified for the jmp instruction E3225 illegal operand must be evaluated positive or zero The result of evaluating the expression is negative E3226 illegal operand must be even displacement An odd displacement is specified E3227 illegal operand must be immediate label or symbol for hi lo hil Immediate label or symbol is not specified for hi lo and hi1 E3228 illegal operand must be register A register is not specified E3229 illegal operand needs base register A base
173. OAD RX VOxffe000 Sidata SPROGBITS AW sidata sibss SNOBIT AWG sibss __tp TEXT TP_SYMBOL __gp_ DATA GP_SYMBOL amp _tp_ TEXT DATA __ep DATA EP_SYMBOL User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 211 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 4 Creating Object for ROMization 6 4 1 Creating procedure default This section describes a method that uses the ROMization area reservation code rompcrt o that is provided as the default object 1 First a copy function is called within the application The copy function should be activated early on such as within the startup routine or at the start of the main function _rcopy _rcopy1 _rcopy2 and _rcopy4 are available as copy functions and each of these has a different transfer size the transfer size of _rcopy and _rcopy1 is the same For details of the copy functions refer to 6 5 Copy Functions An example of using a copy function is shown in the figure below In this example the _rcopy function is activated at the start of the main function Figure 6 5 Example of Using Copy Function _rcopy 1 define ALL COPY 1 int _rcopy unsigned long long extern unsigned long _S romp void main void intret ret rcopy amp S romp ALL COPY 2 During ROMization the rompsec section is added immediately after the text section By allocating the text section to the end of ROM the rompsec section up to the end of ROM can be allo
174. OMPILER 3 When starting the ca850 the as850 and the Id850 by themselves gt ca850 cpu 3201 c file c This reads file c to create the relocatable object file file o gt as850 cpu 3201 asm s This reads asm s to create the relocatable object file asm o gt 1d850 org _crt o file o asm o lc This links org_crt o file o and asm o to create the executable object file a out referenced User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM At this time libc a is 31 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 4 Operation Method This section explains how to operate the ca850 3 4 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt ca850 option file name file name or option Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated 3 4 2 Method using PM The Compiler Options dialog box that is used to set compiler options for the C language source files can be displayed via either of the following methods once a project has been established under PM Set for all C language source files of the target project 1 Select Tool Compiler Options Set for a specific C language source file 1 Select the name of the source file to be set a option in the Project window on the PM 2 Select Individual Compiler Options item that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button 32 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 Types and Features of Opt
175. Oe DN DISASSEMBLER dis850 _ CROSS REFERENCE TOOL cxref MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL rammap 12 STACK USAGE TRACER stk850 13 LINK DIRECTIVE GENERATOR LDG These programs can be activated in either of the following ways 1 Activating from integrated development environment PM PM is included in the C compiler package For details of PM refer to PM User s Manual 2 Activating from command line Activate the C compiler package by inputting a command in response to the command prompt To generate a load module file by using a batch file or make file describe the module in the command input format Utilities 8 to 11 above can also be activated by inputting a command For details on command input methods refer to the section Operation Method for the respective tool 20 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW The package configuration is as shown below when PM is used Figure 1 1 Package Configuration CA850 package command C compiler Assembler ROMization processor Hexadecimal converter Archiver 3 Dissassembler Section file generator Cross reference tool Memory layout visualization tool Command prompt Stack usage tracer Link directive generator Specify the options of the C compiler assembler linker and so on that are included in the CA850 package commands above on the relevant windows from PM PM automatically activates these commands and create
176. R 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR ROMization is not possible if the default link directive and the CONST segment are both used Since the default link directive allocates the CONST segment immediately after the TEXT segment the packed section rompsec section and the CONST segment become overlapped during the ROMization processor s default operation Perform one of the following responses while considering the additional sample directive attached to the package Note v850def dir v850def2 dir v850def3 dir stored in install folder smp850 ca850 v850def dir Sample using internal ROM RAM and external RAM v850def2 dir Sample using only internal ROM RAM v850def3 dir Sample using internal ROM RAM external RAM and internal instruction RAM such as V850E ME2 Memory allocation must suit the microprocessor being used Place the CONST segment before the TEXT segment CONST LOAD R const SPROGBITS A const TEXT LOAD RX text PROGBITS AX Reserve a packed section area refer to CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR after the TEXT segment and place the CONST segment after that reserved section TEXT LOAD RX text SPROGBITS AX Packed section area Address specification takes packed section into account CONST LOAD R V0x200000 const SPROGBITS A const a User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 201 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 7 11 Programmable peripher
177. SAGE E2642 Function function is already defined block interrupt must be specified before function definition Interrupts cannot be disabled after the function definition E2644 Function function is already defined without interrupt Although the function function is specified as an interrupt handler function has been already defined without an interrupt specification E2646 Both interrupt and RTOS interrupt attributes are specified The normal interrupt and RTOS interrupt must not be specified at the same time E2647 Specifying interrupt name name is not allowed RESET and RST must not be specified as an interrupt request name E2648 unknown cpu type cannot use interrupt request name An interrupt request name cannot be used because no device is specified E2649 Interrupt function function with direct is undefined Function function that is specified to be located directly is not defined in the file E2650 illegal directive pragma section section name must be specified A section name is not specified in section allocation by the pragma directive E2651 illegal directive pragma section unrecognized section name name An illegal section name name is specified in section allocation by the pragma directive E2652 illegal directive pragma section begin or end must be specified begin and end are necessary for section allocation
178. Static performance analyzer dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following six tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 12 2 Cross reference Option Dialog Box Tab Description Common option Setting of common options Cross reference list Setting of the cross reference list Tag information Setting of the tag information Call graph Setting of the call graph Function measure Setting of the function measure Call database Setting of the call database 340 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Common option This tab is used to set common options Figure 12 3 Cross reference option Dialog Box Common option Tab Cross reference option Call graph Function measure Call database Common option Cross reference list Tag information Information in include file Non display include files Display nothin Display specified ifik r Bead non display _ Non display identifications identifications File name r Bone Read regarding Regard identifications as type identifications as type File name po oo ici De Change Dee Set default option Cancel ppl Help 1 Information in include file Specify how the include file information is to be output to the execution result Display all Displays all
179. The processing above is performed without question when creating a relocatable object file and when creating an executable object file The bpc section is a special reserved section for information and is never loaded into memory Therefore it need not be specified in a link directive like a normal section User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 7 12 Option byte Describe 6 byte data in the assembly language source as follows in order to use the option byte function section OPTION BYTES byte0b00000001 Ox7a byte0b00000000 0x7b byte0b00000000 0x7c byte0b00000000 0x7d byte0b00000000 0x7e byte0b00000000 0x7f Ifa device not having the option byte is specified it is handled as an ordinary input section Ifa device having the option byte is specified and if description of this section is omitted the initial value set in the device file is set Be sure to describe 6 bytes for this section If less than 6 bytes is described the following message is output and linking is stopped F4112 illegal section section size The initial value of a bit that cannot be set must not be changed If it is changed the following message is output W4613 illegal flash mask option access file file address num1 bit num2 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 203 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR This chapter describes an outline of the ROMization processor romp850 a
180. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http Awww renesas com inquiry 2 PENESAS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gran
181. VOUM Output information 1 Cross reference Tag jump information Text file or standard output Output information 2 Call tree Call database Function metrics Text file CSV format file or standard output 323 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 2 Input Output 12 2 1 Input file The CXREF input file is a C language source file If the cpp850 option is specified when the cross reference tool is started the cross reference tool processing is performed after the specified C language source file has passed through the preprocessor 1 A prerequisite for CXREF processing is that the C language source file to be input contains no syntax errors Confirm that compilation has been executed for the C language source file and that no syntax error was found 2 The character set is assumed to be Shift JIS 3 The cross reference tool performs its analysis by simply ignoring preprocessor instructions included in the C language source file without performing any error handling for these instructions Therefore if a C language source file does not contain any of the following items it can be processed directly without specifying the cpp850 option even if the file has not passed through the ca850 This is effective when ignoring a header file when subjecting false condition blocks to analysis and when targeting macro names for cross reference Condition block in which braces are not balanced Macro created for a c
182. VOUM 149 4 4 Xv850patch 4 p4 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER This inserts a nop instruction immediately after the first load instruction in relation to the combination of load instruction Id b h w sld b h w load store instruction Id b h w sld b h w sst b h w st b h w inserted when the peripheral I O register has been accessed in the input file Example ld w ld w ld w nop ld w 5 4a Xv850patch 4a p4a This inserts a nop instruction immediately after the first load instruction in relation to the combination of load instruction Id b h w sld b h w load store instruction Id b h w sld b h w sst b h w st b h w inserted regardless of whether the peripheral I O register is accessed or not Example ld w ld w ld w nop ld w p4 sets patch 4 in cases where peripheral I O access occurs in an input file p4a sets patch 4 regardless of whether or not peripheral I O access occurs 6 5 Xv850patch 5 p5 This inserts a nop instruction in relation to the multiplication instruction immediately after it without any conditions Example mulh mulh jarl nop jarl 7 6 Xv850patch 6 p6 This inserts a nop instruction immediately after the load instruction in relation to the combination of load instruction Id b h w sld b h w jr jarl jcond bcond Example sld bu sld bu jarl nop jarl 8 7 Xv850patch 7 p7
183. WWWWWWWWND Li Li UN a Oo I PBR OANDOAARWNADABRWHND i E 3 RWONM O aAannana na nnan aa n nankpR HR HRA HA Li 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 16 Package Configuration 21 Folder Organization 24 Folder Organization of Stack Usage Tracer 25 Operation Flow of ca850 28 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box File Tab 70 Checking Creation of Folder 71 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Device Tab 76 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box ROM Tab library 78 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Flash Tab library 79 Compiler Options Dialog Box General Tab 81 Compiler Options Dialog Box Input File Tab 84 Compiler Options Dialog Box Preprocessor Tab 86 Compiler Options Dialog Box C Language Tab 88 Startup Tab 72 Link Directive Tab 73 ROM Tab 74 Flash Tab 75 SS SS e A Compiler Options Dialog Box Optimization and Debug Information Tab Compiler Options Dialog Box Detail of Optimization Tab 92 Output Example Function Name func 93 Compiler Options Dialog Box External Register Tab 96 Compiler Options Dialog Box Output File Tab 98 Compiler Options Dialog Box Output Code Tab 100
184. X 00000010 63 E_PROLOGUE A X 00000010 95F0 64 jbr L16 A X 00000012 65 FUNC_ARG A X 00000012 66 G5 A X 00000012 67 set S2 0x4 A X 00000012 68 set F2 0x4 A X 00000012 69 set A2 0x0 A X 00000012 70 set T2 0x0 A X 00000012 7L set P2 0x0 A X 00000012 72 set R2 0x0 A X 00000012 73 set X2 0x0 1 2 3 4 5 144 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER The parts of the assemble list lines are described below 1 Section attribute These are section attributes for sections stored in the corresponding line Section attributes and their meanings are described in the following table Table 4 3 Section Attributes and Their Meanings Section Attribute Meaning A Section occupying memory W Section that can be written X Executable section G Section allocated to memory area that can be referenced by using global pointer gp and 16 bit displacement 2 Value of location counter This is the location counter value for the beginning of the line of code 3 Code This is the code expressed as a two digit hexadecimal number 4 Line number This is the given line s line number expressed as a decimal number 5 Source program This is the assembly language source program on a given line If instruction expansion is executed for the instruction on that line the instruction string resulting from the instruction expansion is indicated following The
185. _main 0x5 0x0 0x0 0x1 a b c d e f 9 h i a start of subsection b Address of function c Address of debug information d Padding e Function name Line number Position of statement Offset Flag 308 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 13 Debug information Display the contents of the debug information DEBUG INFORMATION Tag Attr Aux 0x0016 size 0x00000026 0x000c Ox00000E1C a b c a Tag b Attribute c Auxiliary information 14 PROGBITS data PROGBITS DATA in HEX 0x00000000 40 OE 00 00 21 2E 00 00 Display in hexadecimal numbers the raw data contents of the section having section type PROGBITS User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 309 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 5 2 Element values and meanings When the v option has been specified the following information indicates that character strings are used instead of numerical values to indicate the meanings of the values for some elements ELF header Program header table Section header table Symbol table Relocation information Debug information The following tables list valuesN t the display when v is specified and the meanings of the elements that are displayed as character strings when v has been specified Note 1 Flags in ELF headers The value is displayed using the number base output by the dump850 command
186. a programmable peripheral O register When an address is specified the Xbpc option is passed to the compiler and the bpc option is passed to the as850 If the target device such as the V850E IA1 has a programmable peripheral I O register function and if an address that can be modified value to be set to the BPC register is set the value must be determined when the application is compiled assembled If this option is used the application is compiled assembled with the specified value When specifying this option be sure to specify a value A value can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers If an illegal value is specified or if a value exceeding the permissible range of the BPC register is specified a warning message is output and this option is ignored 76 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Example Xbpc 0x1234 In the above case if the target device is the V850E IA1 the start address of the programmable peripheral O register area is treated as 0x48d0000 which results from shifting this value 14 bits to the left Only one value can be set for the overall application If Xbpc and bpc are specified as options of each file the value of the address must be the same among the files However this option does not have to be set for a file that does not use a programmable peripheral I O register lf a target device without a programmable peripheral I O register f
187. ab Symbol table SYMTAB None text text section PROGBITS AX tibss tibss section NOBITS AW tibss byte tibss byte section NOBITS AW tibss word tibss word section NOBITS AW tidata tidata section PROGBITS AW User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 413 APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE Table A 8 Reserved Sections NameNote 1 Description Section Type Bor an tidata byte tidata byte section PROGBITS AW tidata word tidata word section PROGBITS AW vdbstrtab Symbol table for debug information STRTAB None vdebug Debug information PROGBITS None version Version information section PROGBITS None vline Line number information PROGBITS None Notes1 The name part of gptabname relname and relaname indicates the name of the section corresponding to each respective section 2 This is information that is used when processing the linker s A option 414 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE This appendix describes the messages used in the CA850 B 1 Output Message This section describes the messages output by the CA850 B 1 1 Message format Example 103 Bie Error code Error occurs in front end Error due to syntax error or exceeding compiler limit The name of the module responsible for the error is appended to the message output by the ca850 If the file name or line number where the error occurred can be identified it is appended also along with a message number
188. abase 351 12 6 Output Files 353 12 6 1 Cross reference 353 12 6 2 Tag information 355 12 6 3 Call tree 357 12 6 4 Function metrics 360 12 6 5 Call database 363 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 366 13 1 Memory Layout Visualization Tool 366 13 2 Input Output 367 13 2 1 Input file 367 13 2 2 Output information 367 13 3 Operation Method 368 13 3 1 Command input method 368 13 3 2 Method using PM 368 13 4 Types and Features of Options 369 13 5 Settings Made via PM 372 13 5 1 Static performance analyzer dialog box 372 RAM map 373 13 5 2 RAM map option dialog box 375 Common option 376 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 13 5 3 Object Analysis Tool dialog box 378 RAM map 379 13 6 Output Files 381 13 6 1 Memory map table 381 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 383 14 1 Flow of Operation 383 14 2 Input Output Files 384 14 2 1 Input files 384 14 2 2 Output file 384 14 3 Operation Method 385 14 4 Window Reference 386 Main window 388 Adjust Stack Size dialog box 392 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box 394 About stk850 dialog box 396 14 5 Cautions 397 14 5 1 Quantitative limit of the stk850 397 14 6 Output File Formats 399 14 6 1 Output result files 399 14 6 2 Stack size specification file 402 14 6 3 stk system file 4
189. abel label An expression in the format label label is used E3207 illegal expression labels have different reference types An operation is specified between label references in different formats label label and label E3208 illegal expression labels in different sections An operation is specified between labels belonging to different sections E3209 illegal expression labels must be defined Define an option between labels in the same file E3210 illegal expression not nor An operator other than or is used E3211 floating exception function The floating point operation of function function of the floating point operation library internally used by the as850 is incorrect E3212 symbol already defined as label The specified symbol has already been defined as a label E3213 label identifier redefined Label identifier has been defined more than once E3214 identifier redefined identifier has been defined more than once E3215 illegal operand access width mismatch On chip peripheral I O registers with different access widths are specified as operands 442 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E3216 illegal operand cannot read I O register which does not have read access Reading the on chip peripheral I O register specified as the operand is prohibited E3217 illegal operand cannot use bit I O register A bit of the flag of an on chip peripheral I
190. able portion of the start address of the programmable peripheral I O register 0x1234 and set the flag 0x8000 that enables the use of this function mov0x9234 r10 0x1234 0x8000 0x9234 st hr10 BPC The as850 outputs a bpc section in the special reserved sections when the programmable peripheral I O register is referenced regardless of whether this option is specified or omitted This section is used for checking when linking The bpc section is a special reserved section for information and is never loaded into memory Therefore it need not be specified in a link directive like a normal section cn This option embeds the magic number of common to V850 core into the object to be generated For further description of magic numbers refer to 4 7 1 Magic number cnv850e V850E This option embeds the magic number of common to V850Ex core into the object to be generated cnv850e2 V850E2 This option embeds the magic number of common to V850E2 core into the object to be generated cpu devicename This option specifies the target device When using PM this is equivalent to specifying the device on the Project Information of the Project Settings wizard If this option is omitted and nothing has been specified by the cn option cnv850e option cnv850e2 option or pragma directive compilation is stopped Note This has the same function as pragma cpu devicename There are two methods specificat
191. ad module must be ROMized by the ROMization pro cessor Prepare rompcrt o having the first symbol of the rompsec section and execute linking by specifying the linker option Ir By using the packing section created as a result copy data with an initial value by using the _rcopy function refer to CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR It is recommended to use the same address values in the fixed ROM and flash memory for the tp gp and ep values These values may be different but in this case the values must be set each time control has been trans ferred between an instruction code in the fixed ROM and one in the flash memory Fixed ROM Flash memory __ start ext_func _flash_start 3 jr __flash_start mov __tp TEXT tp mov __9p_DATA gp __flash start mov __ep_DATA ep To main function in flash memory To main function in fixed ROM jarl _main lp It is not necessary to stick to the name main function jarl _main lp ext_func _flash_start 3 jr __flash start extern unsigned long _S_romp extern unsigned long _S_romp void main void void main void _rcopy amp S romp 1 _rcopy amp S romp 1 188 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 4 Describing link directive file Each of the fixed ROM and flash memory projects has a link directive file The following points should be noted when describing a link directive file a b c Even if the address
192. ader table Section header table 406 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE A 2 ELF Header This section describes the ELF header which is a constituent element in ELF format object files The ELF header is at the start of the object file and contains the information needed to interpret the object file or to access the other constituent elements in the object file refer to Table A 1 Table A 1 Constituent Elements of ELF Header and Their Meanings Constituent Meaning Elements ident CLASS Class of this object file ident DATA Byte order of data in this object file 2MSB if big endian or 2LSB if little endian type Type of this object file machine Target processor of this object file version Version number of this object file entry Entry point address phoff Offset in file of program header table shoff Offset in file of section header table flags Unique flag for processor that this object file runs on ehsize Byte size of this ELF header phentsize Size of program header table entry phnum Number of program header table entries shentsize Size of section header table entries shnum Number of section header table entries shstrndx Section header table index of string table shstrtab that contains the section name User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 407 APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE A 3 Program Header Table This section describes the progr
193. ades Standard Special and Specific The Specific quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer designated quality assurance program for a specific application The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade as indicated below Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots Special Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems life support systems and medical equipment for life support etc The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics willingness to support a given application Note 1 NEC Elect
194. adjustment information and it is read and saved automatically by the stk850 The file name is project file name psg and the format is the same as that of stack size specification files However the information to be saved is limited to those of functions whose size has been changed Caution Even though the stk system file is a text file it must not be modified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 405 APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE This appendix describes the format of the object file used with the CA850 compiler package A 1 Structure of Object File The format of the object file used with the CA850 compiler package conforms to the ELF format a standard object file format The structure of an object file in this format differs somewhat between relocatable object files and executable object files refer to Figure A 1 A relocatable object file contains the information that is needed to create an executable object file and an executable object file contains the information needed to execute the object file The following sections describe the ELF header program header table section header table section and segment which are constituent elements in ELF format object files Figure A 1 Object File Structures Relocatable object file Executable object file ELF header Start ELF header Section 1 Program header table Segment 1 Segment n Section n Other information Section he
195. ady defined by p option and therefore this section is ignored Section section is ignored because it is already specified for the p option User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 469 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W8510 section section is already defined by t option and therefore this section is ignored Section section is ignored because it is already specified for the t option W8518 option needs argument ignored Option is ignored because the number of its arguments is not enough W8525 rompsec section overflowed highest address of target machine The upper limit of the memory was exceeded when rompsec section was created Remark 1 This message can be deleted by specifying the rom_less option W8533 string option needs argument ignored The number of options for the string option is not enough The option is ignored W8534 string option s argument is illegal ignored The argument of the string option is illegal The option is ignored 470 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 6 Hexadecimal converter F8600 too many input files Two or more input files must not be specified F8601 too many output files Two or more output files must not be specified F8602 illegal option character character must not be specified as an option F8603 expect format type ITSs after f Specify T S or s after f F8604 expect section name after l Specify a section name after l F8605
196. al I O register For an application program that uses programmable peripheral I O register functions a bpc section which is a reserved section is output when assembling If there is a bpc section in a link input object file the linker checks values specified as BPC values If values do not match between input object files the linker outputs an error message like the following and suspends link processing F4457 input files have different BPC value 0x00001234filel o 0x00001234file2 o 0x00001235file3 o none file4 o In the above case there is an error because the value set in file3 o is different Object that does not reference the programmable peripheral I O register is not checked As in file4 o above none is displayed If there are no errors in checking BPC values a bpc section is generated with section type SHT_PROGBITS section attribute none and section size 0x4 The start address of the programmable peripheral I O register area which is the BPC value shifted a preset number of bits is stored in the bpc section Example 202 If the BPC value is specified as 0x1234 when using the V850E IA1 the start address of the programmable peripheral I O register area is the value shifted 14 bits to the left or 0x48d0000 In this case the information in the bpc section is as follows bpc Address 00 OT 02 03 04 O05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF 0x00000000 00 00 8d 04
197. al U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 7 3 Efficient use of optimization The main types of optimization that can be specified by the O option are described below along with instructions on the efficient use of optimization Figure 3 27 Optimization Processing and Parameters Optimization Strong Exec Speed Ot Level 2 Advanced option Y A an Level 2 Advanced option Object Size Os a Level 1 Advanced Optimizati on O Standard Optimization Og Default Optimization Ob ae Optimize Optimization for Debugging Od Weak Table 3 8 Optimization Processing and Items Option Effect imivati Code Execution Compilatio Optimization Function Debug Efficiency Speed n Time Od Optimize for Debugging Level 4 Level 1 Level 1 Level 3 Ob Default Optimization Level 3 Level 2 Level 2 Level 3 Og Standard Optimization Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 O Level 1 Advanced Optimization Level 2 Level 4 Level 4 Level 2 Os Level 2 Advanced option Object Size Level 1 Level 5 Level 4 Level 2 Ot Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed Level 1 Level 4 Level 5 Level 1 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 117 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER The meanings of the expressions in this table are as follows As the level of optimization increases optimization that deletes C language source lin
198. al label reference for symbol symbol in file file2 section section2 offset offset type relocation type symbol is allocated in section sectioni file filel GP symbol is not defined in section section of executable file file at the boot side Or there is a contradiction in the location reference method of the symbol symbol Supplement If a section to be located by pragma section specification is changed by variable definition change a section for the extern declaration of the variable in another file in the same way Symbol symbol is located at section7 of file file1 Reference to symbol symbol exists at offset offset of section section2 of file file2 F4158 relocated value value of relocation entry symbol symbol file file section section offset offset type relocation type for branch command become odd value The value value relocated by a branch relocation entry symbol symbol file file section section offset offset relocation type relocation type is an odd number F4160 EP symbol is needed for using SIDATA SEDATA segment The ep symbol was not created Create the ep symbol to use the SIDATA or SEDATA segment F4161 symbol symbol output section sectini1 is too far from output section section2 value value file file input section section3 offset offset type relocation type The branch instruction from output section section2 to the symbol symbol allocated to output section
199. am header table which is a constituent element in ELF format object files The program header table is an array of program header table entries that contain information about all the segments included in the object file refer to Table A 2 An index i e a subscript to this array is called a program header table index which is used to reference the program header table entries Table A 2 Constituent Elements of Program Header Table Entries and Their Meanings Constituent Meaning Element type Segment type of corresponding segment type is LOAD if segment is loaded to memory or NOTE if segment has auxiliary information offset Offset in file of corresponding segment vaddr Virtual address of corresponding segment paddr Physical address of corresponding segment filesz Size of corresponding segment in fileN t memsz Size of corresponding segment in memory flags Segment attribute of corresponding segment attribute is R for segment that can be read W for segment that can be written or X for executable segment align Alignment condition of corresponding segment Note If a section having section type NOBITS section not having an actual value in the object file is allocated to the corresponding segment a value other than the memsz value is set 408 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE A 4 Section Header Table This section describes the section header tabl
200. ames and the Add button of Function names can be selected Top functions Only the function at the top of the tree is output 3 Read Function When this is checked a function name is specified by using a file This check box is not checked in the default condition File name Specifies a file in which functions are described on the edit box This field is blank in the default condition When the Browse button is clicked the Set analyze file dialog box is opened and a file in which functions are described can be selected On the Set analyze file dialog box the default positions are determined in the following order 1 Analyze folder of the Cross reference tab 2 Analyze file of the RAM map tab 3 Install folder Only when Specified functions is selected as Output function specification method this setting box the File name edit box and the Browse button can be selected By clicking the Apply button after selecting a file the functions specified in the specified file are displayed on the list of Function names 4 Function names An output function name is displayed on the list box This box is blank in the default condition If a function name consists of more than 38 characters the first 18 characters the last 18 characters of the function name are displayed If Read function is checked this setting list box cannot be selected A function name is addit
201. an object file of the V850 microcontrollers F8802 cannot find device file The device file cannot be found F8803 cannot open file file File file cannot be opened F8804 illegal object string The object file is incorrect F8805 nested command file file Command file file is nested It must not be nested F8821 memory allocation error The memory is insufficient User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 481 APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 11 Cross reference tool F9600 s Error detected F9601 Ss can t open File failed to open F9602 Ss can t seek File seek failed F9603 Ss can t read File read failed F9604 Ss can t write File write failed F9605 no memory Memory securement failed F9606 s not found Preprocessor cannot detect file s F9607 s failed Preprocessor has detected error in file s F9608 input file nothing Input file not specified F9609 s not specified file name File name not specified by option s F9610 Ss not specified identifier Identifier not specified by option s F9611 Ss not specified symbol Symbol not specified by option s F9612 Ss range over Value beyond range specified in option s F9613 Ss not specified path Path not specified in option s F9614 multiple declaration function s Function name s redundant W9651 Ss invalid option ignored Invalid option s specified 482 Use
202. and I O register regname for unary amp The address of the internal peripheral function register regname cannot be obtained E2670 unexpected EOF missing pragma endasm Specification of the final assembler insertion cannot be found E2681 First argument for __set_il is out of range The value of an interrupt level exceeds the range that can be specified An integer of 1 to 8 can be specified as an interrupt level E2682 Second argument for _set_il must be string literal Interrupt Request Name Specify a character string indicating an interrupt request name as the second argument of the function that sets an interrupt level E2685 illegal argument for _set_il int Interrupt Request Name The argument of the function that sets an interrupt level contains an error Specify an integer type as the first argument and an interrupt request name as the second argument E2692 Both interrupt attribute and rtos task are specified An RTOS task and an interrupt cannot be specified for a function at the same time E2693 Function function is already defined rtos_task must be specified before function definition A function must not be specified as an RTOS task after the function definition E2694 Function function is already defined without rtos_ interrupt Although function function is specified as an interrupt handler function has been already defined without an interrup
203. annot be deleted from a project cannot use semicolon Do not use semicolon for an option for which two or more items can be input B 2 6 ROMization processor Output File is illegal Do not use a out illegal characters in the extension and blanks in an output file name In ROM section file same macro name is exist Do not use the same macro name in the ROMization section file The file cannot be output correctly Output of ROM section file is faild The ROMization section file has not been output correctly Output of ROM section file is succeeded The ROMization section file has been output correctly cannot use semicolon Do not use semicolon for an option for which two or more items can be input B 2 7 Hexadecimal converter Filling Number of ROM Area is illegal Do not use any characters other than hexadecimal numbers or a value exceeding the range as the filling value of a ROM area Maximum Length of Block Record is illegal Do not use any characters other than decimal numbers or a value exceeding the range as the maximum length of a block or record User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 489 APPENDIX B MESSAGE Offset of Output Address is illegal Do not use any characters other than hexadecimal numbers or decimal numbers as the offset of an address to be output Output File is illegal Do not use illegal characters in the extension and blanks in an output file name Si
204. apter describes the outline operation and display format of the disassembler dis850 11 1 Disassembler A disassembler is a utility that converts the program codes of an object file that has been compiled or assembled or an archive file created with the ar850 into assembly language codes for output This utility is used to verify the codes of an object file The disassembler of the C compiler package is dis850 Figure 11 1 Operation Flow of dis850 Command p Object file or archive file dis850 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM Outputs assembly language program via standard output 313 CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER 11 2 Operation Method This section describes how to use the dis850 command 11 2 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt dis850 option filel file2 Can be omitted More than one input file can be specified 11 2 2 Method using PM The Object Analysis Tool dialog box that is used to activate the disassembler can be displayed via the following methods once a project has been established under PM Select Tool Startup Object Analysis Tool then click the Disassembler tab Since the disassembler is activated once per project there are no file specific settings 314 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER 11 3 Types and Features of Options The dis850 options are shown below If no option is specifie
205. are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed Table Branch Outputs the code of the switch statement in the table jump mode A table indexed based on the value of a case statement is referenced a case label is selected by the value of the switch statement and processing is performed Any case statement can be found at almost the same speed However unnecessary areas may be created if the case values are not contiguous 6 Packing Of Structs This area is used to set structure packing specified by the Xpack num option By using this option specified alignment can be used without structure members aligned in accordance with the types of the members The data size can be decreased but the code size increases The value that can be specified is 1 byte 2 bytes 4 bytes or 8 bytes The default value is 8 bytes wNote If this option is specified when structure packing is specified by the pragma directive in a C language source file the value specified by the option is applied to all structures until the first pragma directive emerges After that the value of the pragma directive is applied Even after emergence of the pragma directive however the value specified by the option is applied if the default assumption is specified This option must not be specified together with the Xi option When using this option the following points should be noted If this option is specified when structure pac
206. ared it is a duplicate definition error If this option is not specified a warning may be output and the automatic variable is made valid 4 Pointer assignment a Itis an error if a pointer type numeric value is assigned to a general integer type variable If this option is not specified a warning may be output and the pointer is assigned by casting b Itis an error to assign pointers that point to different types If this option is not specified a warning may be output and the assignment is permitted 5 Type conversion It is an error to convert a non left side value array to a pointer If this option is not specified a warning may be output and the conversion is permitted 6 Comparison operators Comparison of a pointer to an arithmetic type variable is an error If this option is not specified a warning may be output and the comparison is permitted User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 57 58 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 7 Conditional operators It is an error if the second and third expressions are not both general integer types the same structure the same common or pointer types to the same type of target If this option is not specified a warning may be output and the operator is assigned by casting 8 line number This is an error If this option is not specified line number is treated the same way as line line number 9 character within a line This is an error If this option is not specified a warning may be out
207. as Wo Op file If a file name is specified the operation is as follows i The specified intermediate file file is read and a list of external variables is created If the specified file does not exist a vacant list is created and the next processing is started ii If the definition or temporary definition of an external variable exists in the source file processing moves to the list created in i At this time a temporary definition is changed to a definition This means that a definition temporary definition in a source file is replaced by a declaration If a variable definition of the same name already exists on the list it is replaced by a definition of a source file If any of the section size alignment or default values is changed during replacement a warning message is output iii The list of external variables is output to the intermediate language file file All the files compiled last and a file resulting from compiling file are linked If the above file name is specified the following points must be noted If all specific variables are temporarily defined in the file compiled by specifying an option and if a definition exists in a file for which no option is specified the files can be correctly linked if an option is not specified If an option is specified however a link error occurs because of duplicated definitions If variables are defined in duplicate in a file compiled by specifying an option a link error do
208. as specifying with the z option 302 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 4 3 Archive File Options dialog box A dialog box for performing settings for archive files Figure 10 4 Archive File Options Dialog Box Archive File Options Ouptut Items OK M Other ltems e Cancel F Symbol T able g F String Table m Help I No Update Time of Archiver Header T 1 Output Items Select items to be output using the check boxes a Archive Header a This outputs the archive header specified with the a option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the a option b Other Items e This outputs other archive file items specified with the e option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the e option c Symbol Table g This outputs the archive file symbol table specified with the g option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the g option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified d String Table m This outputs the archive file string table specified with the m option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the m option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified 2 No Update Time of Archive Header T This suppresses output of the archive header updated date specified with the T option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the T option User s Manual
209. ask Register me Check Register Mode tc Rescan Library File tescan EUEN be BoB Ignore Internal ROM Check rom_less Verbose Mode v F Warn Internal Memory Overflow imem_overflow warning Command Line Options iia 3201 OK Cancel Help LK 1 Entry Symbol e This text box is used to specify a symbol to be set as the entry point address If the specified symbol is not found the linker outputs a message and stops linking This area uses a drop down list type of display to list all symbol names that have been specified once up to 10 symbol names Either click on the desired symbol name or use the arrow keys to select it If this option is not specified the entry point address value is determined by the following rules Value of __ start two underscores symbol if that symbol exists The start address of the text attribute section allocated to the lowest part in the object file created if __ start symbol does not exist O if the text attribute section does not exist 2 Filling Number of Hole f This specifies the fill value for the created hole in the object as a 4 digit hexadecimal number 2 bytes When using this option specify 2 Pass Mode B to execute linking Ox at the beginning can be omitted Specification by this option takes priority over the fill value specified by the link directive file If the value is less than 4 digits prefix it with zeros to fill If the size of the hole is less
210. assembly language source files can be displayed via either of the following methods once a project has been established under PM Set for all assembly language source files of the target project 1 Select Tool Assembler Options Set for a specific assembly language source files 1 Select the name of the assembly language source file to be set a option in the Project window on the PM 2 Select Individual Assembler Options item that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button 126 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 4 Types and Features of Options The following table lists the options of the as850 To pass the following options from the ca850 to the as850 without modification Wa must be specified with the ca850 refer to 3 5 10 Option to each module Some options listed below are not included in the PM s option settings dialog box When one of these options must be specified activate as850 from the command line Symbols used in option list V850E2 Option dedicated to V850E2 core V850E Option dedicated to V850Ex core PM Option exists as specification item under the PM User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 127 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 4 1 File This specifies options of preprocessing for the assembly language source file a PM This option generates an assemble list However if the O option optimization option has also been specified the in
211. at is 16 bits or less This option slows the processing speed but strictly complies with the multiplication and division processing under the ANSI standard The mulh and divh directives are used if this option is omitted The runtime library of the CA850 is prepared as the standard library of CA850 so that the instructions not provided to the architecture of the V850 microcontrollers satisfy the ANSI standard For the runtime library refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual Xdefvar PM This option handles tentative definition as definition ansi PM This option makes ca850 processing comply with the ANSI standard and outputs an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard Extended description other than in _asm format is recognized Specifying this option defines the macro name __STDC__ If this option is omitted compatibility with the conventional C language specifications is conferred and processing continues after warning message is output Processing when compiling in strict adherence to the language specification is as follows 1 Trigraph sequences Replaces trigraphs They are not replaced if this option is not specified 2 Bit fields Itis an error if a type other than an int type is specified in a bit field If this option is not specified a warning may be output and the specification is permitted 3 Scope of variables If an automatic variable of the same name as a function argument is decl
212. ation for the source debugger When the as850 is started via the ca850 specification of this option is regarded as the same as specifying the as850 s g option As a result assembly language source debugging is performed by the debugger User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 37 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 4 Control of compile driver Control of compile driver options are shown below 1 Options related to device specification X256M V850E PM This option treats the memory space as 256 M bytes If this option is not specified address resolution is performed assuming that the memory space is 64 M bytes Set this option in accordance with the chipset to be used The physical address space of the V850Ex core has 256 M bytes in many cases When creating an application that uses a space between 64 M bytes and 256 M bytes specify this option Xbpc num PM This option sets the higher address of the programmable peripheral I O register In num specify only the part of address from which the highest bit of the BPC register is removed If the target device has programmable peripheral I O register functions such as V850E IA1 the value must be determined when compiling assembling the application to set the variable address portion value set in BPC register Thus specifying this option compiles assembles using the specified value When specifying this option be sure to specify a value A binary octal decimal or hexadecimal nu
213. ation is output in alphabetical order of the identifiers Four types of information are output sequentially from left to right on each line 1 Linkage and storage class The linkage and storage class are indicated by the following symbols G Static external variable or function having external linkage Static external variable function or static variable within a function having internal linkage Unknown 2 Type The type is indicated by the following symbols Function V Variable Unknown User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 353 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 3 Identifier name The identifier name is the function name or variable name itself However since duplicate names may exist for variables that are defined within functions identifier names are indicated in the format function name variable name 4 Line number The definition line number and reference line numbers are listed with the following symbols appended Nine number Declaration line line number Definition line line number Whether it is a declaration or definition or a reference is unknown No symbol Reference line 354 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 6 2 Tag information Cxref outputs the definition file name and line number information tag jump information for variables and functions The output destination is standard out
214. ays in the same format as the command line In addition since all rammap command related options can be specified in this dialog box it is not necessary to use any other options 6 Command Line Option Options specified in the dialog box are displayed in the command line options Since this area is for reference purposes it cannot be written to 380 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 13 6 Output Files This section describes details about output files 13 6 1 Memory map table rammap outputs a memory map table that shows variable names sizes and the memory layout The output destination is standard output or a file When information is output to a file the output file format is text format or CSV format To directly reference the main important information output the data in text format To reference detailed information in tabular form output the data in CSV format The memory map table has 16 bytes per line Fora variable name the name in the C language source file is displayed in the following format when the variable name is assumed to be name External variable _name Local variable within file file _name Static variable or string constant within function file LL number The size is displayed in the format number of bytes in decimal notation following the variable name 1 Text format output example If the m option is specified the
215. be ROMized Option Setting of romp850 options Others Other settings Note The option shown with in this dialog box is the option that is activated from the command line User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 231 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR This tab is used to set options related to files of the romp850 Figure 6 11 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box File Tab ROM Processor Options File Section Option Others Output File o I Browse Memory Map File m Browse Edit by Text Editor Command Line Options eg OK Cancel Help ik 1 Output File o This edit box is used to specify an output file name Blanks must not be specified as the file name If no file name is specified romp out is assumed as the output file name Selecting the Browse button opens a dialog box in which a file can be selected 2 Memory Map File m This edit box is used to specify the name of a file to which mapping information resulting from activating the romp850 is to be output Selecting the Edit by Text Editor button opens the specified file the file can then be edited 3 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 232 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR This tab is used to set sections to be ROMized Figure 6 12 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box S
216. be executed correctly An extension is necessary for a file name Without an extension build processing may not be executed correctly cannot create directory The folder cannot be created B 2 3 Compiler Code Size Threshold of Automatic Inline Expansion is illegal Do not use any characters other than numerals as the upper limit of the size of a code to be expanded inline Far Jump File Name is illegal Do not use blanks in the file name of a Far Jump file Limit of Number of Error is illegal Do not use any characters other than numerals as the upper limit of the number of errors Limit of Number of Macro is illegal Do not use any characters other than numerals as the upper limit of a macro Number of Loop Unrolling is illegal Do not use any characters other than numerals as the number of times a loop is to be expanded Section File Name is illegal Do not use blanks in the file name of a section file Sort External Variable is illegal Do not use the same file name excluding the extension illegal characters in the extension and comma in the name of a file that sorts external variables Stack Size Threshold of Automatic Inline Expansion is illegal Do not use any characters other than numerals as the upper limit of the size of a stack to be expanded inline sconst Allocation Size Threshold is illegal Do not use any characters other than numerals in the specification of the length of
217. bers of Messages That Can Be Specified W2042 W2017 W2127 W2132 W2150 W2161 W2162 W2163 W2166 W2172 W2176 W2180 W2212 W2215 W2216 W2222 W2231 W2244 W2254 W2267 W2287 W2289 W2291 W2293 W2302 W2306 W2373 W2380 W2416 W2520 W2521 W2525 W2527 W2554 W2555 W2606 W2607 W2621 W2634 W2635 W2637 W2643 W2656 W2671 W2683 W2684 W2690 W2691 W2699 W2700 W2703 W2704 W2710 W2711 W2730 W2731 W2740 W2741 W2742 W2743 W2744 W2748 W2761 W2782 The Help of Individual Warning button can be used to display the online help of warning messages 5 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 106 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Assembler This tab box is used to set assembler options that are used when a C language source file is assembled Figure 3 22 Compiler Options Dialog Box Assembler Tab Compiler Options General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others Ws nsi Include Search Path wa l Define Macro Wa D Generate Debug Information Wa g Do Optimization wa 0 I Verbose Mode Wa v Suppress Waming Wa w Warm Zero Reaister r0 Wa wr0 P Wam Reserved Reaister r Wa w
218. ble in which the first entry contains a num of Gnum specified for ca850 or as and the Oth 2nd and subsequent entries indicate the size when aligned with data size and word 0x70000001 Regmode Section that exists in a relocatable object file created using the register mode function Information concerning the number of registers used internally by the CA850 is stored 4 Bind in symbol table Display When v Value Is Specified Meaning 0 Local Symbol that is not used to resolve external reference 1 Global Symbol that is used to resolve external reference 5 Type in symbol table Display When v Value Is Specified Meaning 1 Object Ordinary object label 2 Func Function name 3 Section Section 4 File Ordinary file name 13 Devfile Device file name User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 311 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 6 Shndx in symbol table Display When v Value Is Specified Meaning 0x0 Undef Undefined symbol OxFFOO GpCommon Undefined external symbol that is referenced by global pointer gp and 16 bit displacement OxFFF1 Abs Symbol indicating constant OxFFF2 Common Undefined external symbol that is referenced by global pointer 312 gp and 32 bit displacement For further description of object file formats refer to APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER This ch
219. box is unavailable when the A option is specified Global Pointer Table k This outputs the global pointer table specified with the k option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the k option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 299 h i i k CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND Line Number Information This outputs line number information specified with the l option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the l option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified Relocation Information r This outputs relocation information specified with the r option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the r option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified Section s This outputs the section specified with the s option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the s option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified Symbol Table t This outputs the symbol table specified with the t option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the t option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified 4 No Title p This specifies whether or not to suppress output of the title specified with the p option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the p option 5 Output Item by String v This specifies wh
220. by the pragma directive E2653 Directive pragma section is nested Section allocation specification by the pragma directive is nested E2654 inconsistent section for symbol The section contradicts the symbol symbol E2655 misplaced pragma section section end The position of pragma section section end is inappropriate E2660 cannot write read only I O register regname Data cannot be written to the internal peripheral function register regname which has only a read attribute E2661 cannot read write only I O register regname Data cannot be read from the internal peripheral function register regname which has only a write attribute E2662 cannot access for I O register bit number regname A position that cannot be accessed is specified in the description of the bit access to the internal peripheral function register regname E2663 I O register bit number must be integral type Describe the specification of the bit position for an internal peripheral function register with an integer value 424 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2664 Specifying bit number for I O register regname is not allowed Bit access cannot be specified for a bit of the internal peripheral function register regname E2665 unknown cpu type cannot use I O register The internal peripheral function register cannot be used because the target device is unknown E2666 illegal oper
221. c C sample sample c Bun OK Cancel Apply Help 1 Preprocessor Control Select a preprocessor in the combo box The default assumption is as follows Ifan option is saved the specification of the saved preprocessor is displayed Ifan option is not saved but there is information specified by a compiler option in the project file Use V850 preprocessor is assumed If an option is not saved and there is no information specified by a compiler option in the project file No use preprocessor is assumed 2 Preprocessor option Specify options of the preprocessor Setting c option that works to include comments of the source programs with the preprocessor is recom mended so that line numbers are output correctly User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 337 3 4 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Analyze folder Specify an analyze folder in the edit box The default assumption is as follows lf an option is saved the saved analysis folder is used If an option is not saved the folder where the project file is placed is used Analyze files A list of analyze files is displayed in the list box The default assumption is as follows If an option is saved the saved file to be analyzed is used If no option is saved what is used is the C language source file specified in the project file corresponding to the source file registered in the project file Clicking the Add button displays an additio
222. c When using a variable address that is not an automatic variable or a function address to initialize a pointer type external variable pragma When a non executable pragma description appears sharp When a sharp symbol appears in a source line An error occurs if neither nor has been specified The specification is according to the wnum level if this option is omitted won num num won numl num2 num3 num4 PM This option outputs a warning message of the number specified by num A warning message in the 2000s can be specified as num If num1 num2 is specified the warning messages from num1 to num2 are specified The num must not be omitted If a warning number not provided in the CA850 is specified a warning message is output 60 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER woff num num woff numl1 num2 num3 num4 PM This option suppresses a warning message of the number specified by num A warning message in the 2000s can be specified as num If num1 num2 is specified the warning messages from num7 to num2 are specified The num must not be omitted If a warning number not provided in the CA850 is specified a warning message is output User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 61 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 9 Other Other options are shown below 1 Command file specification option cfile This option handles cfile as a command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file
223. ccess to the peripheral I O register in the program access to the peripheral I O register is in word 4 byte units Change descriptions to byte half word unit operation not bit access CPU core and patch option related to this bug are as follows for the newest version uPD70 F 3xxx not including maintenance or obsolete products To check whether or not the failure affects the CPU used refer to the CPU s documentation 62 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Table 3 2 Correspondence Between CPU Core and Xv850patch Option for This Bug CPU Core Xv850patch 11 V850 core am V850E MS1 V850E1 core V850ES core Remark A Affected OK Corrected for the newest version u PD70 F 3xxx not including maintenance or obsolete products Not affected User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 63 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 10 Option to each module The ca850 can pass options to each module Wx option This option passes option as an option for module x If option includes a comma the option is assigned as multiple options each delimited by a comma The following modules can be specified as module x p Pre optimizer popt o Global optimization opt i Machine dependent optimization impr a Assembler as850 l Linker Id850 64 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 1 Pre optimizer popt Wp D Enables reduction of me
224. ce lines to be deleted or changed and variables to registers increases In the latter case phenomena such as being unable to set breakpoints with the debugger may occur and the debugging efficiency may be affected For details of optimization refer to 3 7 3 Efficient use of optimization 1 Optimization options Od PM Optimize for Debugging option This option generates codes emphasizing logic debugging without putting stress on the ROM capacity and execution speed Its function is equivalent to the default optimization of CA850 Ver 2 41 or earlier Ob PM Default Optimization option This option generates codes emphasizing logic debugging It executes optimization within a range where logic debugging is not affected Og PM Standard Optimization option This option executes appropriate optimization It executes optimization that allows debugging of the C lan guage source in most cases Because external variables are assigned to registers both the execution speed and code size are improved from those of the default option 0 PM Level 1 Advanced Optimization option This option executes optimization emphasizing the ROM capacity Os PM Level 2 Advanced Object Size option This option executes the maximum optimization placing the utmost emphasis on the ROM capacity Ot PM Level 2 Advanced Exec Speed option This option executes the maximum optimization placing the utmost emphasis on the executi
225. cending order of frequency of use default When the frequency of use is the same variables are listed in ascending order of size c Variable Name sname The variable names in the output section file are listed in alphabetical order When variable names are the same they are listed in alphabetical order of file name and function name d Section Name ssection The names of sections to which the variable names in the output section file are allocated are listed in alphabetical order When section names are the same they are listed in descending order of frequency of use e Variable Size ssize The variable names in the output section file are listed in ascending order of size When sizes are the same they are listed in descending order of frequency of use f Optimize Location O Determine how many variables can be allocated to the tidata byte section or tidata word section and output them in descending order of frequency of use 256 bytes can be allocated in the tidata section and this is divided internally into the byte data of tidata byte 128 bytes and the word data of tidata word 8 bit data can be allocated only to the tidata byte area The section file generator selects variables and outputs them in the section file until their total is 256 bytes However it terminates selection when 8 bit data reaches 128 bytes 6 Comment Level This option specifies the comment level of the output section file a
226. check Use This in the File tab in the Section File Generator Options dialog box 280 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 9 3 3 Use from command line The following describes how to use section files from the command line 1 First create a frequency information file Specify the ca850 option Xcre_sec_data_only and compile the C language source file to create a frequency information file for the external variables and static variables in the C language source file The file s default file name is the C language source file name with the suffix sec To specify a particular file name for the frequency information file specify the file name when specifying the Xcre_sec_data_only option Example gt ca850 cpu 3201 Xcre_sec_data_only secsre funcl c In this case a frequency information file for the C language source file func1 c is output as secsrc 2 Input the generated frequency information file to the sf850 which outputs a section file In this case the generated section file specifies that variables will be allocated to tidata attribute sections tidata word attribute sections and tidata byte attribute sections Example gt s 850 funcl sec func2 sec func3 sec o secfile In this case the three frequency information files func1 sec func2 sec and func3 sec are gathered as one section file which is output as secfile It is easier to create a comman
227. check box and specifying a file name the name of the identifier that is not displayed is read File name is blank in the default condition When the Apply button at the lower part of the dialog box is selected the name of the identifier in a selected file is displayed on the list of Non display identifications If Browse button is selected the existing file name can be referenced on the Browse for File dialog box 4 Non display identifications The identifier name to be hidden is displayed A function name of 38 characters or more is displayed in the form of first 18 characters last 18 characters Clicking the Add button opens the Set analyze file dialog box If an identifier is selected in this dialog box it is added to the list If an identifier is selected from the list and the Change button is clicked the Set analyze file dialog box is opened and the identifier is changed into the one selected in the dialog box Clicking the Delete button deletes the identifier selected from the list The Change and Delete buttons can be selected only if an identifier is specified in the list 5 Read regarding identifications as type The identifier name that is treated as a type is displayed By checking this check box and specifying a file name the name of an identifier that is treated as a type is read File name is blank in the default condition When the Apply button at the lower part of the dialog box is
228. chive file is created by linking two or more object files with the archiver ar850 When an archive file is specified the Id850 searches the archive file for unresolved external referencesNote 1 and links only the necessary object files The archive file can be also specified via the link directive s mapping directive If the archive file is also specified in the mapping directive it is searched for unresolved external references at that time and only the Note 2 necessary object files are linked Notes 1 The archive file includes a symbol table of the symbols belonging to the archiver s object files and the archive file is repeatedly searched as long as unresolved external references remain unresolved 2 Object file that defines a referenced symbol User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 197 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 7 3 Reserved symbols During link related processing the Id850 creates reserved symbols whose values include the start address of each output section the start address beyond the end of each output section and the start address beyond the end of a created executable object file If the user defines a symbol having the same name as any of these reserved symbols the Id850 uses the defined symbol and does not create its own symbol A symbol having a name made by prefixing __s to the name of the output section is used as a reserved symbol that has the start address of a section as a value If this section name begins with
229. cified in File List Also if csv is specified in the Save As dialog box it will be saved in CSV format otherwise it will be saved in text format This button is unavailable for projects in which libraries are built With the 2 Brows Save button the RAM map can be saved by specifying the object file In this case the Open dialog box is opened so specify the object file By default folders specified in previous Open dialog boxes or project folders are displayed When an object file is specified in the Open dialog box the RAM map for the specified object file is saved in text format User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 379 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 2 3 Save Open After saving the RAM map with the 1 Save or 2 Browse Save button this specifies whether or not to open the file which was saved with the editor or affiliated application for CSV format set in PM It is selected by default 3 Output Range a Output All Range Checking this box invalidates the mr option It is selected by default b Edit Output Range mr button This opens the Edit Option dialog box for editing the output range specified with the mr option 4 Execution Log This displays the RAM map execution log Since this area is for reference purposes it cannot be written to 5 Any Option This specifies options that cannot be set in the rammap command options described before This edit box displ
230. ck and propagation of copy in a basic block This optimization is executed by default when compila tion is executed For example an operation expression of only constants is replaced by the constants of the operation result during compilation The effect of this optimization is weakest with the CA850 This optimization is equivalent in level to the default optimization of CA850 Ver 2 4x Note The longest array of instructions whose first instruction is always executed first A branch occurs only from the last instruction of this array 2 Ob Default Optimization Optimization in a basic block and allocation of automatic variables to coloring registers are performed Automatic variables are allocated as registers This optimization does not affect debugging This is the default optimization of the CA850 It deletes more unnecessary codes than Od because register allocation is a high level function 118 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 Og Standard Optimization In addition to optimization in a basic block and allocation of coloring registers the following optimization is performed by using the information that can be grasped in a function only the representative operations are described An instruction string that finds common operations and processes them all at once is output Step execution and breakpoints may not be set as intended by the user An assignment statement whose value does
231. copy2 Copies ROMization section 2 byte transfer _rcopy4 Copies ROMization section 4 byte transfer Use 1 byte 2 byte or 4 byte transfer depending on the specification of the RAM at the transfer destination The specification of each function is as follows 218 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR _rcopy Overview _rcopy Copies default data or RAM text te 1 byte Note Data section with initial value which is to be allocated to RAM and text section for internal RAM Format int _rcopy amp label number unsigned long label long number Description _rcopy amp label number copies the initial value data of section number number to be copied or text to be allocated to RAM to the RAM area 1 byte at a time based on the information in the rompsec section allocated starting at the address following the address indicated by label If 1 is specified as number all sections in the rompsec section are copied Section number number is a positive number that starts from 1 By default sections are allocated in the order in which they appear in the input file If sections to be allocated to the rompsec section are specified by the p or t option of the romp850 they are allocated in the order in which they are specified If a ROM section file is created with PM however a C language source header file that makes number and label correspond to each other by define is generated and numb
232. core is generated W3008 option option is not supported for core core Option option is not supported by core core The specified option is ignored W3009 can not find programmable peripheral I O registers ignored bpc option Information of the programmable peripheral I O register does not exist The bpc option is ignored W3010 illegal displacement in inst instruction The value of displacement exceeds the specifiable range It is assumed that only the valid lower digits have been specified and assembly is continued W3011 illegal operand range error in immediate The value of immediate exceeds the specifiable range It is assumed that only the valid lower digits have been specified and assembly is continued W3012 hword overflow The value specified for hword shword exceeds the specifiable range It is assumed that only the valid lower digits have been specified and assembly is continued W3013 register used as kind register A mask register r20 or r21 is specified for operand as the kind register when the register r0 assembler reserved register r1 or mask register function is used W3014 illegal list value ignored The value specified for the register list of the prepare dispose instruction is illegal It is assumed that only the valid lower digits have been specified and assembly is continued W3015 illegal register number ignored The register specified for the register list of the prepare dispo
233. cprofile csv The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when CSV format is selected If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab however Normal format and CSV format remain on User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 351 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Button a Set default option button This button returns the current setting of the dialog box to the default status If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab however Normal format and CSV format remain on 352 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 6 Output Files This section describes details about each output file 12 6 1 Cross reference Cxref outputs cross reference information of variables and functions that are used within the file for each file The output destination is standard output default or a text file When information is output to a file the default output file name is cxref Figure 12 9 Cross Reference Output Example cxref Command input cxref x apli c KKK apli c G V NULL 20 30 43 90 91 199 204 205 235 G F combine 163 187 190 G F delete 216 257 G V deleted 22 203 220 222 L V printtree depth 232 236 242 G F removeitem 118 178 209 G F restore 182 208 212 G V root 20 42 113 115 115 221 223 224 224 224 261 The inform
234. cting the Browse button displays a dialog box where the files can be selected 3 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 248 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER This tab is used to set hx850 options Figure 7 3 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box Option Tab Hexa Converter Options File Option Others Eormat ROM Area Convert ROM Areaf U r r Converting Section l Maximum Length of Zero Initialization of NOBITS Section z Block Record b Offset of Output i Address d Command Line Options j a hex OK Cancel F Help Ee I Ignore Internal ROM Check rom_less 1 Format This option specifies the hex format to use when creating a hex file The formats that can be specified are Intel Extended Motorola Type S Standard Motorola Type S 32 bits and Extended Tek The default format is Intel Extended 2 Symbol Table This area is used to convert a symbol table The options in this area can be specified only when the extended Tektronix format is selected in the Format a Convert Symbol Table S This check box is used to convert and output the symbol table This can be selected only when the extended Tektronix hex format is specified when fT is specified b Include Local Symbolf x This check box is used to specify
235. curity ID of a flash memory device This box cannot be used if a device not supporting the security ID function is used Specify the ID in hexadecimal numbers of 10 bytes or less including Ox at the start If the specified value runs short of 10 bytes the higher bits are filled with 0 If 10 bytes are exceeded an error is output If an object for a device not supporting the security ID function is specified when the linker is executed a warning message is output and the specified ID is ignored For example to set the security code 0x112233445566778899aa enter this value as is in the edit box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 77 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER RON library This tab is used to make settings related to ROMization when a library is created Figure 3 9 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box ROM Tab library Compiler Common Options File ROM Flash Device By checking this check box object files that uses ROM processor are created When it is checked r option of the compiler is set OK Cancel F Help T 1 Create Object for ROM When this check box is checked an object supported by the ROMization processor is generated When this check box is checked the Xr option is passed to the compiler 78 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Flash library This tab is used to make settings related to the flash memory when a library is created Figure 3 10 Compiler Common Options
236. d button This button adds items to the list In the case of an item for which a file or folder is specified a dialog box for referencing files or folders is opened In all other cases a dialog box that is used to add options whose contents are to be input is opened Figure 3 26 Add Option Dialog Box Add Option 2 Delete button This button deletes the selected items on the list 3 Up button This button moves up the selected item on the list 4 Down button This button moves down the selected item on the list 5 Edit by Text Editor button In the following cases a subfolder can be added to the selected item on the list Section File Xsec_file on Input File tab for setting Compiler Options dialog box Far Jump File Xfar_jump on Input File tab for setting Compiler Options dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 113 6 114 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Add Sub Directory button In the following cases a subfolder can be added to the selected item on the list Include Search Path l on Preprocessor tab for setting Compiler Options dialog box Include Search Path Wa I on Assembler tab for setting Compiler Options dialog box Include Search Path l on Option tab for setting Assembler Options dialog box Library Search Path L on Library tab for setting Linker Options dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 3 7 3 7 1 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Ca
237. d it is assumed that the o option has been specified A Specifying this option is the same as specifying the option aoptr F devpath This option searches folder devpath for the device file If this option is omitted the standard folder is searched V dis850 handles the folder at the dev position from the dis850 s installation folder as the standard folder of the device file This option displays addresses This option displays code assembler instruction data e address This option specifies an end address The address is specified as a decimal number or as a hexadecimal number starting with Ox If this option is omitted it is assumed that Oxffffffff has been specified 1 size This option specifies the display size size is specified as a decimal number or as a hexadecimal number starting with Ox If this option is omitted it is assumed that Oxffffffff has been specified m This option displays the assembly language source s format If this option is omitted it is displayed with a symbol offset etc Q This option displays the offset ffom symbols If this option is omitted symbols are displayed unless the a option or the m option has been specified P This option displays code that has been arranged according to the processor s instruction format However the c option takes priority if it has been specified r This option displays registers rO r2 r3 r4 r5 r30 and r31 as zero hp sp
238. d unnecessary interrupt inhibit specification is ignored W2635 Interrupt attribute is already specified for function function block interrupt is ignored Function function has been already declared as an interrupt handler Because the interrupt handler is interrupt inhibited unnecessary interrupt inhibit specification is ignored W2637 Interrupt function cannot be inlined inline is ignored inline must not be specified for a function declared as an interrupt The inline specification is ignored W2643 Interrupt attribute is specified for function function previously specified inline is ignored Function function for which inline was specified is specified as an interrupt handler The inline specification is ignored W2656 unknown size cannot specified const sconst section A const sconst section must not be specified for a variable with unknown size W2671 Function function is already defined directive pragma inline is ignored The inline specification must be described before the function definition The inline specification is ignored 438 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W2683 Second argument name for __set_il is not interrupt request name name specified as the second argument of a function that sets an interrupt level is not an interrupt request name The interrupt level is not set W2684 cannot set interrupt level for name An
239. d by one data record is 1 and the maximum value is 255 Example 04 0100 00 3C58E01B 6C NL a b c d e a Number of bytes of 3C58E01B expressed as two digit hexadecimal number is 04 b Location address is 0100 c Record type is 00 d Code e Checksum is 6C which is the lower 1 byte of two s complement E6 of 04 01 00 00 3C 58 EO 1B 194 expressed as a two digit hexadecimal number 4 End record This record indicates the end of a code 00 0000 01 FF NL a b c d a Number of bytes is fixed to 00 b Fixed to 0000 c Record type is 01 d Checksum is fixed to FF User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 255 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER Reference Intel hex 256 An allocation address in the Intel hex format is 2 bytes 16 bits Therefore only a 64 KB space can be directly specified To extend this area the Intel extended hex format adds an extension address of 16 bits so that a space up to 1 M byte 20 bits can be used Specifically a record type that specifies a 16 bit extension address is added This extension address is shifted 4 bits and added to the allocation address to express a 20 bit address To indicate FFFFFH for example FOOOH is set as the extension address and FFFFH is specified as the allocation address In the Intel extended hex format only 0 to FFFFFH can be addressed To express FFFFFFH another object format must be used The hx850 outputs a message if the rule of this format i
240. d by the ext_func quasi directive is not defined Supplement The possible causes of this message are the following 1 The function symbol is not defined 2 The function symbol is specified as static 3 The ext_func quasi directive specified symbol is not described source of function defined In this case branch instruction of function in branch table is unsolved W4605 section section with section type section type not supported ignored The section with section name section having section type section type is not supported by the Id850 This entry is ignored W4608 input files have different register modes use rc option for more information A file with a different register mode has been input Detailed information is output when the rc option is User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 461 APPENDIX B MESSAGE specified Caution If an assembler file is included in the source file in a register mode other than the 32 regsiter mode this warning message may be displayed To specify the register mode of an assembler file use the option quasi directive in the assembler file to specify the register mode Enter the one of following descriptions in the assembler file When using 22 register mode option reg mode 5 5 When using 26 register mode option reg _ mode 7 7 W4611 string option overrides section section Section section is overwritten by the string option W4613 illegal
241. d file in cases where there are a lot of files and consequently a lot of file names to enter For details of command files refer to 3 7 2 Com mand file 3 Since the default specification for the output section file is that all variables are allocated to a tidata attribute section it may be necessary to modify the section file If the O option is specified when activating sf850 the variables that can be accommodated in the memory range of the tidata section can be automatically selected in sequence starting from the most frequently referenced variable 4 Re compile the C language source file by specifying the ca850 option Xsec_file As a result of re compiling a section allocated object file is created in accordance with the input section file Example gt ca850 cpu 3201 Xsec_file secfile funcl c func2 c func3 c In this case secfile is input as a section file and funct c func2 c and func3 c are compiled User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 281 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 9 3 4 Use via PM This section explains a method for using section files via PM When operating from PM check Use This in the File tab that is displayed using the Section File Generator Options dialog box menu This causes the ca850 to create a frequency information file and then automatically start sf850 to generate a section file which it then uses to compile A section file output using the above method speci
242. d in a file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 421 APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2510 cannot cast typel to type2 Casting from type7 to type2 cannot be executed E2511 expression must be arithmetic or pointer type Specify expression as arithmetic or pointer type E2512 expression must be arithmetic type Specify expression as arithmetic type E2513 expression must be pointer type or zero Specify expression as pointer type or zero E2515 expression must be integral type Specify expression as integer type E2516 expression must be constant expression Specify expression as a constant expression E2517 One of the operands for must be pointer type and the other must be of integral type One of the operands for must be of pointer type and the other must be of integer type E2518 illegal operand for unary amp The operand of the unary operator amp is incorrect E2519 exception has occurred at compile time The exception exception related to floating point operation occurred at compile time E2522 name is not a member name is not a member of an aggregate E2523 illegal LHS of operator operator must be modifiable Lvalue An illegal substitution destination is coded to the left of operator operator E2524 illegal type combination for operator typel type2 The combination of types for the operator operator type1 and type2 is incorrect E2526 Operands of opera
243. d the link directive file Please bss sbss of bss attribute section replace data sdata If name is omitted all section names are specified If the tidata is specified the name the user can choose to have the output sent to tidata word and tidata byte instead of just tidata Xcv name PM This option excludes variables from optimization when the O option is specified as name A name is spec ified with the same from as a Table 9 1 cl num PM This option specifies the comment level of the section file to be output The following values can be specified as num 0 No output of comments 1 Outputs file creation information date etc variable information and corresponding descriptions The variable information includes the section name size and use frequency If the section name is not determined by an external variable is output 2 Outputs a format guide in addition to level 1 If O has been specified variables judged not to fit in the tidata section are output as comments If this option is omitted comment level 1 is assumed 284 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR err file file This option adds and saves error messages to the file file err file file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the file file h help This option outputs a description of the section file generator s options via standard output and then
244. data to be allocated to sconst sdata sbss Allocation Size Threshold is illegal Do not use any characters other than numerals in the specification of the length of data to be allocated to sdata sbss User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 487 APPENDIX B MESSAGE Directory of assembler source is not exist make it The folder of the assembly language source does not exist Check if a folder should be created Directory of assemble list is not exist make it The folder of the assembler list does not exist Check if a folder should be created Directory of frequency information file is not exist make it An extension is necessary for a file name Without an extension build processing may not be executed correctly Do you want to set your changed option for sources Check if all the modification contents of an individual source option are to be reflected in the source Temporary Directory is not exist make it The temporary folder does not exist Check if a folder should be created The extension of the file does not exist Build might not be executed correctly An extension is necessary for a file name Without an extension build processing may not be executed correctly cannot create directory The folder cannot be created cannot use semicolon Do not use semicolon for an option for which two or more items can be input B 2 4 Assembler sdata sbss Allocation Size Threshold is illegal Do not use any
245. database Common option Cross reference list Tag information Output format r File name fcxref Default Set default option Cancel Help 1 Output format If Output cross reference list is checked the analysis result is output in the text format This is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in the text format by using the File name edit box The default file name is cxref The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only if Output cross reference list is selected If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab Output cross reference list remains on Button a Set default option button This button returns the current setting of the dialog box to the default status If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab Output cross reference list remains on 344 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Tag information This tab is used to the tag information Figure 12 5 Cross reference option Dialog Box Tag information Tab Cross reference option Call graph Function measure Call database Common option Cross reference list Tag information Output format m Eile name E S Default Set default option Cancel Help 1 Output format If Output tag in
246. de Message Assembler Others General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Sign of Bit field int Default signed X Sign of char Default signed v Type of enum Default int v F Strict ANSI C Rule ansi Use Extension of CC78K cc78k I Strict Integer Extension Xe Treat Tentative Definition as Definition defvar Command Line Option i 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Sign of Bit field int This area is used to specify the signed or unsigned status of an integer type bit field for which the signed unsigned status has not been specified The default setting is signed 2 Sign of char This area is used to specify the signed or unsigned status of simple char type for which the signed unsigned status has not been specified The default setting is signed 3 Type of enum This edit box is used to specify which integer type an enumeration type matches char unsigned char short unsigned short and int can be selected int is assumed by default 4 Strict ANSI C Rule ansi Check this box to compile strictly according to the language specification in the ANSI standards 5 Use Extention of CC78K cc78k This check box specifies whether the expanded language specification of the CC78Kx is valid If it is checked the effect is the same as specifying the cc78k option 88 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER
247. des in the area specified by address start to size size If start and size are omitted all the codes in the internal ROM defined by the device file are converted into hex format and output Of the area specified the unused area is filled with num num can be specified by 1 or 2 bytes If num is of less than 2 or 4 digits it is assumed that as many Os as the deficient number of digits are specified at the beginning If num is omitted the unused area is filled with Oxff This option must not be specified when the extended Tektronix hex format is specified If this option is specified the specification by the l S f x and Z option is ignored x PM This option makes local symbols also eligible when hex converting and outputting the symbol table portion This option is valid only when the S option has also been specified If this option is omitted only global symbols are eligible If this option is specified together with the U option this option is ignored rom_less PM When the U option is specified this option disables use of the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file and information of the internal ROM area to be converted into hex It also disables output of a warning message that is output if the area subject to hex conversion exceeds the internal ROM area If this option is omitted and if start size of the U option is omitted the internal ROM area defined in the device file is converted If
248. directive has appeared however the value specified by the option is applied if the default value is specified This option has following restrictions when using the V850 core V850Ex core V850E2 core that is set to disable misalign access These restrictions are the same as for pragma pack a The address of a structure member cannot be obtained correctly b Accessing a bit field also accesses a data field because the type of the member is read If the width of the bit field is less than the type of the member the outside of the object is accessed because the type of the member is read Usually no problem with execution occurs but an illegal access may be made if I O is mapped For details of structure packing refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual Note With this version the operation when the value of num is 4 is the same as that when it is 8 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 55 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 7 Far jump output control options Xfar_ jump file Xfar_ jump file PM The jmp directive is used to branch jump to the function specified in file The Id850 outputs an error if the function is in a range that cannot be branched to by the jarl or jr directive in which case this option is used to recompile The file name space cannot be left blank A extension is necessary for a file name The extension fjp is recommended This option must not be specified to call a function at the flash side from the boot
249. directive is not recognized This pragma directive is ignored W2163 Digit sequence after line is interpreted as a decimal integer A numeric string following line is interpreted as a decimal number W2166 recognized pragma directive pragma directive The preprocessing directive is recognized as the pragma directive W2172 constant out of range The constant value exceeds the specifiable range It is assumed that only the lower valid number of digits has been specified Remark This message is output if the constant value exceeds the range that can be expressed for a type Example Assignment of a value Oxff or greater to a char variable 434 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W2176 hexadecimal digit out of range The specifiable range of a hexadecimal value was exceeded The last two characters are valid for this processing system W2180 cannot convert codel code into code2 code data datal data2 data3 code1 cannot be converted into code2 code Character code of host environment code2 Character code of execution environment data Data that could not be converted in hexadecimal W2212 Declaration of name hides parameter Because a symbol name identical to that of the argument is declared the symbol is assumed to be valid and declaration of the argument is hidden This warning message is error message E2211 when the ansi option is specified W2215 Undeclared function function
250. dition for arrays including character strings and structures and expands strcpy or stremp function calls to inline This speeds up the object s execution but it also increases the code size This option executes conversion only when the second argument of strcpy or strcmp is a character string In addition the program requires four byte alignment of the first argument the ca850 aligns the second argument since it is a character string This option must not be specified together with the Xpack option 7 External variable sort options Wo Op file PM This option rearranges external variables allocated to a section other than const sconst sequentially starting from the largest alignment size If the intermediate file file is specified the definition and temporary definition of variables in the source file allocated to a section other than const sconst having external linkage are moved to file After being moved the definition and temporary definition of the source file are treated in the same manner as declaration An error does not occur even if file does not exist at the beginning 8 Branch instruction control option Wo XFo PM This option arranges and outputs branch instructions giving priority to the code size However it makes source debugging difficult This option is valid when the Og O Os or Ot option is specified If this option is omitted a code giving priority to debug information is output for a
251. drops when this option is specified Wi D PM This option reduces the memory capacity used in the machine dependent optimization phase during compiling Specify this option if compiling is not completed correctly The compilation speed drops when this option is specified 42 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 6 Error output specification options err file file This option adds and saves error messages to the file file With PM specifying a file name as Error File on the File in the Compiler Common Options dialog box is equivalent to specifying this option err file file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the file file err limit num PM This option specifies the maximum number of error message to be output num Specify 15 to 50 in decimal numbers as num If this option is omitted 15 is assumed 7 Expansion function specification option cc78k 78K compatible PM This option enables the expansion functions compatible with the 78K microcontrollers C compiler CC78Kx User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 43 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 5 Optimization Optimization is processing used to increase the execution speed of an application or to decrease the ROM capacity to be used How optimization is performed differs depending on the level of optimization If a high level of optimization is selected the compilation speed may slow down and the probability of allocating C language sour
252. e File file cannot be opened F6540 cannot write file file An error occurred while file file was being written F6550 cannot read file file An error occurred while file file was being read F6560 cannot create file file File file cannot be generated F6580 input line is too long One line of the input file is too long F7000 too many errors Compilation has stopped because errors exceeding the specified error count have occurred F7001 unknown option option An illegal option option has been specified F7002 invalid argument of option option The argument of the option option is illegal F7003 nested command file file The command file file is nested It must not be nested 432 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F7004 no input file No input file is specified F7005 cannot open file file File file cannot be opened F7006 archive symbol table and archive member mismatch An abnormality occurred in the archive symbol table F7007 unknown file type file The file type of file is not known F7009 out of memory Memory capacity is insufficient F7010 multiple defined symbol symbol Multiple defined symbol symbol exists F7011 duplicated cpu type A target device is specified in duplicate by an option or the pragma directive F7012 cannot write file file errno num Error of error number num occurred during w
253. e The address where the section is allocated may exceed the range that can be expressed Specify the start address of the area to be converted into hex format by using the d option and use an offset from that address 2 The value specified by the d option is incorrect By specifying the d option an offset from a value specified as an address can be used The offset from this value may exceed the range that can be expressed Specify an appropriate value W8747 too small block length Length gt length The maximum value of the specified block length is too small It is changed to the default value length and processing is continued W8748 too large block length Length gt length The maximum value of the specified block length is too large It is changed to the maximum value ength of the value that can be specified and processing is continued W8749 block length is set Length gt length The maximum value of the block length is changed from the default value to length and processing is continued This message is output if a value that must not be specified for the b option is specified W8750 symbol block length exceed default value The block length of the symbol block exceeds the maximum value of the specified block 476 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 7 Archiver F8200 memory allocation fault The memory is insufficient F8201 bad key character use dm a b qr a b u txv
254. e Fs This check box specifies whether the assembly language source resulting from compiling a C language source is to be output When it is checked a folder name or file name can be specified in the edit box below this button If a folder name is specified in this edit box as Setting of global options and if the specified folder does not exist a message asking you if a folder is to be created is displayed If nothing is specified in the edit box an assembly language source is output to the project folder with the extension of the C language source file name changed to S To specify another output destination specify a folder name in the edit box If a file name is specified for Setting of global options an assembly language source for the source compiled last is output because the same file name is overwritten A file name can be specified when a file name is specified for Individual Source Options Setting 98 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 2 Assemble List Fv This check box specifies whether the assemble list resulting from compiling a C language source is to be output When it is checked a folder name or file name can be specified in the edit box below this button If a folder name is specified in this edit box as Setting of a global options and if the specified folder does not exist a message asking you if a folder is to be created is displayed If nothing is specified in the edit box an assemble list is
255. e dialog box according to the selected function 4 List display area This area displays the functions selected in the tree display area and its callee functions in the form of a list Functions are not movable using drag and drop in this area a Function This part displays the function names Click Function to sort the list display areapart in the order of the function names One or more of the indications below appears depending on the type of function func When the file including the definition of the function is unknown the function name is bracketed file c func In the case of a static function file name function name composed of the file name with no paths and the function name appears func In the case of a recursive function follows the function name func amp When the function contains an indirect function call using a pointer amp follows the function name 390 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER b Total Stack Size This part displays the total size of the stack which may be used during the execution of the function including those of its callee functions is displayed when the stack size is unknown and SIZEOVER is displayed when the stack size value exceeds the limit value Click Total Stack Size to sort the list display area in the order of the stack sizes The stack size is calculated by the following formula the frame
256. e Level 2 Advanced Optimization Execution Speed Ot option is specified When Level 2 Advanced Optimization Object Size is specified this option function is included and this option is dimmed and cannot be selected 8 Advanced Optimization Wi 04 This option strictly analyzes the data flow and executes the most advanced optimization Specify this option in addition to the optimization option O Os or Ot to execute more advanced optimization Optimization of registers extending over a branch instruction Optimization of absolute value operations Optimization of a cmp instruction extending over a branch instruction Optimization of a return instruction extending over a branch instruction Depending on the source the result of optimization specified by this option may be the same as that of optimization specified by the Os or Ot option The compiling time when this option is specified is longer than that when Os or Ot is specified 9 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 94 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Remark a Sort external variables External variables can be rearranged starting from the largest alignment size by using the Wo Op option However the variables allocated to the const sconst section are not rearranged A file name can be specified with this option
257. e analyzer dialog box The RAM map setting dialog box is displayed through the following operation after configuring the project in PM Select Tool Static performance analyzer then click the RAM map tab 2 Using in the Object Analysis Tool dialog box The RAM map activation dialog box is displayed through the following operation after configuring the project in PM Select Tool Startup Object Analysis Tool then click the RAM map tab Since the memory layout visualization tool is activated once per project there are no file specific settings 368 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 13 4 Types and Features of Options The rammap options are shown below V This option outputs the version number of rammap and then terminates processing all This option outputs all information to a text format file and CSV format file This option has the same result as when mall is specified h help This option outputs an explanation of the options and then terminates processing m file This option outputs a memory map table to the specified file in text format If file is omitted rammap txt is assumed for the file name mall file This option outputs a memory map table to the specified file in text format and CSV format The file names are file st and file csv If an extension is appended to the specification for file that extension is ignored If f
258. e at which that function s definition begins in the source file Ret1 Retz2 Return values of the function When the analysis cannot be performed nothing is output Arg1 Arg2 Arguments of the function When the analysis cannot be performed nothing is output Measure Function metrics information is output FuncNo Function number The No value in Funcs is used to indicate the function CalledCnt Call histogram Indicates the frequency with which that function was called The frequencies that are output are based on the assumption that the function is called once for each function call description User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 6 5 Call database When a call database information output option such as b is specified for cxref the functions called by a given function and the number of times each function is called by that function are output The output file format is text format or CSV format To directly reference the main important information output the data in text format To reference detailed information in tabular form output the data in CSV format 1 Text format output example If the b option is specified the call database is output in text format The default output file name is cprofile dat The text format output is as follows Figure 12 15 Call Database Text Format Output Example cxref Command input cxref b apli c
259. e dependent on section type type are shown in Table A 5 Table A 5 Meanings of Link and Info 410 Section Type Meaning of Link Meaning of Info GPTAB Section header table index of section to which corresponding data is allocated REL Section header table index of Section header table index of section not supported corresponding symbol table to be relocated This section type is not supported in the CA850 compiler package RELA Section header table index of Section header table index of section corresponding symbol table to be relocated SYMTAB Section header table index of Symbol table index of symbol that corresponding string table appears first when table is not local User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE A 5 Sections The following describes the sections that are constituent elements in ELF format object files A section is a main constituent element of object files Its contents include machine language instructions data symbol tables string tables debug information and line number information A section must meet the following conditions 1 One section header table entry corresponding to the section header table must exist in each section 2 In some cases such as a section having section type NOBITS a section may have only a section header table entry but no actual value exists in the object file 3 A section that has an actual value in the object f
260. e expanded at all In addition a loop having a complicated structure such as having inner loops may not be expanded If 0 or 1 is specified as num expansion is suppressed If num is not specified it is assumed that 4 is specified Specify num in decimal numbers Example To expand a loop that is executed 10 times four times i 0 i O while i lt 10 Processing Processing i 1 i Processing i 2 while i lt 10 Processing i Processing i Processing i Processing i Note This option is useful when loop expansion does not need to be performed with Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed specified Wo Op file PM This option rearranges external variables allocated to a section other than const sconst sequentially starting from the largest alignment size If the intermediate file file is specified the definition and temporary definition of variables in the source file allocated to a section other than const sconst having external linkage are moved to file After being moved the definition and temporary definition of the source file is treated in the same manner as declaration An error does not occur even if file does not exist at the beginning User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Wo XFo PM Outputs code giving priority to the code size when a branch occurs However the debug information will be affec
261. e is output 9 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 251 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER This tab is used to set other options of the hx850 Figure 7 4 Hexa Converter Options Dialog Box Others Tab Hexa Converter Options File Option Others Any Option l F Use Command File Command Line Options 0 a hex 1 Any Option This edit box is used to specify an option other than one described above in the Hexa Converter Options dialog box Describe an option in this edit box in the same format as on the command line At present however no option has to be specified in this edit box because all the options related to the hex converter can be specified in the Hexa Converter Options dialog box 2 Use Command File In the Windows environment the length of character strings used to specify options for the ca850 is restricted If this check box is selected the option character string is output to a command file which enables the operation to be completed without observing the restriction on the character string length Check this check box if many options are set and not all of them can be recognized Under the default setting the check box is not checked For the details of command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 3 Command Line Options This area
262. e linker If an archive file is specified the Id850 searches the necessary objects from the specified archive file and links only the objects found User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 263 CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER 8 2 Operation Method This section describes how the ar850 operates 8 2 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt ar850 s err file file key option member name t archive file member name or file Can be omitted Pattern in immediately before can be repeated Note When files are linked within an archive file they are called members Each member s member name is the same as its original file name 8 2 2 Method using PM To create an archive file library file a special project must be established under PM To establish the project using PM select the following as the microcontrollers name 850 Microcontrollers 850 Microcontrollers Common Library V850 Microcontrollers Library V850E Core Common Library V850E2 Core Common Library This establishes a project for creating an archive file library file At this time the setting dialogs that can be selected via Tools menu are as follows Compiler Common Options dialog box Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options dialog box Archiver Options dialog box Section File Generator Options dialog box Static performance analyzer dialog box Activation of the
263. e object file output by the linker The default file name is romp out To modify the name of the object file specify a file name in Output File o field on the File tab Note that the ROMization processor can be started from PM only when the Create Object for ROM has been specified on the ROM tab in the Compiler Common Options dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 225 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 7 Types and Features of Options 226 The romp850 options are shown below Symbols used in option list PM Option exists as specification item under the PM User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 7 1 File This specification sets the file s output file options err file file This option adds and saves error messages to the file file err file file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the file file o ofile PM The ofile is the object file name to be created If this option is omitted it is assumed that romp out has been specified a out cannot be specified as the file name Spaces cannot be used in the file name User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 227 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 7 2 Options These specifications set the ROMization processor s ordinary options Ximem_overflow warning PM This option controls checking if the internal ROM RAM has overflowed A warning message is output and processing is continued in case
264. e started by specifying the S command line option and or by specifying single source compilation via PM Either of these methods can be used to output a compiler code or to create a relocatable object file refer to 3 4 Operation Method for details of these methods Examples of starting commands from command line are shown below refer to 3 5 Types and Features of Options for details of the command line options 1 When executing everything from the ca850 gt ca850 cpu 3201 file c obj o This specifies cpu 3201 V850ES SA2 as the device and reads file c and obj o to create an executable object file a out At this time crtE o is linked as the startup module and the standard libraries libc a and libm a are referenced gt ca850 cpu 3201 R org crt o file c obj o This reads file c and obj o to create an executable object file a out At this time org_crt o is linked as the startup module and the standard libraries libc a and libm a are referenced 2 When starting from the ca850 to the as850 and starting the 1d850 alone gt ca850 cpu 3201 c file c asm s This reads file c and asm s to create the relocatable object files file o and asm o gt 1d850 cpu 3201 org _crt o file o asm o obj o lc This links org_crt o file o asm o and obj o to create the executable object file a out At this time libc a is referenced 30 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C C
265. e that is a constituent element in ELF format object files The section header table is an array of section header table entries that contain information about all of the sections included in the object file refer to Table A 3 An index i e a subscript to this array is called a section header table index which is used to reference the section header table entries Table A 3 Constituent Elements of Section Header Table Entries and Their Meanings Constituent Meanin Element 9 name Name of corresponding section index to string table shstrtab that contains the section name type Section type of corresponding section refer to A 4 1 Section types flags Section attribute of corresponding section attribute is A for a section occupying memory W for a section that can be written X for an executable section and G for a section that is allocated to a memory range that can be referenced using global pointer gp with 16 bit displacement addr Start address of corresponding section offset Offset in file of corresponding section size Size of corresponding section link Section header table index link of corresponding section refer to A 4 2 Constituent elements link info dependent on section type info Information dependent on section type of corresponding section refer to A 4 2 Constituent elements link info dependent on section type addralign Alignment condition of corresponding
266. e the permissible range 0x0 value of the device The specified value is ignored and the default value of the device is used W3024 sorry option option not implemented ignored Option option is not implemented It is ignored W3025 sorry option option not implemented ignored Option option is not implemented It is ignored W3026 illegal register number aligned odd register rXX to be even register rYY A register with an odd number r1 r3 r31 was specified Only general purpose registers with even numbers r0 r2 r4 r30 can be specified Assembly will continue as if a register with an even number r0 r2 r4 r30 has been specified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 449 APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 4 Linker E4231 is expected at the end of directive is required at the end of the directive E4232 is expected is required E4233 name is expected at the beginning of directive Start a directive with a name segment section or symbol name E4234 section name is expected at the beginning of section directive Start a section directive with a section name E4235 or is expected to follow name The name that begins a directive must be followed by or E4236 is expected to follow section name is required at the end of an output section name E4237 too many Too many are specified for E4238 ill
267. e units and debug information Detail of Optimization Setting of options related to optimization in phase units External Register Output File Settings related to external variable registers Setting of options related to output files Output Code Setting of options related to output codes Message Setting of options related to messages Assembler Setting of options of assembler used when C language source is assembled Others Other settings The following 11 tabs are displayed for an individual source option setting 80 Table 3 6 Compiler Options Dialog Box Individual Source Tab Description General Setting of compiler options often used Preprocessor Setting of options related to compiler preprocessing C Language Setting of options related to C language specifications Optimization and Debug Information Setting of optimization level in source units and debug information Detail of Optimization Setting of options related to optimization in phase units Output File Setting of options related to output files Output Code Setting of options related to output codes Message Setting of options related to messages Assembler Setting of options of assembler used when C language source is assembled Others Other settings Difference Indication of differences between the compiler o
268. ecified when an executable object file is generated without the r option specified and an example of the information output when this option is specified when a relocatable object file is generated with the r option specified are shown below Figure 5 21 Example of Output Information on Executable Object File eee LINK EDITOR GP INFORMATION GP SYMBOL SECTION SECTION SECTION GP NAME NAME SIZE REAL SIZE ASSUMED NUMBER _gp_DATA sdata 0x000af10 0x00002000 4 OK 0x00003450 8 OK 0x00004430 12 OK 0x000050a8 16 OK 0x00007b40 20 OK 0x0000a010 24 0x0000af10 32 sbss 0x00012050 0x00000050 4 OK 0x00002050 16 OK 0x00007050 512 OK 0x00010050 1024 a b c d e f User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 195 196 CHAPTER 5 LINKER Figure 5 22 Example of Output Information on Relocatable Object File eee LINK EDITOR GP INFORMATION GP SYMBOL SECTION SECTION SECTION GP NAME NAME SIZE REAL SIZE ASSUMED NUMBER NOT AVAILABLE sdata 0x000af10 0x00002000 4 OK 0x00003450 8 OK 0x00004430 12 OK 0x000050a8 16 OK 0x00007b40 20 OK 0x0000a010 24 0x0000af10 32 sbss 0x00012050 0x00000050 4 OK 0x00002050 16 OK GpCommon 0x00010000 0x00005000 512 OK 0x00010000 1024 a b c d e f The meaning of each item of the output information is as follows a Name of global pointer symbol This is the name of
269. ecify the various indexes in edit boxes with decimal or hexadecimal values Figure 10 3 Output Index Dialog Box Output Index Start Index of Section Header d End Index of Section Header d Cancel Start Index of Symbol T able t m Help End Index of Symbol Table t Start Index of Line Number Information z End Index of Line Number Information z 1 Start Index of Section Header d This sets the section header start index specified with the d option Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the d option 2 End Index of Section Header d This sets the section header end index specified with the d option Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the d option 3 Start Index of Symbol Tabler t This sets the symbol table start index specified with the t option Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the t option 4 End Index of Symbol Tabler t This sets the symbol table end index specified with the t option Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the t option 5 Start Index of Line Number Information z This sets the line number information start index specified with the z option Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the z option 6 End Index of Line Number Information z This sets the line number information end index specified with the z option Specifying the value works the same
270. ecordsNote 2 The following figure shows the file configuration of the Motorola S type hex format Notes 1 Each record is output in ASCII code 2 The Motorola S type hex formats are divided into two types 24 bit standard address and 32 bit address types The format of the standard address type consists of SO S2 and S8 records and the format of the 32 bit address type consists of SO S3 and S7 records Figure 7 6 File Configuration of Motorola S Type Hex Format SO record 2 S3 record 2 S3 record S8 S7 record Each record format consists of the following fields ST LL field field SS NL a b c d a Record type b Record length number of bytes of field field expressed as two digit hexadecimal number number of bytes expressed by SSN te c Checksum Lower 1 byte expressed as two digit hexadecimal number of one s complement of total of number of bytes in records other than ST SS and NL expressed as two digit hexadecimal number d Newline n Note This is one 1 SO record This record indicates a file name SO LL FF FF SS NL a b a Record type is SO b File name specified file name indicated in ASCII code User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 257 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 2 S2 record This record indicates the value of a code S2 LL AAAAAA DD DD SS NL a b c a Record t
271. ection Tab ROM Processor Options File Section Option Others Section List Section Add p Add t Delete Up Down ROM Section File File Name Browse M Output If Changed Dutput Command Line Options Cancel Help 1 Section List This list box displays the sections to be ROMized and options in the order in which they were specified The sections and options displayed in this list box are stored in the rompsec section in that order In other words the order of the sections and options is equivalent to the number specified by the second argument of _rcopy _rcopy1 _rcopy2 or _rcopy4 numbers are sequentially assigned to sections starting from 1 If ROM Section File to be explained in 3 below is selected a C language source header file in which number and label are made to correspond by define is created and the number to be specified by the second argument can be specified 2 Section To add a section to the list in this dialog box describe a section name in this text box and then click the Add p or Add t button a Add p This button adds a section to Section List as a p option It adds the section specified in Section to Section List as a section to be specified by the p option In other words if the section specified in Section has a data or sdata attribute it is added to the section list by using this button User s Manual U18512EJ1VOU
272. ection files output by the sf850 refer to 9 2 Section File Format User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 9 5 Settings Made via PM This section describes each dialog for setting sf850 command options for source files of a given project 9 5 1 Section File Generator Options dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following three tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 9 4 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box Tab Description File Setting of options related to a file Option Setting of sf850 options Others Other settings Note The option shown with in this dialog box is the option that is activated from the command line Caution The generated file is deleted if the section file generator options are changed To edit and use copy it to a separate file then use User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 287 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR This tab is used to set options related to a file of the sf850 Figure 9 4 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box File Tab Section File Generator Options File Option Others M Use This Output File o Browse Command Line Options P b sf OK Cancel Help Ea 1 Use This This check box is used to specify whether a section file generator is used for build If it is checked the section file generator is used If it
273. ections where they are allocated Also by having the section files referenced by the compiler the variables can be allocated to the intended locations without having to modify the C language source file 272 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR With the ca850 specification of a compiler option Xcre_sec_data or Xcre_sec_data_only generates a frequency information file which can be input to the section file generator sf850 to create a section file However the sf850 is designed to output information for allocating data to tidata attribute tidata word attribute and tidata byte attribute sections that are intended to be allocated in the internal RAM of V850 microcontrollers devices Since section files are text format files they can be edited and modified by using an editor In other words changes can be made in this way to the section files that are output by the sf850 in order to create the final completed section files When compilation is performed once again using the completed section file with the Xsec_file option specified the result is a complete object file whose external variables and static variables are allocated to the specified sections Figure 9 1 Image of Compilation Using Section File Specifications 3 cone sf850 EETA sec_data is specified C language source file Frequency information file sec Section file 4 Re compile p Xsec_fileis specified C language sou
274. ed this option is specified When it is activated from PM the assembler option zf is automatically appended if Create Flash Object of the Compiler Common Options is checked and an object file of the fixed RAM is specified by Boot Object File Specify an object output by the Id850 An error occurs if an object output by the romp850 is specified Specify Branch Table Address ext_table ext_table option as a linker option Specify an address of the flash memory An example where the address of the branch table is 0x200000 is shown below Figure 5 18 Compiler Common Options for Flash Memory Compiler Common Options File Startup Link Directive ROM Flash Device IV Create Flash Object Branch Table Address 0200000 Boot Object File flash_boot out Browse This edit box can be specified an address of branch table by hexadecimal of C language Same address is necessary with both the flash area side and the boot area side When it is specified ext_table option of the linker is set Cancel Apply Help Check Create Flash Object also for a project of the fixed ROM but do not specify Boot Object File zf option Specify the same address as the flash memory for Branch Table Address ext_table ext_table option An example of option setting for the fixed ROM is shown below Figure 5 19 Compiler Common Options for Fixed ROM Compiler Common Options File Startup Link Directive RO
275. ed by the Id850 Nothing is referenced if this option is omitted When activating the Id850 from the ca850 however the ca850 automatically passes the link specification of the standard library Ic and mathematical library Im to the Id850 For how to specify an archive file refer to the description of the 1d850 library specification option l User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 59 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 8 Warning message control Warning message control options are shown below wnum PM This option specifies the level of warning messages The following numbers can be specified as num 0 Suppresses message 1 Outputs ordinary warning message 2 Outputs detailed warning message The w0 specification is assumed if num is omitted The w1 specification is assumed if this option is omitted wstring wstring This option specifies outputting or suppressing a warning message for each parameter regardless of the level A warning message is output when has been specified or is suppressed when has been specified The following character strings can be specified as string bitfield_align When bit field members have exceeded the boundary set by the alignment condition and have been allocated starting from the next boundary bitfield_type When a type that cannot be specified in the ANSI specification is specified for the bit field callnodecl When calling an undeclared function nopi
276. ed member to the end of the specified archive file ma member This option moves the specified member to the position immediately after the member member in the specified archive file If member is omitted processing is stopped mb member This option moves the specified member to the position immediately before the member member in the specified archive file If member is omitted processing is stopped This option adds the specified file to the end of the specified archive file There is no checking as to whether or not a member with the same name as the specified file exists If the specified archive file does not exist a new archive file is created and it contains the specified file This option exchanges the specified file with the member having the same name in the specified archive file If the member with the same name as the specified file does not exist in the specified archive file the specified file is added to the end of the specified archive file If the specified archive file does not exist a new archive file is created and it contains the specified file ra member This option exchanges the specified file with the member having the same name in the specified archive file and then moves the specified file to the position immediately after the member member If the member with the same name as the specified file does not exist in the specified archive file the specified file is added to the end of the specified archive
277. edefined because it is reserved for the system E2126 System reserved macro name must not be undefined A macro name definition reserved for the system cannot be canceled E2129 illegal macro parameter name The macro s parameter name is incorrect E2130 macro name mismatch number of parameters The number of parameters of macro name does not match E2131 macro name missing J is missing from the macro name definition that has a parameter E2133 illegal operand for operator Something other than a parameter is specified for the operator in a macro definition E2134 compiler limit too long stringizing result num The character string is too long The maximum value for this processing system is 32766 E2135 illegal operand for operator The description of token concatenation in this macro definition is incorrect E2136 illegal pasting result The result of token concatenation is incorrect E2137 compiler limit too long pasting result num The result of token concatenation is too long The maximum value for this processing system is 32766 E2138 macro name illegal parameter syntax The parameter of macro name is incorrect E2151 illegal preprocessing directive syntax The description of the preprocessing directive contains an error E2152 illegal number name in conditional inclusion name that is not an integer must not be specified in an ex
278. eeds argument ignored The string option needs an argument and is ignored W4854 string option is ignored The string option is ignored W4857 string1l option is illegal when string2 option is specified ignored stringl option The string1 option must not be specified when string2 option is specified string1 option is ignored W4860 string1 option s argument is illegal ignored string2 option The argument specified for the string1 option is illegal string2 and the specified option are ignored W4865 duplicated string option ignored The string option has been specified two or more times The specification is ignored W4866 duplicated stringi option ignored string2 option The string1 option has been specified two or more times string2 and the specified option are ignored W4867 duplicated stringi option ignored string2 option The string1 option has been specified two or more times string2 and the specified option are ignored W4868 string option aligned odd value valuel to be even value value2 Odd value value1 specified for string option was aligned with even value value2 W4871 string option is not supported for V850 core string option is not supported by the device of the V850 core W4872 segment sort function is active because new vector type exist in device file Segments are sorted in address order because a device file having a new interrupt type is specified
279. egal character number An illegal character number exists in the link directive E4239 string needs effective parameter A valid parameter is necessary for string E4240 string is illegal in segment directive string must not be specified in the segment directive E4241 string is illegal in section directive string must not be specified in the section directive E4242 string is illegal in symbol directive string must not be specified in the symbol directive E4243 string is illegal in file specification field string must not be specified in the portion that specifies a file name E4244 string illegal in segment name field string must not be specified in the portion that specifies a segment name E4245 string specified to segment segment more than once in same or other directive string has been specified more than once in the same segment directive or another segment directive for segment segment 450 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E4246 string specified to section section more than once in same or other directive string has been specified more than once in the same section directive or another section directive for section section E4247 string specified to symbol symbol more than once in same or other directive string has been specified more than once in the same symbol directive or another symbol directive for symbol symbol E4248 segment segment already
280. ence of the library can be prevented Example Example lm lc a o b o c o a o b o c o lm lc 2 If the following error message is output while the library for storage management calloc malloc free realloc is being used secure the heap memory F4452 undfined symbol __sysheap refrenced in heapcom o c nectool32 1ib850 r22 libc a __sizeof__sysheap refrenced in heapcom o c nectool32 1ib850 r22 libc a 3 If the peripheral function register name is an undefined symbol the peripheral function register name may be used for extern declaration To use a peripheral function register delete the extern declaration and specify the register name using pragma ioreg F4453 device file version mismatch cannot use version string The specified device file version is illegal The version string cannot be specified F4454 cannot link V850E 2 common objects with V850 E objects file is V850E 2 common object The files cannot be linked in the following combinations The file file is a V850Ex core common object file V850E1 V850ES core common object files and V850 core object files V850E2 core common object files and V850 core object files V850E2 core common object files and V850E1 V850ES core object files 460 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4455 cannot link old_fcall objects with new_fcall object file is old_fcall object An object file that uses the
281. equired for the ROMization object are as follows Name of packed section rompsec section Start address label name of rompsec section __ S_romp The function used to copy from the rompsec section to the RAM area is as follows Copy function _rcopy _rcopy1 rcopy2 _rcopy4 function This function is stored in the library libr a which is in the lib850 r folder __S_romp is a label that is defined by rompcrt o in the lib850 r folder the corresponding source file is rompcrt s The rompcrt o object file is used as it is when the romp850 automatically creates a rompsec section immediately after at the 4 byte alignment position the text attribute section __S_romp becomes the label indicating the start address of that rompsec section In addition to this method for automatically creating a rompsec section it is also possible to independently create and allocate a program corresponding to the rompcrt s source file For details of this method refer to 6 4 2 Creating procedure customize During ROMization once the object for ROMization has been created it is converted into a hexadecimal file and written to ROM If the application does not include any data that requires packing there is no need to create a ROMization object Instead the object created by the linker can be converted directly into a hexadecimal file If the object files resolved for relocation include symbol information and debug information romp850
282. er can be specified by a label name For a specific example refer to 6 5 2 Example Return value 0 Normal completion if copied correctly 1 Abnormal termination if not copied correctly Cautions Data is not copied if the address indicated by label is not at the start of the rompsec section _rcopy copies data in accordance with the information generated by the romp850 No data is copied if data may be overwritten as a result of copying Specify a global label having an absolute value or an absolute address as the first argument of _rcopy label If any other value or address is specified the result is not guaranteed The _rcopy and _rcopy1 functions are identical in feature _rcopy is used to maintain compatibility with old versions User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 219 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR _rcopy1 Overview _rcopy1 Copies default data or RAM texte 1 byte Note Data section with initial value which is to be allocated to RAM and text section for internal RAM Format int _rcopyl amp label number unsigned long label long number Description _rcopy1 amp label number copies the initial value data of section number number to be copied or text to be allocated to RAM to the RAM area 1 byte at a time based on the information in the rompsec section allocated starting at the address following the address indicated by label If 1 is specified as number all sections i
283. er limit of data allocated to the sdata sbss section Data of the specified size bytes or less is allocated to the sdata or sbss section However data for which the sdata sbss section is specified by the pragma section directive or a section file is allocated to the sdata sbss section regardless of its size An integer of decimal values 0 to 32767 can be specified The yardstick for the value to be specified in this area is output for reference when Output GP Information A on the Option tab that sets linker options is specified Note that this option cannot be specified when an individual source is specified Always specify this option as a global option The value specified in the assembler is set in Size Threshold of sdata sbss Section Allocation G of the Output Code tab This option cannot be set independently for each source file and is always used for all files For the details of sdata sbss section refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual 5 Any Option This edit box is used to specify an option other than those described above in the Assembler Options dialog box Describe an option in this edit box in the same manner as on the command line At present only the following option can be specified as Any Option P Other options than this can be specified but are not supported at present 6 Generate Debug Information g This option outputs debug information Check this box to debug a program for example
284. er setting the project via the Project menu use either of the following methods to open the Assembler Options dialog box Set for all assembly language source files of the target project 1 Select Tool Assembler Options Set for a specific assembly language source file 1 Select the name of the assembly language source file to be set a option in the Project window on the PM 2 Select Individual Assembler Options item that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button When a specific setting has been performed the general option settings become invalid for that file For a file for which specific options have been set the icon at the head of the file name of the source file that is displayed in the Project window changes to green To make specific option setup invalid and have general option setup take effect click the Individual Assembler Option Release item that is displayed by clicking with the right mouse button or click the Delete Source Option button that has been added to Option and Difference tabs in the Assembler Options dialog box The option name displayed in in each option of the option settings dialog box is the option name for starting from the command prompt On the other hand to specify output object names etc there are options that can be specified only at startup from the command line To use the flash area relink function the zf option of the as850 is necessary f
285. erence Tool 323 Call Database 335 Calltree 333 Common options 328 Function Metrics 334 Input File 324 Operation Method 326 Output Information 325 Tag information 332 Debug Information 82 108 138 175 309 Define Macro 83 87 107 138 Delete Source Option 83 Detail of Optimization 92 Device 76 Device Specification 38 Difference 111 141 Disassembler 318 Disassembler 313 Operation Method 314 Options 315 Output Format 322 Dump 298 Dump Command 293 Operation Method 294 Options 295 Dump List 304 Edit Option dialog box 113 ELF Header 305 310 407 Entry Label 235 enum 88 Error File 70 Error Output 43 Executable Object 30 Expanded Tek 259 External Register 96 External Symbol 176 External Variable Register 97 External Variable Sort 48 ext_func quasi directive 185 Far Jump 56 84 File 70 171 232 248 288 Filling Number of Hole 174 Final Output Directory 70 Flash 75 79 Flash Memory 181 Flash ROM 162 Folder Organization 24 Format 249 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM Format of Object File 406 Frequency Information 99 Function measure 349 Function metrics 360 G General 81 Global Pointer Table 308 H Hexa Converter Options 247 Hexa Converter Options dialog box 247
286. es and concentrates the same processing on one location occurs and there is a tendency that the places where breakpoints can be set decrease In addition the probability of Debug assigning a variable from memory to a register improves The level of optimization at which the tendency that many breakpoints can be set and the probability of allocating variables to registers is small is called level 4 and the level at which the tendency is the strongest is called level 1 Debugging can be executed even at level 1 Code The ROM size efficiency is classified into levels 1 to 5 sat Efficiency The option that minimizes the ROM size is Os This option takes a long compilation time Use the Og or O option if the ROM capacity has a wide margin Execiton The execution speed is classified into levels 1 to 5 To reduce the ROM capacity of the entire module and improve the effective speed of only Speed a 3 ied A critical functions further specify the Ot option in file units Compilation The compilation time is classified into levels 1 to 3 Options O Os and Ot execute powerful optimization and therefore take a longer Time ee ee compilation time than the other options 1 Od Optimize for Debugging Optimization is executed within a basic blockN te This is optimization using information that can be grasped in a basic block and includes calculation of constants deformation of expressions recognition of common parts in a basic blo
287. es not occur but the definition of a file compiled later is valid To delete a variable in the intermediate language file delete the intermediate language file itself and rebuild User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 95 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER External Register This tab is used to make settings related to the external variable registers Figure 3 18 Compiler Options Dialog Box External Register Tab Compiler Options General Input Fil i C Language Optimization and Debug Information Detail of Optimization Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others Command Line Option e 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 rnum Register rnum These text boxes are used to specify an external variable to be allocated to the register specified by the rnum option num may be 15 to 24 Therefore there are 10 text boxes If an external variable is specified the effect is the same as specifying the rnum option 2 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 96 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Remark a External variable register By using the rnum option an external variable can be allocated to a register Specify a register other than the mask register that is vacated by specifying the reg option Specify an external variable using a symbol name excluding The follo
288. esolving and generates executable object files The linker can also generate relocatable object files when the r option is specified Figure 5 1 Operation Flow of Id850 o Wee Object file as Object file a Id850 cal Object file o ed Archive file Co al iene Device file Link directive file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 153 CHAPTER 5 LINKER gt ld850 a o b o c o lib a a o Section 1 Section 2 b o Section 1 Section 2 c O Section 1 Section 3 lib a Section 1 Section 2 p gt 1d850 Figure 5 2 1d850 Operation Image Example a out gt Establishes relations between sections and segments and references addresses aS amp Link directive file Device Segment 1 Section 1 of lib a Section 1 of c o Section 1 of b o Section 1 of a o Segment 2 Section 2 of lib a Section 2 of b o Section 2 of a o Segment 3 Section 3 of c o file Higher Lower Higher Lower The ca850 internally activates the as850 and Id850 as drivers When the ca850 is activated a load module can be generated Therefore there is no need to be aware of activating the as850 and Id850 154 Figure 5 3 Batch Processing Figure 5 4 Modular Processing ca850 as850 Id850 aou User s Manua
289. est value If this option is omitted the default specification 0x0000 is used mc PM This option checks whether or not the files that use the mask register function are mixed with files that do not use this function when linking the object files created from the C language source files Link processing is stopped if they are found to be mixed rc PM This option outputs detailed information when use of register mode is mixed for all input object files If this option is specified with the w option this option is ignored If this option is omitted detailed information does not output rescan PM This option re references the library file specified by the I option When this option is specified symbols left unresolved because of the link sequence of the library can be prevented 166 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER rom_less PM This option suppresses checking of the internal ROM area When the application allocation overlaps the addresses of the internal ROM area a warning message is not output This option should be specified when the application has been created in ROM less mode Caution Checking of the overflow of the internal ROM is not supported when the single chip mode is selected Invalidate checking of the overflow of the internal ROM and check the overflow on the link map s PM This option creates an object file in which the debug information line number information and globa
290. et CTBP must be set when compiler option Ot or Xpro_epi_runtime off is not specified The CallTBasePointer CTBP was not set Set CTBP when the option setting of the prologue epilogue runtime library is not used Xpro_epi_runtime off or when level 2 advanced optimization execution speed priority Ot is not specified Note on calling prologue epilogue runtime library The prologue epilogue runtime library is included in the standard library This error also occurs if link specification Ic of the standard library is not made Check the link specification of the library User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 459 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4415 S JIS code numberl number2 is broken in string S JIS code specified for string is illegal F4451 multiple defined symbol symbol defined file previous defiend file symbol filel file2 Symbol symbol specified in file has been already defined in file2 F4452 undefined symbol symbol referenced in file The symbol symbol referenced in file file is not defined Caution 1 If this error occurs in the runtime library even when the link specification of the runtime library is made check the sequence of the link specification of the library The option I must be specified after the archiver file to be specified only for external reference that has not been resolved when this option is specified When this option rescan is specified symbols left unresolved because of the link sequ
291. ether or not to output some items specified with the v option as character strings Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the v option 6 Any Option This specifies options that cannot be set in the dump850 command options described before Describe it into this edit box displays in the same format as described in the command line In addition since all dump850 command related options can be specified in this dialog box it is not necessary to use any other options 7 Command Line Option Options specified in the dialog box are displayed Since this area is for reference purposes it cannot be written to 300 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND Buttons a Edit Output Sction n button This opens the Edit Option dialog box for editing the output section specified with the n option b Edit Line Number Function z button This opens the Edit Option dialog box for editing functions that output line number information specified with the n option c Output Index button This opens the Output Index dialog box for performing settings related to the output index d Archive File Options button This opens the Archive File Options dialog box for performing settings for archive files User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 301 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 4 2 Output Index dialog box A dialog box for performing settings related to the output index Sp
292. f Options 33 3 5 1 Version help display operation status 34 3 5 2 Output file specification 35 3 5 3 Controlling source debugger 37 3 5 4 Control of compile driver 38 3 5 5 Optimization 44 3 5 6 Generation code control 49 3 5 7 Library specification 59 3 5 8 Warning message control 60 3 5 9 Other 62 3 5 10 Option to each module 64 3 6 Settings Made via PM 68 3 6 1 Compiler Common Options dialog box 69 File 70 Startup 72 Link Directive 73 ROM 74 Flash 75 Device 76 ROM library 78 Flash library 79 3 6 2 Compiler Options dialog box 80 General 81 Input File 84 Preprocessor 86 C Language 88 Optimization and Debug Information 90 Detail of Optimization 92 External Register 96 Output File 98 Output Code 100 Message 105 Assembler 107 Others 109 Difference 111 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 3 6 3 Edit Option dialog box 113 3 7 Cautions 115 3 7 1 Specifying multiple options 115 3 7 2 Command file 116 3 7 3 Efficient use of optimization 117 3 7 4 Effects of optimization on debugging 122 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 124 4 1 Flow of Operation 124 4 2 Input Output Files 125 4 3 Operation Method 126 4 3 1 Command input method 126 4 3 2 Method using PM 126 4 4 Types and Features of Options 127 4 4
293. f a member name has not been specified this option extracts all of the members existing in the specified archive file and creates files having the same names The contents of the archive file are not changed User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 267 CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER 8 3 2 Types and features of options Options can be omitted 1 Option list c PM This option does not output any messages Vv PM This option outputs this archiver s execution status using the format al d q m r x file a file Add d file Delete q file Create new m file Move r file Replace x file Extract cfile PM This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 2 Error output specification options err file file This option adds and saves error messages to the file file err file file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the file file 268 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER 8 4 Settings Made via PM This section describes each dialog for setting ar850 command options
294. f ca850 or as850 has been activated with the A option specified on the command line Output window if Output GP Information A is specified with PM The Gnum option allocates data of less than num bytes to the sdata or sbss section The ca850 and as850 output codes in compliance with the following rule for the data allocated to the sdata sbss data and bss areas The ca850 or as850 first tries to allocate the data to the sdata section or sbss section which are areas that can be accessed with a single instruction from the gp register data with an initial value is allocated to the sdata section and data without an initial value is allocated to the sbss section Because these areas are accessed by a code that uses gp and a 16 bit displacement for access data can be allocated only in a range of 32 KB from gp If the data does not fit in these areas the ca850 or as850 tries to allocate the data to the data section or bss section which are areas that can be accessed with two instructions from the gp register data with an initial value is allocated to the data section and data without an initial value is allocated to the bss section In these areas the address of the access area is first generated and a code using gp and a 32 bit displacement for access is generated Consequently the entire 4 GB space can be accessed Figure 5 20 Memory Allocation Image of gp Offset Reference Section Upper address bss attribute section Bone
295. f operator operator must be the same type7 type2 W2554 cannot convert non Lvalue array to pointer An array that is not at the left side cannot be converted into a pointer This warning message is error message E2553 when the ansi option is specified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 437 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W2555 expression expression must have enumeration type expression must be of enum type W2600 ignored option option Option option is ignored W2601 category is not supported now The feature indicated by category is not supported at present W2606 Wide character is not supported Wide characters are not supported and are ignored W2607 Multibyte character is not supported Multi byte characters are not supported and are ignored W2609 Specified warning message number num is not supported Warning message number W2000 W2999 is supported now The specified warning message number num is not supported The supported warning message numbers are 2000 to 2999 W2621 duplicated cpu type command line option is used A target device is specified in duplicate The target device specified at project file setup or by the cpu option is valid W2634 Interrupt attribute is specified for function function previously specified block interrupt is ignored Function function that is interrupt inhibited is specified as an interrupt handler Because the interrupt handler is interrupt inhibite
296. f the file in which an error has occurred is displayed because reading the specified file has failed Check that the specified file has not been damaged F106 The specified folder does not exist and is not created Do you want to create it The specified folder does not exist F107 The specified folder was not found Check that the correct folder name has been specified The specified folder was not found Check the folder name and specify the correct folder name F108 Creating the specified folder has failed Check that the correct folder name has been specified Creating the specified folder has failed Check the specified folder and specify the correct folder F109 The specified file could not be opened Select an application to open the file using Explorer An attempt was made to display the analysis result but executing the program failed because the program was not associated Associate the program using Explorer F110 The specified file is a ReadOnly file Save the data to another file The project file specified when it was saved has a ReadOnly attribute Save the data to another file or clear the ReadOnly attribute and then save it to that file F120 A file to be analyzed is not specified A file to be analyzed is not specified Specify a file F121 An output file is not specified Specify the format and name of the file to be output by using Detailed Option Setting The type and name of the file to whic
297. fied label does not exist in the object file a message is output and processing is stopped If this option is omitted itis assumed that ___ S_ romp has been specified 2 Delete text Attribute Section d This option creates an object file that contains only the rompsec section and does not include any sections with the text attribute 3 Ignore Address Duplication i This option prevents checking for duplicate addresses among input files and output files 4 Output Memory Map m This option outputs a memory map of the object file created by the romp850 to the PM s output window The memory map is included in the log files project name plg automatically generated in the project folder User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 235 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 5 Ignore Internal ROM Check rom_less When this option is selected the rompsec section is not checked for allocation errors of the internal ROM area It is recommended to specify this option in the ROMless mode This option does not support checking of overflow of the internal ROM in the single chip mode Specify this option to invalidate overflow check of the internal ROM and check the overflow with the dump850 If this option is not specified the rompsec section is checked for allocation errors of the internal ROM area 6 Warn Internal Memory Overflow Ximem_overflow warning This option sets a message warning of the overflow of the internal memory If it is
298. fies allocating all variables to a section that has the tidata attribute If a section file is to be revised and used this must be done using the following method and not checking Use This 1 2 First create a frequency information file Select Compiler Options dialog box from the menu and then select the Output File tab and check the Frequency Information File Xcre_sec_data If a file name is specified in the combo box the name of a file to which frequency information is to be output can be specified A frequency information file must be created for each C language source file If as in the example shown above the frequency information file specification applies to all C language source files i e is not specified for a particular source file the frequency information in the funct sec file will be overwritten each time a C language source file is compiled In other words the final func1 sec file will contain only the information for the C language source file that was compiled last If no frequency information file name is specified the output frequency information file s file name becomes the C language source file s file name with the suffix sec and this enables a separate frequency information file to be created for each C language source file This means that when creating all of the frequency information files it is better not to specify a file name unless you wish to specify particular file names as optio
299. file If member is omitted processing is stopped rb member This option exchanges the specified file with the member having the same name in the specified archive file and then moves the specified file to the position immediately before the member member If the member with the same name as the specified file does not exist in the specified archive file the specified file is added to the end of the specified archive file If member is omitted processing is stopped 266 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER ru PM If the specified file has been updated more recently than the member having the same name in the specified archive file this option replaces the member with the specified file If the member with the same name as the specified file does not exist in the specified archive file the specified file is added to the end of the specified archive file If the specified archive file does not exist a new archive file is created and it contains the specified file If a member name has been specified this option outputs only the member name of the member existing in the specified archive file If a member name has not been specified this option outputs via standard output the member names of all members existing in the specified archive file If a member name has been specified and if the specified member exists in the specified archive file this option extracts that member and creates a file having the same name I
300. file filel Output section section overflowed In addition the section where a local symbol was allocated and the label referencing method are illegal The local symbol is allocated to section by file file7 The illegal reference exists at offset offset for section section2 of file file2 W4702 no archive symbol table ignored this archive file An archive symbol table does not exist in the specified archive file Specification of this archive file is ignored W4755 aligned odd value number1 to be even value number2 Odd value number is aligned to even value number2 W4757 segment segment overflowed highest address of target machine The area to which segment segment is specified to be allocated exceeds the target machine s internal memory range Supplement This message is changed to an error message by clearing Ximem_overflow warning option This message can be erased by specifying the rom_less option only if the cause of the warning is related to the internal ROM 464 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W4769 string in segment directive is illegal when r option specified ignored string must not be specified in the segment directive and is ignored if the r or ro option is specified W4770 string in section directive is illegal when r option specified ignored string must not be specified in the section directive and is ignored if the r or ro option is specified W4772 no LOAD seg
301. file to the current folder under the specified file name The extension of outfile is restricted to ic b Ifthe folder is specified as outfile Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c replaced by ic to the specified folder c If outfile is omitted Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c replaced by ic to the current folder d If two or more files are output Creates a folder specified for outfile and saves the OPTIC file under a file name with extension c replaced by ic Fo out file This option specifies where an object file generated in the middle of compiling is to be saved a Ifthe file name is specified as outfile Saves the ouffile to the current folder under the specified file name b Ifthe folder is specified as outfile Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c or s replaced by o to the specified folder c If outfile is omitted Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c or s replaced by o to the current folder d If two or more files are output Creates a folder specified as outfile and saves the object file under a file name with extension c or s replaced by o Fs outfile PM This option specifies where an assembly language file generated in the middle of compiling is to be saved a Ifthe file name is specified as outfile Saves the ouffile to the current folder under the specified file name b Ifthe folder is specified as outfile Saves
302. following sequence 1 Output folder on this tab 2 Analyze folder on this tab 3 Path of Analyze file on the RAM map tab 4 Install folder 6 Generate all analyzing files 338 If this is checked the defaults of the options are set It is checked in the default condition User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 7 Detail options Clicking this button opens the Cross reference Option dialog box where the option of each function can be set 8 Other options Options can be directly described in the edit box This box is blank in the default condition 9 Command Line Options A list of options is displayed cxref all is displayed in the default condition Clicking the Run button starts analysis of the analyze file with the set option contents The analysis command in install folder is started If no analyze file is specified a message box that indicates no analyze file is specified is opened Depending on the result of analysis a message box that indicates normal or abnormal termination is opened The output message of the analysis command is output to file cxref log in the folder at the analysis result output destination or that in the folder of the analysis folder User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 339 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 5 2 Cross reference Option dialog box This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Detail options button on the Cross reference tab in the
303. follows Figure 6 7 Example of rompack s file rompack s section rompack text align4 globl__rompack 4 __rompack 2 A copy function is called within the application The copy function should be activated early on such as within the startup routine or at the start of the main function _rcopy _rcopy1 _rcopy2 and _rcopy4 are available as copy functions and each of these has a different transfer size the transfer size of _rcopy and _rcopy1 is the same For details of the copy functions refer to 6 5 Copy Functions An example of using a copy function is shown in the figure below In this example the _rcopy function is activated at the start of the main function Figure 6 8 Example of Using Copy Function _rcopy 2 define ALL COPY 1 int _rcopy unsigned long long extern unsigned long _rompack void main void intret ret rcopy amp rompack ALL COPY User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 215 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 3 Define the created rompack section in a link directive At the same time you can specify the rompack section s allocation site as any address For example to specify ROMPACK as the segment containing the rompack section and to allocate that segment to start at address 0x3000 enter the following link directive Figure 6 9 Link Directive Specification Example TEXT LOAD RX V0Ox1000 text SPROGBITS AX text a ROMPACK
304. for the header file of an assembly language file If this option is omitted only the standard folder is searched User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 41 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Xcxxcom PM In addition to ordinary comments this interprets all characters that appear after and before the end of the line as comments C comment style Xd This option outputs a warning message in response to initialization of a pointer type external variable which uses a variable address that is not an automatic variable or which uses a function address Xmnum PM This option specifies an upper limit for the number of macro identifiers A decimal value up to 32767 can be specified as num A default value of 2047 is used if this option is omitted This option increases the size of the buffer used by the preprocessor However this option cannot be used to set a specific value for buffer size in terms of the number of characters the buffer can contain t PM This option replaces a trigraph sequence This option specifies a three character trigraph string to be replaced by a single character defined by the ANSI standard For details refer to the documents related to the ANSI standard 5 Options to save memory during compilation Wp D PM This option reduces memory in pre optimizer phase during compiling Specify this option if compiling is not completed correctly because the memory of the machine runs short The compilation speed
305. for the target project s C language source files The Compiler Common Options dialog box is used to set the command options commonly used by compilers It is opened by the following method 1 Select Tool Compiler Common Options The Compiler Options dialog box is used to set the ca850 command options for the target project s C source files After setting the project via the Project menu use either of the following methods to open this dialog box Set for all C language source files of the target project 1 Select Tool Compiler Options Set for a specific C language source file 1 Select the name of the source file to be set a option in the Project window on the PM 2 Select Individual Compiler Options item that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button When a specific setting has been performed the general option settings become invalid for that file For a file for which specific options have been set the icon at the head of the file name of the source file in the Project window changes to green To make specific option settings invalid and have general option settings take effect click the Individual Compiler Option Release item that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button or click the Delete Source Option button added to the General Others and Difference tabs in the Compiler Options dialog box The option name displayed in in each option in the option settings dia
306. formation is checked the analysis result of the tag information is output in the text format This is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in the text format by using the File name edit box The default file name is ctags The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only if Output tag information is selected If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab Output cross reference list remains on Button a Set default option button This button returns the current setting of the dialog box to the default status If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab Output tag information remains on User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 345 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Call graph This tab is used to the call graph Figure 12 6 Cross reference option Dialog Box Call graph Tab Cross reference option Common option Cross reference list Tag information Call graph Function measure Call database Output format Iv File name Default v t File name ccaltre csv Default Output function specification method Qutput all Specified functions Top functions ict at File name Function names Output level 255 Omission method Display arguments return values No omission S e i
307. fter the ca850 to Id850 have been activated and an executable module has been generated An image of the map is shown below User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 213 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR Figure 6 6 ROMization Image 1 Executable object output by the Id850 Peripheral I O Executable object output by the romp850 Peripheral I O sidata section tidata section sedata section sdata section data section sidata section romp850 rompsec section Copied information __S_romp piegi __S_romp text section text section const section const section sconst section sconst section Interrupt Int t 0x0 nterrup 0x0 hx850 Hex file ROM writer Target system 214 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 4 2 Creating procedure customize This section describes the method for independently creating the rompcrt o program corresponding to the ROMization area reservation code and determining the desired rompcrt section start address and allocation position 1 Enter code corresponding to the default rompcrt s ROMization area reservation code Let us assume the specified file name is rompack s and the name of the symbol specifying the start of the ROMization area is __ rompack Also the section containing this symbol is the rompack section In this case the code in rompack s appears as
308. g aliases 322 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL This chapter presents an overview of the cross reference tool CXREF and describes its operation and output file format 12 1 Cross Reference Tool The cross reference tool CXREF is a tool that checks identifier references and definition locations based on the C language source file The target identifiers which are functions and variables other than auto variables also identify their storage class Cross reference information and tag jump information are output as the detection results The analysis is performed for individual functions and a call tree function metrics and call database can also be output In cross reference tool processing a reference means that the identifier appears within an expression and a definition means that the identifier appears within a declaration statement The cross reference tool handles an identifier for which it cannot determine whether it appears in an expression or a declaration statement as unknown Call trees function metrics or call databases that are output by the cross reference tool have the following features They do not depend on the target and the ca850 optimization Standard output can be used by specifying an option Figure 12 1 Flow of Operation in cxref ca850 _ gt i C language source file cxref Pa ka User s Manual U18512EJ1
309. g continues If this option is omitted an error message is output and linking is stopped if an overflow occurs User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 165 CHAPTER 5 LINKER e symbol PM This is the entry point address value for the object file from which the symbol value symbol is created If the specified symbol cannot be found the linker outputs a message and link processing is stopped When this option is not specified the entry point address value is determined according to the following rules 1 Ifthe symbol __ start exists it is used 2 Ifthe symbol __ start does not exist the start address of the text attribute section that is allocated to the lowest address area in the created object file is used 3 Ifthe text attribute section does not exist 0 is used The symbol name space cannot be left blank f num PM This option specifies the fill value for align holes between sections of the created object with four digit hexadecimal numbers 2 bytes When using this option specify B option to execute linking in the 2 pass mode Ox at the beginning can be omitted Specification by this option takes precedence over the fill value specification in the link directive If the value does not occupy all four digits it is assumed that zeros are used to fill the empty digit s Ifa hole does not cover two bytes only the required number of digits are fetched and initialized from the specified fill value starting from the low
310. ge the setting in instruction units explicitly describe jarl22 jarl32 or jr22 jr32 Also the jmp instruction is not affected by this option 130 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 4 3 Device This specifies options related to the device of the as850 for the assembly language source file X256M PM This option handles the memory space as a 256 M bytes space If this option is not specified the memory space is handled as a 64 M bytes space and addresses are resolved Set this option in accordance with the chipset to be used The physical address space of the V850Ex core has 256 M bytes in many cases When creating an application that uses a space between 64 M bytes and 256 M bytes specify this option bpc num PM This option sets the higher address of the programmable peripheral I O register In num specify only the part of address from which the highest bit of the BPC register is removed If the target device has programmable peripheral I O register functions such as V850E IA1 the value must be determined when compiling assembling the application to set the variable address portion value set in BPC register Thus specifying this option compiles assembles using the specified value When specifying this option be sure to specify a value A binary octal decimal or hexadecimal number can be used for the value If an invalid value is specified or if a value outside the range that can be set in the
311. gnored and the g option is valid This option is also ignored when it is specified together with the p option to avoid CPU bugs when a V850 core target device is specified or when a V850 core common object is created and the p option is valid If this option is specified together with the p option when a V850Ex core V850E2 core target device is specified or when a V850Ex core V850E2 core common object is created both this option and the p option are valid 9 Verbose Mode v This option displays the detailed execution status of the as850 on the Output window 10 Suppress Warning w This option specifies whether the warning message specified by the w option is suppressed or not If this check box is checked the effect is the same as specifying the w option 11 Warn Zero Register r0 wr0 This option specifies whether a warning message is suppressed or not when the rO register specified by the wr0 option is used as a destination register If this check box is checked the effect is the same as specifying the wr0 option When it is dimmed the effect is the same as specifying the wr0 option 12 Warn Reserved Register r1 wr1 This option specifies whether a warning message is suppressed when the r1 register specified by the wr1 option is used If this check box is checked the effect is the same as specifying the wr1 option When it is dimmed the effect is the same as specifying the wr1 option 13 Use
312. gp tp ep and Ip If this option is omitted all registers are displayed in rnum format in which num is a value from 0 to 31 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 315 CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER s address This option specifies a start address The address is specified as a decimal number or as a hexadecimal number starting with Ox If this option is omitted it is assumed that 0x0 has been specified t This option displays a title indicating the displayed contents This option displays comments etc cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 316 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER 11 4 Settings Made via PM This section describes dialog boxe that is used to set the command options of the dis850 for the target project s source file 11 4 1 Object Analysis Tool dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following three tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 11 1 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box dis850
313. h the analysis result is to be output are not specified Set an output file by using Detailed Option Setting F122 xxxx is illegal Input a value up to yyyy The specified value is outside the range Or a symbol was input xxxx indicates the name of the edit box on which the illegal value is set and yyyy indicates the range of values that can be input Input a correct value F123 The start address is illegal Input a value in a range of 0 to Oxffffffff The specified start address is incorrect Input a correct value F124 The end address is illegal Input a value in a range of 0 to Oxffffffff The specified end address is incorrect Input a correct value F125 The address range is invalid The specified address range is incorrect Input a correct value User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 491 492 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F126 Analysis result has failed Do you want to open the log file Analysis has failed Open the log file to identify the cause of the error take corrective action and then execute analysis again F128 Specify the name of a file to read the function name Analysis has failed No file to read the function name is specified Specify a file F129 Specify an output file name No output file name is specified Specify a file F130 The output range is not set The entire output range will be set OK An output range of the RAM map is not specified Set an output range of RAM map or select output of the
314. haracter string Symbol table Display the contents of the symbol table SYMBOL TABLE INFORMATION 9 No Value Size Bind Type Other Shndx Name 0x0 0x0 0 3 0 0x1 text a b c d e f 9 h a Index b Value c Size d Binding class e Type f Other g Section header table index h Symbol name Relocation information Display the contents of the relocation information array of relocation entries SYMBOL TABLE INFORMATION Offset Sym Type Addend 0x20 6 0x23 0x0 a b c d a Offset b Symbol table index c Relocation type d Added constant User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 307 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 Register mode information Display the contents of the register mode information REGISTER MODE INFORMATION SymIdx 0x1 a TmpReg 0x5 b ParReg 0x5 c a b c Symbol table index Number of working registers Number of registers for register variables 11 Global pointer table Display the contents of the global pointer table GPTAB INFORMATION Gnum Gsize 0x4 a Oxc b Size of num data of Gnum a b Size when aligned by 0 word 12 Line number information Display the contents of the line number information LINE NUMBER INFORMATION Bfunc Maddr Daddr Pad Function Name Num Snum Offset Flags 0x0 OxA2 OxE28 0x0
315. have been lost W5009 sorry not implemented option option ignored Option option is not supported at present and is ignored W5501 The section of variable symbol was changed from old to new The section of variable symbol has been changed from old to new W5502 The size of variable symbol was changed from old to new The size of variable symbol has been changed from ola to new 440 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W5503 The alignment of variable symbol was changed from old to new The alignment of variable symbol has been changed from old to new W5504 The initial value of variable symbol was changed The default value of variable symbol has been changed W6101 immediate for shift operator is out of range The value of the immediate value specified for the shift directive exceeds the specifiable range It is assumed that only the lower valid digits have been specified and processing continues W6102 first argument of _rcopy is illegal The first argument of copy routine _rcopy is illegal W7101 sorry not implemented option option ignored Option option is not supported at present and is ignored W7102 redeclaration of symbol symbol is redeclared W7103 Symbol symbol has different size num1 and num2 Different sizes num1 and num2 of data symbol symbol have been merged W7104 Symbol symbol has different alignment
316. he input file cannot be handled by the Id850 F4033 illegal target machine class The class of the input file cannot be handled by the Id850 F4034 illegal target machine byte order The byte order of the input file is not a byte order that can be handled by the Id850 F4035 illegal ELF file type must be relocatable or shared library file The relocatable object file and shared library file are the only types of object file that can be treated as an input file 452 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4036 unknown format type file file The specified file file has an illegal file format F4037 illegal devicefile different family number The device file is incorrect Microcontrollers number is incorrect F4038 file is not executable file The boot file file specified by the zf option is not in an executable format Specify an executable file output by the Id850 F4039 file is rom packed file The boot file file specified by the zf option is ROMized Specify an executable file output by the Id850 that is not ROMized F4051 fail to get symbol name string Retrieval of a symbol name character string has failed F4052 failed to get number th symbol name string Retrieval of the numberth symbol name character string has failed F4053 symbol symbol has unknown binding class number The symbol symbol has an illegal binding class number F4054 weak symbol symbol not supported
317. he normal format by using the File name edit box The default file name is cmeasure st The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when Normal format is selected If CSV format is checked the analysis result of the leaf list is output in the CSV format It is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in the CSV format by using the File name edit box The default file name is cmeasure csv The default file name can also be specified by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when CSV format is selected If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab however Normal format and CSV format remain on User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 349 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 Sort method Specify a method of sorting the analysis result In the default condition the result is not sorted in appearance order If No sort is selected the Sort direction setting box cannot be selected 3 Sort direction Specify the direction in which the analysis result is to be sorted If No sort is selected the Sort direction setting box cannot be selected Ascend The analysis results are sorted in ascending order Descend The analysis results are sorted in descending order default Button
318. he specification is ignored For example to set security code 0x112233445566778899aa setting 0x11 to address 0x70 0x22 to address 0x71 0x33 to address 0x72 0x44 to address 0x73 0x55 to address 0x74 0x77 to address 0x76 0x88 to address 0x77 0x99 to address 0x78 and Oxaa to address 0x79 describe as follows Xsid 0x112233445566778899aa Xob none This option suppresses the option byte that is generated by default Only the default generation by the initial value registered in the device file is suppressed When specified by using section OPTION_BYTES in the assembler source file the section OPTION_BYTES specification will be given priority regardless of this option s specification Also when this option is specified for devices that do not include option byte functionality this option is ignored without outputting a message 164 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 3 6 Option This sets the Id850 options A PM This option outputs as a standard output the information that can be used as a guide for the sdata sbss Allocation option num setting of Gnum option which is specified for the ca850 and as850 when compiling or assembling source file When using the value indicated by OK data with a size less than that value is allocated to the sdata sbss area When activating from the ca850 the A option used in the ca850 activation is passed For details refer to 5 7 1 Using A op
319. hen an object file which can be linked is created F4364 duplicated cpu type A target device has been specified two or more times Different target devices are specified in the object files to be linked F4369 stringi is illegal when string2 option is specified string1 cannot be specified when option string2 has been specified F4370 stringl option needs string2 option The string2 option is needed by the string7 option F4374 string option s value overflowed The value specified for the string option has overflowed F4404 symbol table overflow The symbol table area is insufficient F4409 sorry shared library not supported A shared library is not supported F4411 multiple inclusion of same file attempted ignored The same file is specified more than once as an input file Caution If the boot object file name specified by zf is the same as the input file name of the linker when a flash supporting object of the linker is created this error occurs In this case change either of the file names F4412 command line length is too long path maximum size is 512 Too many characters are specified on the command line The maximum number of characters that can be specified is 512 bytes F4413 file has different ext_ent_size ext_ent_size different from the others is specified for input file file Make specification of ext_ent_size in input files the same F4414 CallTBasePointer CTBP is not s
320. ics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products No license express implied or otherwise is granted under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples The incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of a customer s equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software and information While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely To minimize risks of damage to property or injury including death to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design such as redundancy fire containment and anti failure features NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality gr
321. ics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics 2rCENESAS User s Manual CA850 Ver 3 20 C Compiler Package Operation Target Device V850 Series Document No U18512EJ1VOUMOO 1st edition Date Published May 2007 CP K NEC Electronics Corporation 2007 Printed in Japan MEMO 2 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 3 The information in this document is current as of May 2007 The information is subject to change without notice For actual design in refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc for the most up to date specifications of NEC Electronics products Not all products and or types are available in every country Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document NEC Electron
322. ient F5106 exception exception has occurred at compile time An exception exception related to floating point operations occurred at compile time F5601 cannot allocate register to symbol The value symbol cannot be allocated to the register F5901 cannot open file file File file cannot be opened F5902 cannot write file file errno num Error having error number num occurred during write to file file F6000 cannot open file file File file cannot be opened F6002 cannot unlink file file File file cannot be deleted User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 431 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F6003 wreg num is out of range numi lt num lt num2 The value of num specified for the wreg option is outside of the specifiable range Specify a value that is greater than num7 and less than num2 F6004 rreg num is out of range numi lt num lt num2 The value of num specified for the rreg option is outside of the specifiable range Specify a value that is greater than num7 and less than num2 F6005 cannot write file file errno num Error having error number num occurred during write to file file F6203 out of memory Memory capacity is insufficient F6500 unknown option option An illegal option option is specified F6510 too many files Too many file names are specified F6520 out of memory The memory capacity is insufficient F6530 cannot open file fil
323. ified Od Og Default Ob specified Machine dependent optimization module i Assembler Om not specified Om specified NO Input file processing User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 2 Input Output Files The ca850 can specify the following files as input files or output files file c C language source file called the c file file ic OPTIC file called the ic file file s assembly language source file called the s file file o object file called the o file file a archive file called the a file The s file is passed to the as850 assembler without modification a source program directly coded in assembly language does not go through the machine dependent optimization module All the files other than c ic and s files such as a and o files are all passed as is to the Id850 Caution The input file names supported by Windows can be specified but cannot be used at the head of a file name because it is regarded as acommand option If the Kanji code of the file is EUC a file name folder name or folder name in Japanese cannot be used User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 29 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 3 Executable Object The ca850 can read a C language source file and create an executable object file at the same time since it starts both the as850 and the Id850 In addition processing can be stopped before the as850 and the Id850 ar
324. ified the branch table is generated using 2 bytes 14 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 104 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM Message CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to set options related to messages Compiler Options Warning Level Figure 3 21 Compiler Options Dialog Box Message Tab General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others Individual Warnings W2042 illegal argument for _rcopy W2107 Non empty file is expected to end in new Verbose Mode v W2127 redefined macro name name Limit of Number of Error err_limit W2132 macro recursion name Macro is expanc W2150 unexpected character s following directi W2161 unexpected non whitespace before prep W2162 unrecognized pragma directive Hpragme W2163 Digit sequence after Hline is interpreted W2166 recognized pragma directive pragma d W2172 constant out of range W2176 hexadecimal digit out of range W2180 cannot convert code typel code into co W2212 Declaration of name hides parameter W2215 Undeclared function function is called v Help of Individual Warning j gt Command Line Option e 3107 g 1 Warning Level Cancel Apply Help U
325. ile input section section3 offset offset type relocation type The branch instruction from output section section2 to the symbol symbol allocated to output section section exceeds the branch destination range The branch instruction exists at offset position offset for section section3 in file file W4662 output section sectioni is too far from output section section2 value value file file input section section3 offset offset type relocation type The branch instruction from output section section2 to the local symbol allocated to output section section1 exceeds the branch destination range The branch instruction exists at offset position offset for section sections in file file W4663 output section sectioni overflowed or illegal label reference for symbol symbol in file file2 value value input section section2 offset offset type relocation type symbol is allocated in section section1 file filel Output section section overflowed In addition the section where symbol symbol was allocated and the label referencing method are illegal symbol is allocated to section7 by file file1 The illegal reference exists at offset offset for section section2 of file file2 W4664 output section sectioni overflowed or illegal label reference for local symbol in file file2 value value input section section2 offset offset type relocation type local symbol is allocated in section sectioni
326. ile is omitted rammap txt and rammap csv are assumed for the file names mc file This option outputs a memory map table to the specified file in CSV format If file is omitted rammap csv is assumed for the file name mrrange This option specifies the range for outputting the memory map table Specification method The output range for the memory map table can be specified by using the following three methods 1 Specify the starting address and ending address rammap a out mr0x10000 0x20000 2 Specify only the starting address In this case the ending address will be Oxffffffff rammap a out mr0x10000 3 Specify only the ending address In this case the starting address will be 0x0 rammap a out mr 0x20000 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 369 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL Do not insert a space between mr and the range Octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers can be specified for the addresses Octal specification format mr0200000 0400000 Decimal specification format mr65536 131072 Hexadecimal specification format mr0x10000 0x20000 Multiple range specification Multiple ranges can be specified To specify multiple ranges either specify multiple mr options or separate each of the ranges with commas 1 Method of specifying multiple mr options rammap a out mr0x10000 0x20000 mr0x30000 0x40000 2 Method of
327. ile Related Upper Limit Values Item Limit Length of file name 255 Number of characters per line 5119 Number of lines per file 32767 5 Stack size related limit The limits related to stack sizes are listed below Table 14 7 Stack Size Related Limit Item Limit Number of parameters 1 1024 Value of additional margin 0 2147483647 Value of recursion depth 0 2147483647 after multiplication with the stack size Value of stack size 2147483647 6 Message display area The upper limit values in the message display area are listed below Table 14 8 Upper Limit Values in Message Display Area Item Limit Number of characters per line 5119 Number of lines 32767 398 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 14 6 Output File Formats This section describes the formats of the following output files Output result files Stack size specification file stk system file 14 6 1 Output result files There are two choices of output level either all the call chains or the chain with maximum stack Inthe Main window select File Save All Call Chains from Selected Function to output the stack size information of all the call chain starting with the selected function Inthe Main window select File Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected Function to out put the stack size information of only the call chain f
328. ile can be setup by Set Option button Cancel Help 1 Startup File This edit box is used to set a startup file Set an assembly language source file or object file in this edit box If a startup file is not set the default startup file crtN o or crtE o is used An assembly language source file can be edited by using the Edit by Text Editor button Note that a space can be used in a folder name in this dialog box but a space cannot be used in a file name 2 Use Individual Option If this check box is checked the individual assembler options of a startup file are used The assembler options of the startup file can be set by using the Set Options button 72 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Link Directive This tab is used to make settings related to link directives Figure 3 5 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Link Directive Tab Compiler Common Options File Startup Link Directive ROM Flash Device Link Directive File i Browse Edit by Text Editor Compatibility of Link Directive Default oe This edit box can be specified a link directive file When it isn t specified The default link directive is used When it is specified D option of the linker is set OK Cancel Help a 1 Link Directive File This edit box is used to set a link directive file When a link directive file is set the D option is passed to the linker The link directive file can
329. ile occupies a contiguous area in the object file 4 Sections do not share an area in the object file In other words there is no area that belongs to more than one section A 5 1 Symbol table The following describes the symbol table a type of section The symbol table a section of section type SYMTAB is an array of symbol table entries containing information about all of the symbols included in the object file refer to Table A 6 An index i e a subscript to this array is called a symbol table index and the symbol table entries are referenced using this symbol table indexNote Note An entry with symbol table index 0 is reserved and each constituent element s value is 0 Table A 6 Constituent Elements of Symbol Table Entries and Their Meanings Constituent Meanin Element 9 name Name of corresponding symbol index to string table strtab value Value of corresponding symbol size Size of corresponding symbol BIND info Binding class of corresponding symbol binding class is GLOBAL for a symbol used to resolve an external reference or LOCAL for a symbol not used to resolve an external reference TYPE info Type of corresponding symbol type is FILE for a normal file name FUNC for a function name NOTYPE for an undefined symbol OBJECT for a symbol indicating a normal label SECTION for a section name or DEVFILE for a device file name other shndx Section header table index of sectio
330. imization functions reduce the size and improve the execution speed at the same time Whether emphasis is given to the size or execution speed is determined depending on whether some functions are used or not User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 121 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 7 4 Effects of optimization on debugging Note with caution that optimization can have the following kinds of effects when using the source debugger 1 2 3 4 5 As a result of deformation of an expression by optimization propagation of copy and recognition of common part expression variable reference does not take place where the read write event of a variable appears in the source program and the event may not occur as expected by the user When a statement has been made common deleted or rearranged step execution or breakpoints may not be set as intended by the user The live range of a variable range in which the variable can be referenced in the program and position of a variable position on a register or memory may be changed Breakpoints cannot be set for statements that have been deleted Transfer splitting or merging of statements may have rearranged the sequence of executable Note instructions so that lines between the lines which have been rearranged may be handled as a single line for which break points and step execution can no longer be set Note The address of an executable instruction within a line of source
331. ing If this option is omitted and if an unresolved external reference remains the following message is output and linking is stopped In this case an object file load module file is not generated F4452 undefined symbol symbol referenced in file If an object file created by the Id850 will be specified as the target for relinking by the Id850 specify this option when creating the target object file for relinking Cautions If this option has been specified the link directive is valid only for the type and attribute in the mapping directive section and is otherwise ignored If this option has been specified the Id850 does not create any reserved symbols The specification of the r option has changed from CA850 Ver 2 30 or earlier When using the mapping method of an old version use r instead of the ro option ro This option creates a relocatable object file in the old mapping mode CA850 Ver 2 30 or earlier If this option is specified with the r option the r option is ignored If this option is omitted an executable object file is created regnum This option references a register mode library The 22 register mode 26 register mode or 32 register mode can be specified for num Do not enter any blank spaces after reg If this option is omitted the 32 register mode library is referenced cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file
332. ing during execution the program correctly runs if the set values of the TP and GP registers are changed PIC is a code that is not dependent upon an allocated address To assign an address to an external pointer variable as a default value an address for linking is assigned If an address is changed during execution therefore the program does not run correctly This means that the code is not a PIC and User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 435 APPENDIX B MESSAGE therefore this warning message is output If an r0 relative code such as a CONST segment is used however the code is not a PIC because the address is an absolute address relative from address 0 W2244 asm used out of function is not supported completely Use of assembler description asm described outside the function and the assembler description between pragma asm and pragma endasm is limited refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual W2267 illegal use of specifier Storage area class specifier specifier is not used correctly W2287 Function requires return value No return value is specified for a function having a return value It is assumed that 0 is specified as the return value W2289 return type mismatch typel type2 Type type2 of the return value indicated by the return statement does not agree with the return type type7 of the function W2291 argument type mismatch typel type2 Type type2 of an actual argument does not ag
333. ing format section size total_freq Byte _frec Word _frec User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 275 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR The displayed variables and their meanings are listed below Table 9 2 Variable Displays and Their Meanings Display Meaning section Section to which allocation of the variable is explicitly specified If the variable is not explicitly specified is displayed size Size of variable in bytes If the size is unknown 0 is displayed total_freq Frequency of variable references This indicates the number of load store instructions that have appeared for a particular variable Byte_freq For the given variable reference frequency this indicates the number of variable references in byte units Word_frec For the given variable reference frequency this indicates the number of variable references in word units The sf850 outputs a section file in which all variables are allocated to the tidata section Since the tidata section s memory capacity is 256 bytes if the variables exceed that amount they must be revised as determined on the user side However if the O option is specified the file can be input to the ca850 as it is because the variables will be sorted according to use frequency and only the more frequently used variables will be included up to the tidata section s capacity Also when specifying the O option the user can choose to have the outpu
334. ing message and stops linking F4286 section pro epi runtime must be specified in link directive If a link directive file has been specified enter the mapping directive before the text section pro_epi_runtime S PROGBITS AX pro_epi_ runtime text SPROGBITS AX If the pro_epi_runtime section is placed after the text section it will overlap during ROMization under the ROMization processor s default operation for packed sections Placing the pro_epi_runtime section before the text section is recommended If a link directive file has not been specified link before the text section Cautions The prologue and epilogue runtime libraries are included in standard library libc a Unlike ordinary sections the pro_epi_runtime section has a fixed input section name and only the special purpose section is allocated Ifthe pro_epi_runtime section is allocated after the text section it overlaps the allocation position of the default operation of the section that is packed during ROMization Allocate the pro_epi_runtime section before the text section The prologue and epilogue runtime libraries use the callt instruction when a device of the V850Ex core is used Set CTBP in the startup routine 200 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 7 10 Linking for ROMization For ROMization the packing section area must be considered when coding the link directive Refer to CHAPTE
335. ing three tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 13 3 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box rammap Tab Description Dump Setting of options related to dump command Disassembler Setting of options related to disassembler RAM map Setting of options related to RAM map 378 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL RAM map For the RAM map activation dialog box set the project settings in the PM then select the RAM map tab in the dialog opened by selecting Tool Startup Object Analysis Tool Figure 13 4 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box RAM map Tab Object Analysis Tool Dump Disassemble RAM Map 2 Browse Save V 3 Save Open Output Range Execution Log Output All Range P Any Option Command Line Option SS OK Cancel Help 1 File List Object files for building in the project are displayed in the drop down list Paths are not displayed in the list The following files are displayed in the lis This drop down list is usually unavailable Linker output files only for projects in which executable object files are built Open the Save As dialog box with the 1 Save button and save the RAM map of the object file specified in File List By default it is saved as object file name txt in the same folder as the object file spe
336. ion Relocation Information r Section s Any Option Symbol Table t TS Command Line Option Cancel Help 1 File List Object files for building in the project are displayed in the drop down list Paths are not displayed in the list The following files are displayed in the list ROMization processor output files only when ROMization is specified for projects in which executable object files are built Linker output files only for projects in which executable object files are built Archiver output files only for projects that output libraries Compiler output files Assembler output files Open the Save As dialog box with the 1 Save button and save the dump result of the object file specified in File List By default it is saved as object file name dmp in the same folder as the object file specified in File List 298 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND Also with the 2 Browse Save button the dump result can be saved by specifying the object file In this case the Open dialog box is opened so specify the object file By default folders specified in previous Open dialog boxes or project folders are displayed When an object file is specified in the Open dialog box the dump result for the specified object file is saved in the same way as clicking the 1 Save button 2 3 Save Open After saving the dump result with the
337. ion Reset To cancels the all adjustments by the user to the current function Help To open help for the dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 393 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box This dialog box shows lists of functions whose stack size is unknown or changed Figure 14 4 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions System Library Functions 1 Unknown Functions This list shows functions whose stack size is unknown and undetermined Below are the functions whose stack size is unknown Library functions Functions written in assembly language Recursive functions Functions containing an indirect function call using a function pointer When the function is a static function file name function name composed of the file name with no paths and the function name is indicated When the definition file is unknown function name is displayed 2 Adjusted Functions This list shows functions whose stack size call function has been changed A function is displayed in the form of function name stack size frame stack size change information The addition size size and the recursion count count are displayed as the change information If a function without change information is displayed the setting of the call function is changed
338. ion by the cpu option or specification by the pragma directive If both are specified but have different contents the specification by the cpu option has priority devpath dir This option searches a device file from the folder dir Only the standard folders are searched if this option is omitted When using PM the device file s installation folder is automatically set so there is no need to be aware of this option User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 39 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 2 Compiler control specification options S This option outputs the generated assembly language source program without executing any modules under the as850 The output file uses s as the extension instead of c If this option is omitted modules following the as850 are also executed However modules under the as850 are also executed if this option has been specified via PM To avoid executing those modules compile source files one at a time a This option outputs an assemble list to a file whose extension c is changed to v refer to 4 6 Assemble List When the Og O Os or Ot option is specified a part of the assemble list may be incorrectly output due to instruction rearrangement for optimization by the as850 By using this option Fv option with PM a file name on the assemble list can be specified This option outputs the object file without starting the Id850 The file name extension is o instead of c or s The 1d850 is started if
339. ion in file has a section attribute that must not be specified for the t option F8422 address of symbol symbol must be same in all files The address of symbol must be the same in all input files F8423 file not absolute object Relocatable object file file is specified as an input file F8424 file symbol symbol not found Specified symbol cannot be found in object file file F8425 rompsec section overflowed highest address of target machine The upper limit of the memory was exceeded when rompsec section was created Remarks 1 An warning message can be output by specifying Ximem_overflow warning option if an error occurs 2 This message can be deleted by specifying the rom_less option F8426 section1 section and section2 section overlapped Sections section and section2 overlap F8427 processor type must be same in all files An illegal input file is specified F8428 symbol start_ lable must be word alignment Label start_label must be an address at a 4 byte boundary F8429 packing section not found The specified section cannot be found in the object file F8430 section section not found Section section specified by the p option cannot be found F8432 illegal object file string This is an illegal object file W8508 duplicated option1 option ignored option2 option Option option is specified more than once Option option2 is ignored W8509 section section is alre
340. ion levels below this box When this option is checked the optimization level becomes invalid Optimize for Debugging Od This option generates codes emphasizing logic debugging without putting stress on the ROM capacity and execution speed Its function is equivalent to the default optimization of CA850 Ver 2 41 or earlier Default Optimization This option generates codes emphasizing logic debugging It executes optimization within a range where logic debugging is not affected Standard Optimization Og This option executes appropriate optimization It executes optimization that allows debugging of the C language source in most cases Because external variables are assigned to registers both the execution speed and code size are improved from those of the default option Level 1 Advanced Optimization O This option executes optimization emphasizing the ROM capacity Level 2 Advanced Opt Object Size Os This option executes the maximum optimization placing the utmost emphasis on the ROM capacity Level 2 Advanced Opt Exec Speed Ot This option executes the maximum optimization placing the utmost emphasis on the execution speed rather than on the ROM capacity 3 Generate Debug Information g This check box is used to generate debug information Check it to debug a program such as when a C language source is debugged with the debugger It is also possible to specify whether or not debug information will be outp
341. ion of a loop containing code unrolled num times A loop may not be unrolled or the number of unrolling may be small if the size of the unrolled code is great or the number of times to execute the loop is small Moreover a loop that has a complicated structure such as one containing an interior loop may not be unrolled If O or 1 is specified in num unrolling is suppressed Moreover if num is not specified 4 is taken to have been specified Specify num using a decimal number This is useful when Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed is specified and loop unrolling is not to be performed b Constant Unrolling Number Wo Xlo Use this check box to specify whether or not loop unrolling specified by the global optimization option Xlo is performed in the same way as for previous versions CA850 Ver 2 02 or earlier This option can be specified only when Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed has been specified When this check box is checked the result is the same as when the Wo Xlo options have been specified 3 Sort External Variable Wo Op This check box is used to specify whether the external variables specified by the Op option of the wide range optimization block are sorted When this box is checked the external variables specified by the option are sorted If nothing is specified in the edit box below this check box the variables are sorted in a file If a file name is specified in the edit box an external variable file is
342. ion of in a stack size specification file Save Stack Size Specification File Saves the stack size specification information into a file Exit stk850 Terminates the stk850 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER b View Recalculate Stack Size Recalculates the stack size Stop Aborts the currently running jobs Sort List by Sorts the list display area according to the selected menu Function Name Sorts the list display area in the order of function names Icon Type Sorts the list display area by icon types Stack Size Sorts the list display area in the order of total stack sizes Frame Size Sorts the list display area in the order of frame sizes Additional Margin Sorts the list display area in the order of additional margins File Name Sorts the list display area in the order of file names c Option Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Opens the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box Function Lists dialog box Adjust Stack Size dialog box Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Reset Function Cancels the adjustments to the selected function Reset All Functions Cancels the adjustments to all the functions d Help stk850 Help Opens the online help for the stk850 About stk850 dialog box Opens the About stk850 dialog box 2 Tool bar Same operation as File Save
343. ion section2 allocated up to address number2 F4265 start address number1 of section section1 overflowed start address number2 of segment segment The start address number7 of section section is allocated before the start address number2 of segment segment to which it belongs F4266 memory size numberl1 of segment segment overflowed specified or default maximum memory size number2 Memory size number of segment segment exceeds the explicitly specified maximum memory size or default maximum memory size User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 457 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4276 TP symbol symbol specified as GP symbol symbol2 s base symbol is not found The tp symbol symbol1 specified as the base symbol of gp symbol symbol2 is not found F4279 end address of section section overflowed maximum memory address number The end address of section section overflows the maxinum memory size number F4280 end address of segment section overflowed maximum memory address number The end address of segment segment overflows the maximum memory size number F4282 segment segment numberl number2 overflowed highest or lowest address of internal memory number3 number4 The area to which segment segment is specified to be allocated number1 number2 exceeds the target machine s internal memory range number3 number4 Supplement This message is changed to a warning message by specifying Ximem_overflow warning op
344. ionally displayed by clicking the Add button No function name can be directly input When the Add button is clicked the Set Function Name dialog box is opened Specify a function The specified function is displayed on the list Select a function from the list and click the Change button The Set Function Name dialog box is opened and the function is changed to the one selected on that dialog box When the Delete button is clicked the function selected from the list is deleted The Change and Delete buttons can be selected only when a function is selected from the list User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 347 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 5 Output level This specifies the output level of the analysis result on the edit box The output level can also be changed by using the spin button Only a numeric value can be specified in a range of 1 to 255 The default value is 255 If the specified value is outside the range a message box that indicates that the value is outside the range is opened by clicking the OK or Apply button 6 Display arguments return values When this box is checked the arguments and return value of the function are displayed This box is not checked in the default condition 7 Display source file names line number When this box is checked the source file name and description start line are displayed This box is not checked in the default condition 8 Display with reference info
345. ions The following table lists the ca850 options When starting from the command line if an option that is not listed in the following table is given that option is regarded as an Id850 option and is passed to the Id850 without modification Some options listed below are not included in the PM s option dialog box When one of these options must be specified activate the ca850 from the command line Symbols used in option list V850E2 Option dedicated to V850E2 core V850E Option dedicated to V850Ex core PM Option exists as specification item under the PM 78K compatible Option compatible with 78K microcontrollers C compiler CC78Kx User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 33 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 1 Version help display operation status Version help display operation status options are shown below V This option outputs ca850 s version information to standard error output It does not execute compilation help This option outputs an option description to standard error output PM This option outputs the execution status of the ca850 to the standard error output in detail 34 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 2 Output file specification This section describes the options that specify an output file Fic outfile This option specifies where an OPTIC file generated during compilation is to be saved a Ifthe file name is specified as outfile Saves the out
346. is allocated to the sdata section or the sbss section However any data that is specified for an sdata or sbss section in a pragma section directive or a section file refer to 9 1 Section Files is allocated to the sdata or sbss section regardless of the data size Specify a decimal number as the num value The range of values that can be specified as num is output by the Id850 s A option For details of the pragma section directive refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual Xsconst num PM This option allocates const attribute data and character string literal to the sconst section If num has been specified data whose size is num bytes or less is allocated to the sconst section and if num has been omitted allocation is performed regardless of the data size Specify a decimal number as the num value If a different option is specified for each file a code of a different method of placing and referencing variables may be generated and an error or warning may be output during linking a different option cannot be specified for each file with PM Xcre_sec_ data outfile PM This option outputs a variable frequency data file used by the section file generator a Ifthe file name is specified as outfile Saves the outfile to the current folder under the specified file name b Ifthe folder is specified as outfile Saves outfile to a specified folder with extension c replaced by sec c If outfile is
347. is handled as a definition so if an external variable is temporarily defined by two or more files an error occurs during linking In such cases extern must be always declared in a file that references external variables If a variable whose allocation has been specified via a section file has also been specified via a pragma section directive in a C language source file to be allocated to a different section the specification via the section file takes priority Even when the Gnum compiler option has been specified if a section file specifies that the target will be allocated to an sdata section or sbss section it will be allocated to that section regardless of the num value In other words the order of priority among the specifications section file specification pragma section specification and Gnum specification is as follows lt Higher priority Section file gt pragma section gt Gnum lower priority gt 274 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 9 2 Section File Format Section files are text files that are input at compile time to revise the sections where variables are to be allocated They enable variable allocation settings to be changed without having to modify any C language source files Allocation specifications made via section files take priority over specifications made via pragma section directives in C language source programs The ca850 enables the user
348. is illegal Do not use blanks in the file name of a boot object file Branch Table Address is illegal Do not use any characters other than hexadecimal numbers in the address of a branch table Link Directive File is illegal Do not use blanks in the file name of a link directive file Security ID is illegal Do not use characters other than hexadecimal numbers in a security ID Or the security ID exceeds the prescribed range The final output folder does not exist Check if a folder should be created Startup File is illegal Do not use blanks in the file name of the startup file Or do not use a file name that is the same as the source file name of the startup file excluding the extension in the source file list Value of BPC Register is illegal Do not use any characters other than integers for the BPC register Or the value of the BPC register exceeds the prescribed range of the device rompert File is illegal Do not use blanks in the file name of the rompcrt file Or do not use a file name that is the same as the source file name of the rompcrt file excluding the extension in the source file list 486 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE Final output directory is not exist make it Intermediate output directory is not exist make it The intermediate output folder does not exist Check if a folder should be created The extension of the file does not exist Build might not
349. is is specified for a function whose stack size is unknown the stack size changes from to the following value the frame size the maximum stack size among those of callee functions the additional margin If the function is recursive the value is then multiplied by its recursion depth 4 Recursion Depth In this field specify the recursion depth which is the number of times the recursive function is to be called in the recursive call chain The value should be a positive decimal number of a hexadecimal number prefixed with Ox The stack size is set to the size multiplied by the specified value 392 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 5 Callee Function List for Indirect Call a Callee Functions This list shows the functions to be called from the selected function Added functions are displayed with at the beginning of their names b All Functions This list shows the functions defined or called explicitly not through function pointers in the registered intermediate assembly language files c Add button Adds the selected function in the All Functions to the Callee Functions d Delete button Deletes the selected function from the Callee Functions Functions that are explicitly called cannot be deleted 6 Other buttons OK To saves the specification to the stk system file and to close the dialog box Cancel To close the dialog box without saving the specificat
350. is used a frequency information file sec is created for all C language source files in the project folder or work folder 2 Output File o This option specifies the name of the section file to output extension sf Spaces cannot be used in the file name Specifying a file name is the same as specifying it in the o option If a file name is not specified the project file name with the extension changed to sf is regarded as having been specified A file also can be selected by using the dialog that is displayed by selecting the Browse button 3 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 288 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR This tab is used to set sf850 options Figure 9 5 Section File Generator Options Dialog Box Option Tab Section File Generator Options File Option Others Allocatable Size of tidata Section size_tidatal Allocatable Size of tidata byte Section size_tidata_byte No Optimization Variable Xcyv Sort Variable Comment Level s equence of Frequency Level 1 Verbose Mode v Command Line Options o b sf OK Cancel Help oe 1 No Optimization Section Xcs This option excludes variables allocated to a section from optimization when the Optimize Location O is specified If this check box is checked it is ass
351. is used to specify the file name of the rompcrt file that is specified when ROMization is performed If no file name is specified the default file name rompcrt o is used An assembly language source file can be edited by using the Edit by Text Editor button Note that in this edit box a space can be used in a folder name but not in a file name 3 Use Individual Option When this check box is checked an individual assembler option for the rompcrt file is used The assembler option of the rompcrt file can be set by using the Set Option button 74 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to make settings related to the flash area Figure 3 7 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Flash Tab Compiler Common Options By checking this check box object files that uses re linking function of the flash area are created Check is necessary with both the flash area side and the boot area side Cancel Help 1 Create Flash Object When this check box is checked an object file with a function to relink a flash area is generated This option must be specified on the flash area side and boot area side For details of objects that support flash area refer to 5 6 Flash Memory External ROM Relink Function 2 Branch Table Address Specify the address from which the branch table is to be allocated in hexadecimal numbers in C language The same addresses must be specified for both the flash area and b
352. it is checked the effect is the same as specifying the Wa O option 6 Verbose Mode Wa v This check box sets whether the execution status is displayed If it is checked the effect is the same as specifying the Wa v option 7 Suppress Warning Wa w This check box specifies whether warning messages are displayed or not If it is checked the effect is the same as specifying the Wa w option 8 Warn Zero Register r0 Wa wr0 This check box specifies whether a warning message is displayed or not when register rO is used as a destination register When it is checked the effect is the same as specifying the Wa wr0 option When this check box is dimmed the effect is the same as specifying the Wa wr0 option 9 Warn Reserved Register r1 Wa wr1 This check box specifies whether a warning message is displayed or not when register r1 is used When it is checked the effect is the same as specifying the Wa wr1 option When this check box is dimmed the effect is the same as specifying the Wa wr1 option 10 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 108 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to set other options Figure 3 23 Compiler Options Dialog Box Others Tab Compiler Options General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Deb
353. jp A space can be used in a folder name but not in a file name Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where files can be selected 84 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 85 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Preprocessor This tab is used to set options related to the preprocessor Figure 3 13 Compiler Options Dialog Box Preprocessor Tab Compiler Options Detail of Optimization Extemal Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Include Search Path l Edit Define Macrof D Edit Undefine Macro U Edit Limit of Number of Macro Xm Preserve Preprocessor Comment C I Use Trigraph t I Use C Style Comment Xcxxcom Command Line Option is 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Include Search Path I This specifies the folders to be searched when searching for header files The specified folders will be searched before the standard folder is searched When specifying several paths use a semicolon to delimit the path specifications Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where path items can be edited Example
354. ked For the details of command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 3 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 237 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER This chapter describes an outline of the hex converter hx850 as well as its operation method and output file format 7 1 Flow of Operation The hx850 inputs an object file output by the romp850 and converts the format of that file into a hex hexadecimal format When there is no data with initial value and the romp850 is not used the hx850 inputs an object file output by the Id850 Figure 7 1 Operation Flow in hx850 gt hx850 gt Object file Intel hex file Motorola hex file Tektro hex fil 238 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 2 Input Output Files The hx850 can handle the following file as an input file file1 out Executable object file output by the Id850 or romp850 The following formats can be specified as hex file formats 1 Intel hex format Intel expanded hex format 2 Tektro hex format Expanded Tek hex format 3 Motorola hex format S type format standard address S type format 32 bit address Caution Addresses of lines in each hexadecimal format file are output in ascending order User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 239 CHAPTER 7 HEXA
355. king is specified by the pragma directive in a C language source file the value specified by the option is applied to all structures until the first pragma pack directive emerges After that the value of the pragma directive is applied Even after emergence of the pragma directive however the value specified by the option is applied if the default assumption is specified In addition the following restrictions apply to this option The same also applies to pragma pack The address of a structure member cannot be obtained correctly When a bit field is accessed a data area is also accessed because the type of the member is read If the width of the bit field is less than the type of the member outside of the object is accessed because the type of the member is read This poses no problem in execution If an I O is mapped however an illegal access may occur For details of structure packing refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual Note The operation of this version is the same regardless of whether 4 bytes or 8 bytes are specified 102 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 7 Use Pointer Byte Access Xbyte This check box is used to access the indirect address of a structure in byte units Use this box if a restriction is applied to the structure packing function 8 Output Source Comment Xc This option outputs a C language source program to the assembly language source file to be output as comme
356. l Suppress Warning w Any Option M Wam Zero Register rO wr Warm Reserved Register rl wr1 fz Size Threshold of sdata sbss fil Section Allocation G M Use Command File Command Line Options 3201 g OK Cancel Help ok 1 Include Search Path I This option specifies the folder that is searched for the file specified by the file input quasi directive binclude include prior to the folder where the source file is placed When specifying several paths use a semicolon semicolon to delimit the path specifications Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where path names can be edited This option cannot be set independently for each source file and is always used for all files If this option is omitted and if the specified folder is not found the following folders are sequentially searched 1 Folder where the assembly language source file is placed 2 Folder where the original C language source file is placed if the assembly language source file has been created from a C language source file detected by the file quasi directive 3 Project folder current folder when a command is activated if the command is activated from the command prompt User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 137 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 2 Define Macro D This option specifies a macro name to be defined in the Macro name define value format If define value is omitted the define val
357. l U18512EJ1VOUM i gt gt gt See a Cc C _ 02850 _ as850 _ ld850 5 ac See eet Co gt gt CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 1 1 Link procedure The Id850 s link procedure is described below 1 The 1d850 links a section input section that is included in a specified object file according to a link directive and device file to create an output section consisting of output object files Figure 5 5 Creation of Output Section Input object files Output object file a out file o text section text section J gt sdata section A Output section sbss section Input section A text section sdata section E sbss section func o in lib a 2 The Id850 links the output section created in the above mentioned step according to the link directive and creates a segmentte Note A segment is the minimum unit for loading a program to memory and it is indicated in the program header of the created object file 3 The Id850 allocates the segment created in the above mentioned step to the target machine s memory space according to the link directive and device file Figure 5 6 Allocation to Memory Space Output object files a out a out gt text section text section TEXT segment S g OxFFO000 2 gt sbss section i 5 sbss section DATA segment O sdata section
358. l U18512EJ1VOUM 497 498 APPENDIX C INDEX Numerics 256M Byte Mode 76 A 194 About stk850 dialog box 396 Adjust Stack Size dialog box 392 ANSI 57 88 Archive File Options dialog box 303 Archive Files 197 Archive Header 304 Archive String Table 304 Archive Symbol Table 304 Archiver 263 Keys 266 Operation Method 264 Options 268 Archiver Options 269 Archiver Options dialog box 269 Assemble List 83 99 138 143 Assembler 107 Assembler 124 Device 131 File 128 Flow of Operation 124 Input Output Files 125 Option 129 Other 133 Assembler Options 136 Assembler Options dialog box 136 Assembler Source 82 98 Bit Field 88 Boot Object 75 BPC 76 Branch Instruction 48 Branch Table 75 C Language 88 C Style Comment 87 Call database 363 Call graph 346 Call tree 357 CC78K 88 char 88 Coding Format 24 Command File 62 110 116 Comment 56 83 Common option 341 376 Compiler Common Options 69 Compiler Common Options dialog box 69 Compiler Options 80 Compiler Options dialog box 80 Compiler Package 20 Copy routine 218 Cross reference 337 Cross reference 331 353 Cross reference list 344 Cross reference Option 340 Cross reference Option dialog box 340 Cross Ref
359. l pointer table have been removed t PM This option suppresses checking of the symbol size and alignment condition when linking undefined external symbols If this option is omitted the symbol size and alignment condition are checked and if a difference is detected a warning message is output and link processing is continued The linker supports multiple definitions of undefined external symbols Multiple defined undefined external symbols are allocated to the sbss or bss section after linking If symbol sizes and alignment conditions to be linked vary the maximum size and the least common multiple of the alignment condition are used PM This option outputs the detailed execution status of the Id850 It displays lists of objects to be linked PM This option suppresses output of warning messages Only messages for fatal errors are output User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 167 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 3 7 Other This sets other options F devpath When the 1d850 is started by itself this option sets the device file search to begin in the devpath folder If this option is omitted the search goes directly to the standard folders When activating from the ca850 use the ca850 s devpath option to specify the path of the device file The Id850 handles the folder where the v This option outputs the Id850 version information as standard error output then terminates cpu devicename This option specifies that the device fi
360. l symbol was allocated and the label referencing method are illegal The local symbol is allocated to section by file file7 The illegal reference exists at offset offset for section section2 of file file2 F4165 cannot reference extern symbol symbol by string The flash area s symbol symbol cannot be referenced by string when creating files on the boot area side using the flash external ROM relink function F4166 no symbol information in boot file file Base symbol information is not included in boot file file specified by the zf option Check if ext_table is specified when the boot file is linked F4203 cannot find archive member at offset offset specified in archive symbol table entry An archive member is not found at the position of the offset offset specified by the archive symbol table entry The contents of the archive symbol table may have been destroyed F4204 library path length is too long path maximum size is 576 The library path is too long The path specification must be 576 characters or less F4257 segment segment overflowed highest address of target machine The area to which segment segment is specified to be allocated exceeds the target machine s internal memory range Supplement This message is changed to a warning message by specifying Ximem_overflow warning option This message can be erased by specifying the rom_less option only if the cause of the error is related to the internal RO
361. language files 1 Reading a stack size specification files The method for reading a stack size specification files is as follows Select File Load Stack Size Specification File After a file is read the stack size is recalculated to reflect the information If some adjustment information has already specified it is overwritten and read information becomes valid 2 Saving a stack size specification files The method for saving a stack size specification files is as follows Select File Save Stack Size Specification File The specified information and information abouton undetermined functions or functions whose stack sizes are not determined are saved to a file For a undetermined function only the function name is output 3 Format of at stack size specification files The format of a stack size specification file is composed the function name and each of the parameter separated with White spaces spaces and tabs are not regarded as delimiters Only the spaces immediately before and after are ignored spaces cannot be placed before and after In one line information for one function can be specified A line starting with is regarded as a comment line and blank lines are ignored If only a function name is specified nothing happens Function ADD size RECTIME time CALL func Table 14 11 Description for Each Parameter Parameter Description Function This parameter s
362. lays the contents of the section indicated by section name name This option does not display the title This option displays the contents of relocation information This option displays the contents of the section t num This option displays the contents of a symbol table starting from the numth symbol table entry If num is omitted the display starts from the first symbol table entry t num This option displays the contents of a symbol table up to the numth symbol table entry This option displays a value such as for a section attribute value using a character string to indicate the meaning of the value rather than a number refer to 10 5 2 Element values and meanings z name num This option displays contents of line number information for the function name starting from the numth line number entry If num is omitted the display starts from the first line number entry z num This option displays contents of line number information up to the numth line number entry cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Com
363. le for the target device specified by devicename will be read If using PM this corresponds to the device specification that is done when setting up a project If this option is omitted the device file for the target device specified when the o file was created will be read fc This option checks all input object files to see if the old function calling and the calling specification of the current version are used together The old function calling specification is not supported by the current version If this option is omitted only the object files created from the C language source file are checked help This option outputs a help description of options as standard error output mask_reg This option references the mask register function s library Use the Xmask_reg option when activating from the ca850 The mask register function s library is a 32 register mode library When 22 register mode or 26 register mode has been specified the following warning is output and any subsequent specification is ignored W4857 reg22 option is illegal when mask_reg option is specified ignored reg22 option 168 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER This option creates a relocatable object file This option is ignored if it is specified with the ro option If this option is specified a message is not output and linking is completed normally even if an unresolved external reference remains at the end of link
364. le name file name or option Can be omitted Pattern in preceding can be repeated 5 2 2 Method using PM The Linker Options dialog box that is used to set the linker options can be displayed via the following methods once a project has been established under PM Select Tool Linker Options Since the linker is activated once per project there are no file specific settings The name of the executable object file that is output by the linker is a out The default file name is a out To modify the name of the object file specify a file name in Output File o field on the File tab User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 157 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 3 Types and Features of Options The following tables list the 1d850 s options Some options which are listed on the following options are not in the PM s option dialog box When one of these options must be specified activate the Id850 from the command line Symbols used in option list V850E2 Option dedicated to V850E2 core V850E Option dedicated to V850Ex core PM Option exists as specification item under the PM 158 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 3 1 Input file This sets an option related to the input file of the linker D dfile PM When this option is specified links are made according to the link directive in the directive file dfile The length of dfile must be no more than 127 characters incl
365. le string The object file is illegal F8629 cannot create HEX rom data because there is no memory information ROM data cannot be created because memory information is missing F8630 section section overflowed lowest address of internal memory Section section falls below the lower limit of the internal ROM area or the area specified by the U option F8639 section no such section Specified section section cannot be found F8640 illegal block length length The value ength of the block length specified by the b option is illegal F8641 illegal disp value value The value value of the offset specified by the d option is illegal F8642 illegal fill value The fill value specified by the U option is illegal F8643 illegal start address value The value value of the start address specified by the U option is illegal F8644 illegal size value value The value value of the size specified by the U option is illegal F8645 size must not be 0 The size specified by the U option must not be 0 F8646 memory allocation fault The memory is insufficient 472 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W8713 file namename is too long The length of file name name exceeds the limit W8714 expect command file after ignored Specify a command file after Option is ignored W8715 section section is already defined by l option ignored Section section is ignored because it has already
366. ler Options dialog box and Output Source Comment Xc has also been specified the C language source line that corresponds to the code appears as comments in the assemble list However the code line and source line may not correspond if optimization has been forced User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 143 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 6 2 Output example An assemble list output example is shown below In addition Figure 4 4 shows an example of the assemble list that is output by compiling the C language source program in the example and then assembling the output assembly language source program Source void main void int a Output assemble list example Figure 4 4 Example of Output Assemble List A X 00000000 41 file c work src a c A X 00000000 42 align 4 A X 00000000 43 BF A X 00000000 44 frame _main S2 A X 00000000 45 globl _main A X 00000000 46 _main A X 00000000 47 QB_PROLOGUE A X 00000000 D505 48 jbr L15 A X 00000002 49 L16 A X 00000002 50 G17 A X 00000002 51 G18 A X 00000002 52 G9 A X 00000002 53 G11 A X 00000002 54 G19 A X 00000002 55 B_EPILOGUE A X 00000002 23FF0100 56 ld w 4 F2 sp lp A X 00000006 441A 57 add S2 sp A X 00000008 7F00 58 jmp lp 0 A X 0000000A 59 E_EPTILOGUE A X 0000000A 60 L15 A X 0000000A 5C1A 61 add S2 sp A X 0000000C 63FF0100 62 st w lp 4 F2 sp A
367. ll source files by using the include quasi directive or include directive when describing in C language in order to prevent missing descriptions or the occurrence of contradictions i e to prevent the error of specifying different ID numbers for the same function names or specifying the same ID number for different function names If a file using the pragma asm pragma endasm directives is included as above the compiler outputs the following message but this may be ignored or set by Individual Warnings not to output this message W2244 pragma asm used out of function is not supported completely User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 An image of the relink function is shown below LINKER Assembly language source described by user Assembler image after linking ext_table inc ext func func _flasho 0 ext func func _flashl 1 ext func func flash2 2 rom s include ext _table inc extern func _flasho extern func _ flashl extern func flash2 jarl _func_flasho lp jarl _func_flashl1 lp jarl _func_flash2 lp rom out __ext_table_ head __ext_table_head 0x4 0 1p __ext_table_head 0x4 1 1p __ext_table head 0x4 2 1p extern jarl jarl jarl flash s include ext _table inc globl _func_flasho globl _func_flash2 _func_flasho jmp lp globl _func _flashl _func_flashl jmp 1p _func_flash2 jmp lp flash o branch table section ext_
368. log box is the option name for starting from the command prompt There also are options that can be specified only when starting from the command prompt such as when an output object name is specified To set a mode in which debug information is output select the Generate Debug Information g check box on the Optimization and Debug Information tab in the Compiler Options dialog box When the path of an include file is set or changed select Build Update Dependencies and then select Project Export Makefile 68 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 6 1 Compiler Common Options dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following six tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 3 3 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Tab Description File Settings related to output files Startup Settings related to startup file Link Directive Settings related to link directives ROM Settings related to ROMization Flash Settings related to flash memory Device Setting of options related to device The following four tabs are displayed for a library creation project Table 3 4 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box library Tab Description File Settings related to output files ROM library Settings related to ROMization when library is created Flash librar
369. ls in the switch statement exceeds the limit The maximum value for this processing system is 1025 F2608 cannot recover from earlier errors The processing cannot continue due to an error that occurred previously F2620 unknown cpu type cannot compile Compilation cannot be executed because a target device is not specified 430 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F2622 duplicated cpu type A target device specifications is duplicated by an option or the pragma directive F2623 cannot find device file A device file corresponding to the specified target device was not found or an incorrect target device has been specified F2624 device file read error Reading of the device file has failed The device file may have been corrupted F2625 illegal placement pragma cpu The position of the pragma directive that specifies a device name is illegal Place the device specification code before the syntax of the C language F2626 illegal cpu type type Correspondence of device specification is not established Specify a device corresponding to the ca850 that is used F2628 device file version mismatch cannot use version version Format version of device file is invalid F5001 unknown option option An illegal option option is specified F5005 invalid argument of option option The argument of option option is illegal F5104 out of memory Memory capacity is insuffic
370. ly this option is ignored if there are sections for debug information in the source file If sections for debug information do not exist the optimization option is ignored and this option is valid In other words this option takes precedence if there is no debug information User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 133 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER o ofile This option specifies of ile as the name of the created object file If this option is omitted the object file name extension s is replaced by o p num This option outputs code that avoids CPU faults Specify the type of code to output 1 to 10 or 4a in num Types 1 to 4 and 4a are valid for the V850 core and types 5 to 10 are valid only for the V850Ex core V850E2 core If num is omitted the following types of code are output as determined from the device file 1 If the target device is a V850E2 core or if Common to V850E2 core cnv850e2 is specified in Magic Number in the assembler options output codes of types 5 to 10 2 If the target device is a V850Ex core or if Common to V850Ex core cnv850e is specified in Magic Number in the assembler options output codes of types 5 to 10 3 Ifthe target device is a V850 core output codes of types 1 to 3 4 If Common to V850 core cn is specified in Magic Number in the assembler options output codes of types 1 to 3 and 5 to 10 For details of the code output due to this option refer to 4 7 2 Options for avoiding CPU fa
371. mand file 296 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 10 4 Settings Made via PM This section describes the dialog boxe that is used to set the command options of the dump850 for the target project s C language source files 10 4 1 Object Analysis Tool dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following three tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 10 1 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box dump850 Tab Description Dump Setting of options related to dump command Disassembler Setting of options related to disassembler RAM map Setting of options related to RAM map User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 297 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND For the dump command activation dialog box set the project settings in the PM then select the Dump tab in the dialog opened by selecting Tool Startup Object Analysis Tool Figure 10 2 Object Analysis Tool Dialog Box Dump Tab Object Analysis Tool Dump Disassembler RAM Map File List A 1 Save 2 Browse Save V 3 Save Open Output Items Edit Output Section n Specific ltems 4 NOEN Edit Line Number Functior z String Table c Output Index ELF Header f I Section Header h Archive File Options Program Header i l No Title p Global Pointer Tablef k Output Item by String v F Line Number Informat
372. map table is output in CSV format A CSV format file can be read by spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel The default output file name is rammap csv The CSV format output is as follows Figure 13 6 Memory Map Table CSV Format Output Example rammap Command input rammap mc a out Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0x0000000 0 py rririrriinirii Ox00FFE000 crtN s argc 4 crtN s __argv 4 test c LL29 5 Ox00FFE010 test c _svar 4 _var 4 _gAppName 8 0x00FFE020 _CInput 1 _tmp 4 _buf 100 OxOOFFEO90 _var2 4 _C 1 CrtN s __stack 512 OXFREPPEP Oy pace nI ET EEEN TA A colon is output for a line that has no variable name and the line is omitted Unused area the text attribute section and the interior of large variables correspond to these kinds of lines 382 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER This chapter explains the outline operation method and output format of the stack usage tracer stk850 14 1 Flow of Operation The stack usage tracer stk850 is a tool that calculates statically the amount of the stack each function may use during execution and displays the result in tree form based on the intermediate assembly language file s output by the ca850 The stk850 has the following features It works with PM The result of calculating the stack size is displayed in GUI It provides a
373. mber can be used for the value If an invalid value is specified or if a value outside the range that can be set in the BPC register is specified a warning message is output and this option is ignored Example Xbpc 0x1234 In the above case if the target device is the V850E IA1 the start address of the programmable peripheral O register area is treated as this value shifted 14 bits to the left or Ox48d0000 One value is set for an entire application If you specify Xbpc or bpc when setting options by file make the values the same between files However this option need not be specified for files that do not use the programmable peripheral I O register If this option is specified for a target device that does not have programmable peripheral I O register functions or when assembling as a common for V850 core V850Ex core V850E2 core a warning message is output and this option is ignored This option is for determining the address of the programmable peripheral I O register when compiling assembling and does not actually cause a value to be reflected in the BPC register For operation it is necessary to set a value in the BPC register separately using a startup module or the like A sample appears commented out in the startup module included in the package 38 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Example For the V850E IA1 specify the following descriptions in the startup module to make the vari
374. me specified in this section has the same effect as the same file name specified after the ni option Describe one file name on one line Wildcard characters can be used Example NoIncludeFile All the h files h common definition file common def 2 DefinitionType section This section specifies an identifier that is handled as a type name A file name specified in this section has the same effect as the same file name specified after the d option Describe one identifier in one line Example DefinitionType 1 byte type BYTE UBYTE 2 byte type WORD UWORD 3 Ignoreldent section This section specifies information that is not displayed as an analysis result for each identifier A file name specified in this section has the same effect as the same file name specified after the i option Describe one identifier in one line Example IgnorelIdent Common area temporarily used in each process tmp buf work h help This option outputs an explanation of the options and then terminates processing iident This option specifies an identifier that is not to be displayed in the execution results i file This option specifies the name of the file in which an identifier that is not to be displayed in the execution results is defined User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 329 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL ni This option causes include file informati
375. ments exist for mapping input section section in file file this section is mapped to non LOAD DUMMY segment with no program header There are no LOAD segments for which section section can be mapped to in file file This section is mapped to an unloadable dummy segment with no program header W4773 string is illegal in lpass mode ignored try in 2pass mode B option string must not be specified in one pass mode and is ignored Use the B option to specify two pass mode W4774 string is illegal when f option specified ignored string must not be specified and is ignored when the fill value specification option f is specified W4775 string symbol multiply defined to segment segment first defined symbol symbol used The string symbol is defined more than once for segment segment The symbol symbol that is defined first is used as string symbol for segment segment W4777 string symbol multiply defined first defined symbol symbol used The string symbol is defined more than once The string symbol symbol that is defined first is used W4781 segment segment numberi number2 must be in string relative address able range number3 number4 The area to which segment segment is specified to be allocated number1 number2 exceeds the range that can be referenced by string relative number3 number4 Supplement If this message is output the correct memory address may not be referenced Be sure to change to the
376. mmand using a default value other than the value of a pointer variable other than an automatic variable is not position independent E2361 New style function definition has old style parameter declaration s An old argument declaration format is used in a new function definition format E2374 The bit field object name is put into the next unit Bit field name is located in the next field because it exceeds the boundary E2401 syntax error The syntax is incorrect E2402 Label label not defined The label label is not defined E2411 label is not in switch The case label or default label is missing from the switch statement E2412 duplicate case num in switch The case label num in the switch statement is duplicated num may be expanded as a numeric value E2413 duplicate default in switch The default label is duplicated in the switch statement E2414 break not in loop nor switch break is outside an iteration statement or a switch statement E2415 continue not in loop continue is outside an iteration statement E2420 argument num expected for function call function The argument following num is not specified in function call function E2421 unexpected argument num for function call function An excess argument is specified after num in function call function E2422 undefined static function function The called static function function is not define
377. mmon to V850 core V850Ex core that is created with cn cnv850e can be linked with a V850E2 core object Note that an object that is created with cnv850e2 cannot be linked with a V850 core V850Ex core object Figure 4 6 Example of as850 CPU Core Compatibility V850Ex Core and V850 Core as850 cnv850e as850 cn _ V850Ex core common _vas0core common as850 cpu 3101 as850 cpu 3002 V850Ex device specification C V852 device specification User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 147 4 7 2 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER Options for avoiding CPU faults The CA850 provides the Xv850patch option for the ca850 and the p option for the as850 to avoid faults from the V850 core V850Ex core V850E2 core CPU When starting the as850 from the ca850 if the Xv850patch option is specified in the ca850 the p option having the same num value is automatically set by the as850 to the assembly language source file output by the ca850 Specify the type of the code to be output 1 to 10 and 4a as num 1 to 4 and 4a are valid for the V850 core and 5 to 10 are valid for the V850Ex core V850E2 core only If num is omitted the following codes are identified from the device file and output 1 2 3 4 If the target device is the V850E2 core or if V850E2 core common cnv850e2 is specified as the magic number by an assembler option code 5 to 10 is output If the target device is the V850Ex core or if V850
378. mory External ROM Relink Function When specifying the boot area the branch to the flash area side is processed as a branch using the branch table specified for the address that is specified by this option During the flash area specification a branch table having the branch instruction to the previous branch destination is created at the address specified by this option The address value specified by this option must be the same as the value that is used when creating an object file in the boot area flash area If a different value is specified operation faults will occur There is no error checking The address value specified by this option must be within the ROM area used as the flash area No error checking is done because it is not possible to determine which area contains the specified address When creating an object file in the flash area this option automatically creates an ext_table section having a size of the maximum ID valueNote 1 x Entry size of branch table and starting with the specified address value Although there is no need to follow the directive file s allocation specification for this section an empty area must be available for the section This option cannot be specified with the r option Operation faults will occur if a relocatable object file that has been created using the r option is input If this option is omitted an object file for the flash external ROM relink function will not be created
379. mory usage at compile time Wp Gnum Restricts the stack size for a function subject to inline expansion by num size specification in intermediate language so that inline expansion is not performed for any value larger than the num value Refer to the Wp I file option s description below with regard to the range of num values Wp G32 is assumed as the specification if this option is omitted Wp Nnum Restricts the intermediate language size for a function subject to inline expansion by the num value specification so that inline expansion is not performed for any value larger than the num value Refer to the Wp I file option s description below with regard to the range of num values Wp N128 is assumed as the specification if this option is omitted and Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed is specified otherwise Wp N24 is assumed as the specification Wp S Unconditionally performs inline expansion for static functions that have been referenced only once Wp 1 file Outputs function information to standard output or additional output to the file The displayed information includes a range of values to be specified for the Wp Gnum and Wp Nnum options described above For example in the case of stack size inline expansion is performed if the called function s value is not greater than the value specified for Wp Nnum Note that the stack size output using this option is different from the stack size actuall
380. mporary file file Temporary file file cannot be deleted E2043 illegal argument for function The argument of function function is illegal E2103 illegal header name The character string of the header name specified by include is incorrect E2104 cannot find include file file The file file specified by the include directive cannot be found E2111 illegal token token An illegal token token is recognized E2113 unexpected EOF The file ends at a position not permitted by syntax E2114 non terminated comment that closes the comment is missing E2116 illegal expression syntax The description of the expression in preprocessing control is incorrect 416 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2117 compiler limit too long identifier name num The identifier name is too long The maximum value for this processing system is 1023 for the internal identifier and 1022 for the external identifier E2118 compiler limit too many characters in string literal num The character string literal is too long The maximum value for this processing system is 4045 E2123 compiler limit too many macro parameters num Too many macro parameters are used The maximum value for this processing system is 127 E2124 illegal macro name name The macro name name is incorrect E2125 System reserved macro name must not be redefined The macro name must not be r
381. multiplied by the value time CALL func This parameter specifies an additional callee function Specify a function name as func The form of the function name is the same as for the Function parameter The specified function is added to the callee func tions Up to 1024 function names can be specified but the only function with maximum stack makes sense Examples of a stack size specification file and output before after a stack size specification file is read are shown below a Example of a stack size specification file sample txt Specify 50 as the stack size of flib f lib ADD 50 Set 0 to the stack size of _flib zero The purpose is to make _flib zero not unknown flib zero ADD 0 Add 10 in hexadecimal to stack size and specify recursion depth 3 times sub2 ADD 0xa RECTIME 3 Append sub4 and _flib to the callee functions called through function pointer sub3 CALL sub c sub4 CALL f 1lib Specify nothing sub c sub4 b Output image before stack size specification file is read main 310 100 sub1 210 200 sub2 10 10 sub2 10 10 sub3 amp 200 200 flib zero sub c sub4 50 50 flib task1 100 100 cre tsk 0 0 c Output image after stack size specification file sample txt is read main 400 100 sub3 amp 300 200 sub c sub4 100 50 lib 50 50 f lib
382. n allocating to a sdata section or sbss section 2 Use the pragma section directive to determine the section for allocation of each variable 3 Use section files to allocate the specified variables when the compiler is activated Method 1 is applicable in cases where external variables that do not exceed a certain size can be allocated to either sdata or sbss sections Since this specification is via a compiler option there is no need to add changes to the C language source file Method 2 enables a freer choice of the section for allocation Here the pragma section directive is used in the C language source file to explicitly specify the target section for allocation However this method requires that changes be added to the C language source file Neither method 1 nor method 2 can be used in cases where the target section for allocation must be freely specified such as in order to strictly comply with an ANSI standard but without having to use the pragma section directive or such as when attempting to migrate a C language source file that has been compiled by a compiler other than the ca850 without adding changes to the C language source file Method 3 involving section files is recommended in such cases Section files define the following for all external variables and static variables Clanguage source files where the static variables are declared external variable names static variable names and names of the s
383. n already specified in a section file for symbol symbol section2 that has been specified later is ignored W2711 Different section is specified for symbol in source file section1 and section file section2 Source file specification is ignored Section specification section7 for the source file and section specification section2 for the section file for symbol symbol differ The section specification section1 for the source file is ignored W2730 Block interrupt function cannot be installed inline is ignored inline must not be specified for a function declared to disable interrupts inline specification is ignored W2731 Block interrupt attribute is specified for function function previously specified inline is ignored Function function specified as inline is specified to disable interrupts inline specification is ignored W2740 pragma text function name must be placed before the function s User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 439 APPENDIX B MESSAGE definition pragma text function is ignored The text section must be specified before the function definition The text section specification for a function function is ignored W2741 Function specified as direct can not be allocated in text pragma text function is ignored The text section cannot be specified for a function specified as interrupt in direct location direct The text section specification for a f
384. n easy user interface to specify additional stack size information Figure 14 1 Estimation Flow in stk850 PM 20 Stack usage tracer Project file stk850 gt ae _ gt ca850 _ Output result files C C language source file Intermediate assembly language file lt lt stk system file Stack size specification file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 383 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 14 2 Input Output Files 14 2 1 Input files The following files are input to the stk850 1 Project file The stk850 automatically reads the information of the active project in PM 2 Intermediate assembly language file An intermediate assembly language file is an intermediate assembly language source that the ca850 outputs from the C language source file registered in the project file Based on the intermediate assembly language files the stk850 analyzes the amount of the stack used Users cannot specify an individual intermediate assembly language file 3 Stack size specification file The stk850 accepts a user written file which contains additional stack size information Besides the stk850 uses installation folder of the stk850 dat850 txt as the stack size specification file for the standard library functions Refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file 4 stk system file Refer to 14 6 3 stk system file 14 2 2 Output file The following files are output from the stk850 1 Output res
385. n for corresponding symbol which takes one of the following values ABS for a symbol indicating a constant COMMON for an undefined external symbol that is referenced using a global pointer gp with 32 bit displacement GPCOMMON for an undefined external symbol that is referenced using a global pointer gp with 16 bit displacement or UNDEF for an undefined symbol User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 411 APPENDIX A FORMAT OF OBJECT FILE A 5 2 String table The following describes the string table a type of section The string table a section of section type STRTAB consists of a character string that ends with a null character 0 This character string is referenced using an index that is an offset from the beginning of the string table refer to Table A 7 An ELF format object file uses this character string to hold the names of symbols and sections For example the constituent element name in the section header table entry has an index to the string table shstrtab which holds a section name Note The rule is that the first byte expressed by index 0 is a null character Table A 7 Relationship Between Indexes and Character Strings in String Table Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 0 n a m e 0 V a r 10 i a b l e 0 a b l e 20 0 0 x x 0 Index String 0 null string 1 name 7 Variable 11 able 16 able 24 null string
386. n is appended to the specification for file that extension is ignored If file is omitted cmeasure Ist and cmeasure csv are assumed for the file names ms num This option specifies the output order Any of the following can be specified for num 1 Output the information sorted in alphabetical order of the function names 2 Output the information sorted in alphabetical order of the file names and function names 3 Output the information without sorting If is specified the information is output in ascending order If is specified the information is output in descending order If this option is omitted the information is output without sorting in the order that the functions appeared mstd This option outputs the text format function metrics to standard output 334 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 4 6 Call database The cxref call database options are shown below b file This option outputs the call database in text format to the specified file If file is omitted cprofile dat is assumed for the file name bc file This option outputs the call database in CSV format to the specified file If file is omitted cprofile csv is assumed for the file name ball file This option outputs the call database in text format and CSV format to the specified files The file names are file Ist and file csv If an extension is appended to
387. n jumps to the intended function Figure 5 16 From Fixed ROM to Flash Memory In fixed ROM In flash memory void func_roml1 void void func_flashil void void func_rom2 void void func_flash2 void func_flash1 func_flash Branch table Execution jumps to branch table of flash memory jr _func_flash1 jr _func_flash2 In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external variables A global variable defined in the flash memory cannot be referenced from the fixed ROM Therefore an external variable of the same name can be defined in both the fixed ROM and flash memory Each of these external variables is referenced only from the respective areas User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 183 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 4 To call function in fixed ROM from flash memory When a function in the fixed ROM is called from the flash memory the contents of the fixed ROM are not changed Therefore a function in the fixed ROM can be directly called from the flash memory Figure 5 17 From Flash Memory to Fixed ROM In fixed ROM In flash memory void func_rom1 void void func_flashl void func_rom2 void func_rom2 void void func_flash2 void Branch table A function in fixed ROM can be directly called from flash memory jr _func_flash1 jr _func_flash2
388. n section header table Flag Size of ELF header Entry size of program header table Number of entries in program header table Entry size of section header table Number of entries in section header table Section header table index of string table containing section name User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 305 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND 5 Program header table Display the contents of the program header table PROGRAM HEADER No a Type b Offset c Vaddr d Paddr e Filesz f Memsz g Flags h Align i 1 0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 a Index b Segment type c Offset in file d Virtual address e Physical address f File size g Memory size h Segment attribute i Alignment condition 6 Section header table Display the contents of the section header table SECTION HEADER No a Type b Flags c Addr d Offset e Size f Name g Link h Info i Adralgn j Entsize k Ls 0x1 0x6 0x0 0x1 0x7556 text 0x0 0x0 0x4 0x0 Index Section type c Section attribute Start address Offset in file f Size g Section name h Section header table index link i Information j Alignment condition k Size of entry 306 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 7 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND String table Display the contents of the string table xSTRING TABLE INFORMATION Index a String b 0x1 text 8 a Index b C
389. n the rompsec section are copied Section number number is a positive number that starts from 1 By default sections are allocated in the order in which they appear in the input file If sections to be allocated to the rompsec section are specified by the p or t option of the romp850 they are allocated in the order in which they are specified If a ROM section file is created with PM however a C language source header file that makes number and label correspond to each other by define is generated and number can be specified by a label name For a specific example refer to 6 5 2 Example Return value 0 Normal completion if copied correctly 1 Abnormal termination if not copied correctly Cautions Data is not copied if the address indicated by label is not at the start of the rompsec section _rcopy1 copies data in accordance with the information generated by the romp850 No data is copied if data may be overwritten as a result of copying Specify a global label having an absolute value or an absolute address as the first argument of _rcopy1 label If any other value or address is specified the result is not guaranteed The _rcopy1 and _rcopy functions are identical in feature _rcopy is used to maintain compatibility with old versions 220 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR _rcopy2 Overview _rcopy2 Copies default data or RAM text te 2 byte N
390. n the creation of a section allocated object file in accordance with the input section file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 9 4 Types and Features of Options The sf850 options are shown below Symbols used in option list PM Option exists as specification item under the PM User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 283 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 9 4 1 Options This specifies options of the sf850 0 PM This option specifies that only the number of variables that can be allocated to the tidata section will be selected in order starting from highest use frequency and output The maximum data size that can be allocated to the tidata section is 256 bytes which are internally divided into tidata byte byte data 128 bytes and tidata word word data When this option is specified variables are selected until the total section size of 256 bytes is reached at which point the variables are output to the section file However selection is stopped when the byte data reaches 128 bytes If this option is omitted all variables that have appeared are output to the section file V This option outputs the section file generator s version number via standard output and then terminates processing Xcs name PM This option excludes variables allocated to a section from optimization when the O option is specified as name A name is specified a section file to the specifie
391. n the folder of the analysis folder 374 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 13 5 2 RAM map option dialog box This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Detail options button on the RAM map tab in the Static perfor mance analyzer dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following one tab is displayed Table 13 2 RAM map option Dialog Box Tab Description Common option Setting of common options User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 375 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL Common option This tab is used to set common options Figure 13 3 RAM map option Dialog Box Common option Tab RAM map option Common option Output forlder Vv File name Default V File name rammap csv Default J Output all range Specified output ranges Number Start address Cancel 1 Output forlder Checking Normal format outputs the analysis result of the RAM map in the text format This is not checked in the default condition Specify the name of a file to which the analysis result in the normal format is to be output by using the File name edit box The default file name is rammap txt The default file name can also be selected by clicking the Default button This setting box and the Default button can be selected only when Normal format is selected If CSV format is checked the result of analysis of the RAM map
392. nal ROM Relink Function 11 Use Mask Register Xmask_reg This option enables use of the mask register function When this function is used the ca850 outputs codes assuming that an 8 bit mask value Oxff is set to r20 and a 16 bit mask value Oxffff is set to r21 Mask values must be set to the mask registers r20 and r21 by a user program such as the startup routine With the V850 microcontrollers byte data and halfword data are sign extended to a word length depending on the value of the most significant bit when they are loaded from memory to registers Consequently the mask code of the higher bits may be generated when an operation on unsigned char or unsigned short type data is performed When the result of an operation is stored in a register variable a mask code is generated for unsigned byte data and unsigned halfword data to clear the higher bits In both the cases generation of the mask code can be avoided if word data is used If word data cannot be used and a mask code is generated the code size can be reduced by using the mask register function To decide whether the mask register function is to be used or not the following points must be thoroughly considered Is ita program that outputs many mask codes Two register variable registers are used as mask registers Does this have any effect If an object that uses a mask register and an object that does not use a mask register exist together when this option is specified
393. nal file name A file name cannot be directly input Clicking the Add button opens the Set analyze file dialog box where a file can be specified The specified file is displayed in the list If Analyze folder is blank the path of the specified file is displayed in Analyze folder 5 In the Set analyze file dialog box the default position is determined in the following sequence 1 Analyze folder on this tab 2 Output folder on this tab 3 Path of Analyze file on the RAM map tab 4 Install folder Clicking the Delete button deletes the file selected from the list This button can be selected only if a file is selected from the list Output folder Specify the analysis result output destination folder in the edit box The default assumption is as follows lf an option is saved the saved analysis result output destination is assumed If an option is not saved the folder where the project file is placed is assumed This box is blank in the default condition If the specified folder does not exist clicking the OK or Apply button opens a folder creation dialog box and clicking the OK button creates a folder Clicking the Browse button opens the Browse for Folder dialog box where a folder to which the analysis result is to be output can be selected The selected folder is displayed in Output folder In the Browse for Folder dialog box the default position is determined in the
394. name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 169 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 4 Settings Made via PM This section describes dialog boxes that are used to set the command options of the Id850 for the target project s source file 5 4 1 Linker Options dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following four tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Figure 5 7 Linker Options Dialog Box Tab Description File Setting of options related to files Library Setting of options related to library Option Setting of linker options Others Other settings Note The option shown with in this dialog box is the option that is activated from the command line 170 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER This tab is used to set options related to files of the linker Figure 5 8 Linker Options Dialog Box File Tab Linker Options File Library Option Others Output File o i Browse Link Map File m Browse Edit by Text Editor F Old Style Link Map mo
395. nc quasi directive are inconsistent F4065 too many symbols The limit on the number of symbols has been exceeded The upper limit on the number of symbols for relocatable object files created via the r or ro option is 16 777 125 symbols F4101 failed to get section name string table section Retrieval of the string table section of the section name has failed F4102 failed to get symbol name string table section Retrieval of a string table section has failed F4103 failed to get section header Retrieval of a section header has failed F4104 failed to get section name string Retrieval of a section name has failed F4106 section section has unknown section type number The section section has an illegal section type number F4107 cannot get raw data of section section Raw data retrieval of section section has failed F4109 interrupt function section section is already defined Interrupt handler section section has already been defined Description of this section to the link directive is unnecessary because the Id850 automatically generates an interrupt handler section from the specified device file F4110 special section section is already defined Special section section is already defined F4112 illegal section section size The size of section section is illegal F4155 cannot find GP symbol in segment segment of illegal label reference for local symbol in file file2 section
396. new ROM When changing the program even partially basically the project itself is reorganized or rebuilt However it would be convenient if the allocation to be upgraded was limited to the flash memory or external ROM and if it was not necessary to reorganize the project The boot area is fixed to the internal ROM Ifa function is called between the flash memory to be rewritten and the boot area and if the start address of the function is changed as a result of modifying the function in the flash memory the function cannot be called correctly The flash memory external ROM relink function hereafter referred to as the relink function is used to prevent this and enable functions to be called correctly This function is realized as follows 1 A branch table where instructions to branch to the functions in the flash memory area are written is prepared in the flash memory area 2 When a function in the flash memory area is called from the boot area execution jumps to the branch table in the flash memory area and then the instruction used to branch to the intended function is executed and jump occurs This mechanism can be realized by the user If the relink function is used this can be done relatively easily To use this function however the functions to be called in the flash memory area must be determined when the fixed ROM area is created This mechanism is used to call a function from the fixed ROM area even if the func
397. new function call specifications cannot be linked with an object file that uses the old function call specifications File file is an object file that uses the old function call specifications F4456 cannot link mask reg using objects with mask reg not using objects file is mask reg using object An object file that uses the mask register cannot be linked with an object file that does not use the mask register File file is an object file using the mask register F4457 input files have different BPC value Files with a different BPC values has been input W4504 cannot create output file file Output file file cannot be created W4555 symbol symbol has incompatible type in file file A link occurs in symbol symbol but the symbol has a different symbol type than the symbol having the same name defined in file W4556 symbol symbol has different size in file file A link occurs in symbol symbol but the symbol has a different size than the symbol having the same name defined in file W4557 symbol symbol has different align size in file file A link occurs in symbol symbol but the symbol has a different alignment condition than the symbol having the same name defined in file W4562 size zero sbss or bss attribute symbol symbol The size of symbol to be allocated to the sbss or bss attribute section is 0 W4564 undefined global symbol symbol specified with ext func The global symbol symbol specifie
398. newpage apli c malloc 0 1 newpage apli c printf 0 1 newpage apli c exit 0 1 split apli c newpage apli c 1 split apli c insertitem apli c 2 insertsub apli c insertsub apli c 1 insertsub apli c insertitem apli c 1 insertsub apli c split apli c 1 insert apli c insertsub apli c 1 insert apli c newpage apli c 1 combine apli c removeitem apli c 1 combine apli c free 0 1 Five types of information are output sequentially from left to right on each line 1 Calling function name 2 Name of source file in which calling function is defined If no analysis can be performed is output 3 Called function name 4 Name of source file in which called function is defined Since the source file name is unknown for a function in a library 0 is output 5 Number of times called function is called within calling function User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 363 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 CSV format output example If the bc option is specified the call database is output in CSV format A CS V format file can be read by spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel The default output file name is cprofile csv The CSV format output is as follows Figure 12 16 Call Database CSV Format Output Example cxref Command input cxref bc apli c SrceFileList No SrcFileName FilePath l apli c Funcs No FuncName SrcFileNo LineNo Ret1 Arg1 Ret2 Arg2 1 free 0 0 2 main 1 248 int 3 scanf 0
399. ng Dialog Box is output W9416 Multiple RECTIME s for one function in file path line line Only one is allowed In the stack size specification file multiple specifications of recursion depth ware found Only one can be specified for one function For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9417 Illegal RECTIME for non recursive function in file path line line It shall be specified for recursive functions In the stack size specification file an incorrect specification of recursion depth was found RECTIME specification of recursion depth can be used only for recursive functions For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9418 Missing function name after CALL in file path line line In the stack size specification file an incorrect specification of a callee functionincorrect counting information was found Specify the callee function as follows CALL followed by the function name The function names that are not defined or called explicitly in the project cannot be registered For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 495 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W9419 Multiple function names after CALL in file path line line Place CALL before each functions In
400. ng of functions If Use is specified the prologue epilogue processing of functions uses run time library calls If Default is selected and if Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed is specified as the optimization type by an option of the Optimization and Debug Information tab No use is assumed If another type is specified Use is assumed This setting can be made for each source file If Default has been specified the same setting is used globally For details of prologue epilogue processing of functions refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 101 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 5 Output Code of switch statement This edit area is used to specify the method of outputting the code of a switch statement Default The compiler automatically judges the format it considers the most appropriate if else The code of the switch statement is output in the same format as an if else statement following the arrangement of a case statement Select this option when case statements are written in the order of frequency or when the number of labels is few Because the case statements are sequentially compared starting from the top the execution speed can be improved if case statements that often match are described first because unnecessary comparison does not have to be executed Binary Search Outputs the code of the switch statement in the binary search format If this option is selected when many labels
401. ng of size and alignment conditions during linkage of undefined external symbols If this option is omitted symbol size and alignment conditions are checked If a difference is found a warning message is output and linking continues Remark The linker supports multiple definitions of undefined external symbols The multiple undefined external symbols are allocated to the sbss or bss section after they have been linked If the symbol size or alignment condition of the symbols to be linked differ the maximum size of the symbols to be linked is used as the size and the least common multiple of the alignment condition is used as the alignment condition 13 Ignore External Symbol Error T This option suppresses size checking when linking external symbols If this option is omitted the size is checked and if a difference in size is detected a warning message is output and linking continues At that point the symbol size of a file for which a symbol is actually defined is valid 14 Check Mask Register mc This option checks whether or not files that use the mask register function are mixed with files that do not use this function when linking object files created from the C language source files If mixed linking is stopped 15 Check Register Mode rc This option checks whether or not different register modes are mixed among all of the input object files and outputs detailed information if mixed If the Suppress Warning check b
402. ng the data attribute or sdata attribute have been specified Spaces cannot be used in the section name 228 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR rom_less PM This option does not check the rompsec section for a peripheral location error of the internal ROM It is recommended to specify this option in the ROMless mode This option does not support checking of overflow of the internal ROM in the single chip mode Specify this option to invalidate overflow check of the internal ROM and check for overflow with the dump850 If this option is omitted the rompsec section is checked for a peripheral location error of the internal ROM t section PM This option inserts the contents of the section name section and the corresponding address and size information into the rompsec section If the specified section does not exist in the object file a message is output and processing is stopped This option is applicable for text attribute and const attribute sections If this option is specified more than once insertion to the rompsec section occurs according to the order of specification Only sections having either a text attribute or the const attribute can be specified by this option If any other type of section is specified a message is output and processing is stopped Spaces cannot be used in the section name User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 229 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 7 3 Other The specifications
403. not change in a loop is moved out of the loop Step execution and breakpoints may not be set as intended by the user Redundant assignment statements are deleted The breakpoint of a deleted line cannot be set a External variables are allocated to registers The read write break to memory may not be correctly executed during debugging b Optimization that rearranges instructions by the as850 to avoid register flag hazards is performed This optimization does not affect debugging This optimization is higher in compilation speed than the advanced optimization and its code efficiency execution speed is intermediate in the optimization of the CA850 If the ROM capacity has a relatively wide margin setting this option is recommended 4 O Level 1 Advanced Optimization In addition to the optimization performed by options up to Og the following optimization is performed only the representative operations are described It is judged that there is no reference to an argument of a function and the assignment code of a value to the argument is deleted This optimization does not affect debugging Only a loop that is executed only once is unrolled to avoid the overhead of end condition judgment This optimization does not affect debugging Label alignment and 4 byte alignment at the beginning of a function are suppressed This optimization does not affect debugging A label not referenced is deleted A breakpoint cannot be
404. ns for particular C language source files Input the generated frequency information file to the sf850 which outputs a section file Consequently the sf850 must be activated via the command line Once this is done a section file which specifies the variables that will be allocated to tidata attribute sections tidata word attribute sections and tidata byte attribute sections is generated Example s 850 funcl sec func2 sec func3 sec o secfile 3 4 282 In this case the three frequency information files func1 sec func2 sec and func3 sec are gathered as one section file which is output as secfile It is easier to create a command file in cases where there are a lot of files and consequently a lot of file names to enter For details of command files refer to 3 7 2 Command file Since the default specification for the output section file is that all variables are allocated to a tidata attribute section it may be necessary to modify the section file If the O option is specified when activating sf850 the variables that can be accommodated in the memory range of the tidata attribute section can be automatically selected in sequence starting from the most frequently referenced variable Select Compiler Options dialog box from the menu and then select the Input File tab and specify the generated section file name in the combo box of Section File Xsec_file then rebuild The build will result i
405. nsigned long _S_ romp main intret num for num 1 num lt 6 num ret rcopy4 amp S romp num if ret 1 Error processing for num 7 num lt 11 num ret rcopyl amp S romp num if ret 1 Error processing User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 223 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 3 Example of incorrect specification 1 extern unsigned long _S romp char cp void func void intret First argument is gp relative value because copied to variable cp amp S romp ret rceopy cp 1 4 Example of incorrect specification 2 224 extern unsigned long _S_ romp int i void func void intret First argument is gp relative value because copied to variable i 0x100 ret _rc py i 1 The section number to be specified as number should be a positive number that starts from 1 The relationship between the section name and section number can be referenced from the memory map When PM is used a C language header file in which correspondence between the section number and label is established can be created by outputting a ROM section file In other words a label can be used as number For the method of outputting the ROM section file and for the label naming rules refer to 6 8 1 ROM Processor Options dialog box If a section number or 1 is not specified as number nothing is copied If two or more RAMs exis
406. ntime 3 M Use Word Switch Table word_switch Default Use X Output Code of switch statement Default Auto Selection v Command Line Option e 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Size Threshold of sdata sbss Section Allocation G Use this area to specify the upper limit of data allocated to the sdata sbss section Data of the specified size bytes or less is allocated to the sdata or sbss section However data for which the sdata sbss section is specified by the pragma section directive or a section file is allocated to the sdata sbss section regardless of its size An integer of decimal values 0 to 32767 can be specified The yardstick for the value to be specified in this area is output for reference when Output GP Information A on the Option tab that sets linker options is specified Note that this option cannot be specified when an individual source is specified Always specify this option as a global option 100 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 2 sconst Section Allocation This area is used to specify allocation of const attribute data or a character string literal i e data or a character string literal with a const type modifier to the sconst section a Allocate Data Xsconst When this check box is checked data or a character string literal with the const attribute is allocated to the sconst section b Size Threshold If the upper limit of a data length is inpu
407. nts However the comments that are output are only for reference and may not strictly correspond to the codes For example the output position of the global variables local variables and function declaration may be shifted In addition due to optimization the codes may be deleted and only comments may remain 9 Inline Expansion of strcpy Xi This check box is used to convert calling the function strcpy stremp into block transfer setting the alignment condition of arrays including character strings and structures to 4 bytes The execution speed of objects will increase but the code size will also increase This option executes conversion only if the second argument of strcpy stremp is a character string The first argument must be aligned to 4 bytes by the program the ca850 aligns the second argument because it is a character string This option must not be specified together with the Xpack option 10 Change Jump Code of Interruption Xj This check box is used to execute the jmp instruction only for a normal interrupt defined in C language If the body of a function is in a range to which the jr instruction cannot branch and if the Id850 outputs an error recompile by using this option If this option is omitted use the jr instruction This option must not be specified when a function on the flash side is called from the boot side by using the flash external ROM relink function For details refer to 5 6 Flash Memory Exter
408. ny mask codes Two register variable registers are used as mask registers Does this have any effect If an object that uses a mask register and an object that does not use a mask register exist together when this option is specified the Id850 outputs an error In the 32 register mode mask_reg is passed to the Id850 As a result the standard library is searched by the linker first in the mask register folder lib850 r32mak and then the standard folder For the mask register function refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual 2 Prologue epilogue runtime option 50 Xpro_epi_ runtime on off PM This option specifies whether or not to perform prologue epilogue processing based on runtime library function calls If this option is on prologue epilogue processing of the function is performed based on run time library function calls If neither on or off is specified specification of on is assumed This option is set to on if an optimization option other than the Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed Ot is specified as the optimization type of the Optimization and Debug Information option or by default and is set to off if off is specified or the Ot option is specified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 Variable placement control options Gnum PM Data that is less than num bytes is allocated to the sdata section or the sbss section If this option is omitted all data
409. o ofile PM This option outputs the hex converted result to the file named ofile If this option is omitted output is standard output 242 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 4 2 Format These specifications specify an option of the hexadecimal converter bnum PM The decimal number specified as num is regarded as the maximum block length value or in the case of the Intel expanded hex format or the Motorola S type hex format the number of code bytes indicated in one data record If this option is omitted the default value for each hex format is used Specify a decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox or OX as num Table 7 1 HEX Format Block Record HEX Format Range of Specifiable Values Default Value Intel expanded hex format 1 255 0x01 Oxff 31 0x1f Motorola type S hex format 1 251 0x01 Oxfb 80 0x50 Motorola type S hex format 1 250 0x01 Oxfa 80 0x50 32 bit address Expanded Tek hex format 16 255 0x10 Oxff 255 Oxff dnum PM This option offsets the address to be output from num For num specify either a decimal number or a hexadecimal number that begins with either Ox or OX Specifiable values are in the range of 0 to Oxfffffffe The address output is the value offset from the specified value The default value is 0 fc PM This option specifies use of the hex format specified by the letter c
410. ocated except for the section between address 1 and address 2 available for the allocation of other variables User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 8 9 10 11 At compile time the processing of debugging information uses a large amount of memory and therefore can cause an out of memory condition to occur Step execution cannot be performed when using sections that have been merged into one line during inline expansion Step execution cannot be performed when using sections that have been merged into one main loop section during loop unrolling Also the stop point for merging of loops into one main loop section is the number of loops after expansion not the number of loops before expansion If a register is allocated to an external variable optimization debugging cannot be executed because the debug information of the specified external variable is deleted User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 123 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER This chapter describes the outline operation assemble list and output messages of the assembler as850 4 1 Flow of Operation The as850 assembles an assembly language source program in a specified assembly language source file and creates a relocatable object file refer to Figure 4 1 Figure 4 1 Operation Flow of as850 gt as850 gt gt Assembly language Relocatable object file source file 124 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 2 In
411. of a section placed in the RAM area overlaps in the fixed ROM and flash memory the linker does not output an error because the projects are different In other words the addresses can overlap For the RAM area that must be referenced simultaneously in the fixed ROM and flash memory addresses must be specified so that they do not overlap It is recommended to use the same address values for the tp gp and ep values in the fixed ROM and flash memory These values may be different but in this case the values must be set each time control has been transferred between an instruction code in the fixed ROM and one in the flash memory A link directive file related to the branch table ext_table does not have to be described It is automatically allocated to an address specified by the linker option ext_table However the following points must be noted If a vacant area of the size of the branch table is at the address specified by ext_table the link directive file is allocated as is The other segments are not affected This is the most ideal case If a vacant area of the size of the branch table is not at the address specified by ext_table an error occurs This applies for example if a code has been already allocated to the address specified by ext_table in a TEXT segment for which an address is specified Here is an example Address specification of branch table ext_ table 0x500 Link directive file part TEXT
412. of an overflow If this option is omitted an error message is output and processing is stopped if an overflow occurs b label PM The label abe indicates the start address of the rompsec section to be created If the specified label does not exist in the object file or if the option has been specified more than once a message is output and processing is stopped If this option is omitted it is assumed that ___ S_romp has been specified d PM This option creates an object file that includes only a rompsec section no text attribute section is inserted in the file to be created If this option is omitted a section with the text attribute is inserted PM This option prevents checking of duplicate addresses in input files and output files m mapfile PM This option outputs to mapfile a memory map of the object file to be created If mapfile is omitted the link map is output to the standard output p section PM This option inserts the contents of the section name section and the corresponding address and size information into the rompsec section If the specified section does not exist in the object file a message is output and processing is stopped This option is applicable for data attribute and sdata attribute sections If this option is specified more than once insertion to the rompsec section occurs according to the order of specification If this option is omitted it is assumed that all sections havi
413. of the section is within a range of 15 bits 0x0 to Ox7fff if the ca850 is started with the Gnum option specified with the value shown in the column at the left to this column specified as num If the size is within this range OK is displayed if it is not nothing is displayed Note Usually the sections to which data is allocated are allocated from the lower address in the order of data sdata sbss bss attribute sections in CA850 The global pointer gp is assumed to be set in the startup module etc so as to indicate the first address of the sdata attribute section 32 KB If the result is OK in this judgement the sdata sbss attribute sections are assumed to be allocated to a memory range that can be referenced using 16 bit displacement Cautions The information output by this option is only a guide and the judgment result may not be correct such as in the following cases a If allocation of a section that creates a hole is specified by a link directive etc b Ifa direct address is specified for a global pointer symbol c If data is allocated to the sdata sbss section by the pragma section directive Example gt 1d850 A filel o file2 o file1 0 and file2 0 are linked and information that can be used as a guide for setting the num value of the Gnum option that can be specified for the ca850 or the as850 when compiling or assembling is output via standard output 5 7 2 Archive files An ar
414. offset offset type relocation type symbol is allocated in section sectioni file filel GP symbol is not defined in section section of executable file file at the boot side Or there is a contradiction in the location reference method of the symbol symbol Supplement If a section to be located by pragma section specification is changed by variable definition change a section for the extern declaration of the variable in another file in the same way Symbol symbol is located at section7 of file file1 Reference to symbol symbol exists at offset offset of section section2 of file file2 W4658 relocated value value of relocation entry symbol symbol file file section section offset offset type relocation type for branch command become odd value The value value relocated by a branch relocation entry symbol symbol file file section section offset offset relocation type relocation type is an odd number W4659 relocated value value of relocation entry symbol symbol file file section section offset offset type relocation type for load store command become odd value The value relocated by relocation entry symbol symbol file file section section offset offset relocation type relocation type of a load store instruction is odd User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 463 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W4661 symbol symbol output section section1 is too far from output section section2 value value file f
415. omitted Saves the file to the current folder with extension c replaced by sec d If two or more files are output Creates a folder specified as outfile and saves the files with extension c replaced by sec When several C language source files exist and a frequency data file is to be created with a file name specified for each file PM opens the option dialog box for each C language source file from the source file list and then specifies a file name when the frequency data file is created When using command line input it specifies this option with outfile for each C language source file The C language source files are specified one at a time with c specified The variable frequency data file outputs information how often the Id850 or st instruction accesses variables in the C language source file Nothing is performed on the assembly language source file When this option and the Xcre_sec_data_only option are simultaneously specified the Xcre_sec_data_only option takes priority User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 51 52 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Xcre_sec_ data only outfile This option outputs the variable frequency data file used by the section file generator However unlike the Xcre_sec_data this option outputs only the variable frequency data file and does not perform object generation This is used when outputting only the frequency data file a Ifthe file name is specified as outfile Saves the ouftfile to the curren
416. on not to be displayed nifile This option specifies a file name that is not to be displayed in the execution results Wild cards can be used in file One arbitrary character The arbitrary character sequences of zero or more characters Example ia File name that includes r e File name that includes e and two or more subsequent characters w h File name composed of two or more characters which starts with w and ends with h ni file This option specifies the name of the file in which file names that are not to be displayed in the execution results are defined o path This option specifies the output file path If this option is omitted the file is output to the current path cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 330 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 4 2 Cross reference The cxref cross reference options are shown below x file This option outputs the cross reference in text format to the specified file If file is
417. on speed rather than on the ROM capacity 44 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 2 Target code optimization options Wi 04 PM This option strictly analyzes the data flow and executes the most advanced optimization Specify this option in addition to the optimization option O Os or Ot to execute more advanced optimization Specifically this option executes optimization as follows Optimization of registers extending over a branch instruction Optimization of absolute value operations Optimization of a cmp instruction extending over a branch instruction Optimization of a return instruction extending over a branch instruction Depending on the source the result may be the same as that of Os or Ot The compiling time is longer than that of Os or Ot Wi P PM This option prevents optimization that allows branch destination labels to be aligned This option can reduce the size of the execution code It is useful when the Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed Ot is specified 3 File merging option Om When two or more files are specified at the same time this option merges the files The compiling speed will drop but the optimization application range of such as optimization between functions can be expanded by specifying this option together with the optimization option O Os or Ot However source debugging will become difficult 4 Inline expansion optimization control op
418. ontrol structure Macro created for a declaration statement 4 The input file can contain line number information and comment information 324 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 2 2 Output information The following information is output by cxref 1 Cross reference The cross reference outputs cross reference information for variables and functions that are used within the file for each file 2 Tag information The tag information outputs the definition file name and line number information tag jump information for variables and functions 3 Call tree The call tree outputs which functions are called by certain functions in tree format 4 Function metrics The function metrics output information about the function such as the number of lines and call frequency 5 Call database The call database outputs the functions called by a given function and the number of times each function is called by that function For details about each kind of information refer to 12 6 Output Files and following User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 325 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 3 Operation Method This section explains operations for cxref 12 3 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt Windows cxref option file Can be omitted Pattern in preceding can be repeated 12 3 2 Method using PM The Static performance anal
419. oot area When an address is specified the ext_table option is specified for the linker 3 Boot Object File This edit box is used to set a boot object file When a boot object file is specified the Wa zf option is passed to the compiler the zf option is passed to the assembler and the zf option is passed to the linker Note that in this edit box a space can be used in a folder name but not in a file name User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 75 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Device This tab is used to set options related to the device Figure 3 8 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box Device Tab Compiler Common Options By checking this check box 256MB mode is available When it is checked 256M option of the compiler the assembler and the linker is set Cancel Help 1 256M Byte Mode When this check box is checked the 256 M bytes mode is specified When it is checked the X256M option is passed to the compiler assembler and linker As a result the memory space is treated as a 256 M bytes space If this option is not specified the memory space is treated as a 64 M bytes space and addresses are resolved Set this option in accordance with the chipset to be used With the V850Ex core the physical address space has 256 M bytes in many cases Specify this option when an creating an application using a space between 64 M bytes and 256 M bytes 2 BPC Register This box is used to specify the higher address of
420. opens the Browse for Folder dialog box where the folder to which the analysis result is to be output can be selected The selected folder is displayed in Output folder In the Browse for Folder dialog box the default position is determined in the following sequence Folder of Analyze file on this tab 1 2 Path of Output folder on this tab 3 Analyze folder on the Cross reference tab 4 Install folder 3 Generate all analyzing files If this is checked the option contents are set as default contents This check box is checked in the default condition 4 Detail options Clicking this button opens the RAM map option dialog box for setting the RAM map options where the option of each function can be set 5 Other options Options can be directly specified in the edit box This box is blank in the default condition 6 Command Line Options A list of options is displayed rammap all is displayed in the default condition Clicking the Run button analyzes the specified file with the set options The analysis command in install folder is executed If no file is specified for analysis a message box is opened displaying a message indicating that no file is specified Depending on the result of the analysis a message box reporting normal or abnormal termination is opened The output message of the analysis command is output to file rammap log in the folder at the analysis result output destination or that i
421. option is not enough F8404 F option needs argument The number of arguments for the F option is not enough F8405 unknown option argument An argument that must not be specified for an option is specified F8406 option unknown option Option option must not be specified F8407 b option is specified more than once b option is specified more than once F8411 file illegal input file name Input file file cannot be input because its file name is the same as an output file name F8412 illegal input file type file file is archive file Input file file cannot be input because it is an archive file F8413 file bad magic Input file file cannot be input because it is illegal F8414 cannot open command file file Command file file cannot be opened F8415 nested command file file Command file file is nested It must not be nested F8416 file namename is too long The length of file name name exceeds the limit F8417 cannot find device file The device file cannot be found F8419 memory allocation fault The memory is insufficient 468 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F8420 file illegal section type section specified with p option Section section specified by the p option in file has a section attribute that must not be specified for the p option F8421 file illegal section type section specified with t option Section section specified by the t opt
422. or generating an object in the flash area To set this option use Create Flash Object or Create Flash Side Archive File check box on the Flash tab in the Compiler Common Options dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 135 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 5 1 Assembler Options dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following one tab is displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 4 1 Assembler Options Dialog Box Tab Description Option Setting of assembler options The following two tabs are displayed for a individual assembly language source file setting Table 4 2 Assembler Options Dialog Box Individual Source Tab Description Option Setting of assembler options Difference Indication of differences between the assembler options for the overall assembly lan guage sources and the individual source options Note The option shown with in this dialog box is the option that is activated from the command line 136 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER This tab is used to set assembler options Figure 4 2 Assembler Options Dialog Box Option Tab Assembler Options Option Include Search Path l Define Macro D Edit DE F Assemble List a j V Generate Debug Information g EA M Use Mask Register m l Do Optimization 0 I Verbose Mode v
423. or which stack size is maximum staring with the selected function In both the case the output format can also be chosen from text or CSV by specifying the file type in the Save As dialog box By default the text format is selected 1 Text format If the text format is selected the result is output in the form of call tree If there are multiple callee functions is placed between the caller and the calee If there is only one callee is placed Each line can contain up to 5119 characters the 5120th and subsequent characters are displayed in a new line The maximum number of output lines is 32767 If there are 32768 lines or more a warning message is dis played and output is aborted Information of each function is output in the following format Parameters in brackets are not output if unnec essary Function Auxiliary Mark Total Stack Size Frame Size Adjustment Information Table 14 9 Description for Each Parameter Parameter Description Function This parameter indicates the function name defined in the C language source If the corresponding C source file is not found the name is bracketed or in the form of Symbol where Symbol is the symbol name in the intermediate assembly language file from which the prefix _ removed When the function is a static function the function name is preceded with the file name without path and or file name function name User
424. ores and model specific magic numbers are defined for various device files to establish associations among the device core The as850 references the device files and embeds the magic numbers Object files that operate device specific peripheral function registers etc should not be used as common files among cores If a target device is specified by the cpu option or option quasi directive and then the cn cnv850e cnv850e2 option is specified a core common object including information peculiar to the target device can be created However an object having device specific information different from that of the target device does not operate correctly Check in advance that the device specific information can be used with the intended target device The V850Ex core is upwardly compatible with the V850 core Source files that are used with the V850 core can be used with the V850Ex core In such cases specify the cn option or the cnv850e option before creating an object The object common to V850 core that is created with cn can be linked with a V850Ex core object Note that an object that is created with cnv850e cannot be linked with a V850 core object The V850E2 core is upwardly compatible with the V850 core V850Ex core Source files that are used with the V850 core V850Ex core can be used with the V850E2 core In such cases specify the cn option cnv850e option or cnv850e2 option before creating an object The object co
425. orm output the data in CSV format 1 Text format output example If the m option is specified the function metrics are output in text format The default output file name is cmeasure st The text format output is as follows Figure 12 13 Function Metrics Text Format Output Example cxref Command input insertitem apl split apl insertsub apl insert apl removeitem apl moveright apl moveleft apl combin apl restore apl deletesub apl delete apl printtree apl main apl is Flie newpage apl search apl is is cxref m apli c ann nan o 0 0 0 Qa a8 a aaa a Line 27 38 55 68 87 109 119 128 146 164 183 195 217 231 248 Called 2 OW e W NN FP RP DN FP NEU e Explanation of Output Contents 1 Flie File name Indicates the name of the source file in which that function is defined 2 Line Starting line Indicates the line number in the source file at which that function is defined 3 Called Call histogram Indicates the frequency with which that function was called The frequencies that are output are based on the assumption that the function is called once for each function call description 360 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 CSV format output example If the mc option is specified the function metrics are output in CSV format A CSV format file can be read by spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel
426. ormat CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER The following are examples of dis850 output gt dis850 A a out Address Offset Opecode _mMain 0x00000000 0x00000000 45D5 br _main 0x8a 0x00000002 0x00000002 D800 mov zero r27 0x00000004 0x00000004 E6230000 movea 0 sp r28 0x00000008 0x00000008 301C mov r28 r6 0x0000000A 0x0000000A FF800176 jarl _getToken pc lp 0x0000000E 0x0000000E 580A mov r10 r11 0x00000010 0x00000010 5A7F cmp 0x1 r11 0x00000012 0x00000012 1D92 bz _main 0x44 0x00000014 0x00000014 EE2003E8 movea 0x3e8 zero r29 0x00000018 0x00000018 D9FD cmp 29 27 0x0000001A O0x0000001A 15DE bge _main 0x44 0x0000001C 0x0000001C 301C mov r28 r6 0x0000001E 0x0000001E FF800000 jarl Oo pc lp 0x00000022 0x00000022 580A mov PLOP ELET 0x00000024 0x00000024 501B mov r27 r10 0x00000026 0x00000026 52C2 shl 0x2 r10 0x00000028 0x00000028 66230020 movea 0x20 sp r12 0x0000002C 0x0000002C 61CA add r10 r12 0x0000002E 0x0000002E 5F6C0001 st w r11 O r12 0x00000032 0x00000032 DA41 add Ox1 r27 0x00000034 0x00000034 301C mov r28 r6 0x00000036 0x00000036 FF80014A jarl _getToken pc lp 0x0000003A 0x0000003A 580A mov r10 r11 0x0000003C 0x0000003C 5A7F cmp 0x1 r11 0x0000003E 0x0000003E 05B2 bz _main 0x44 Among the information in the file a out the dis850 displays addresses offsets codes according to instruction format and titles along with assembly language instructions Registers are displayed usin
427. ormation has been output If this option is omitted ce3 is assumed cfistring This option specifies for string the function name for which the call tree is to be output cf file This option specifies the text file which contains specifications of the function names for which a call tree is to be output clnum This option specifies the output level Any number from 1 to 255 can be specified for num If this option is omitted 255 is assumed cp This option includes the arguments and return value in the output cr This option includes reference information in the output cs This option includes the source file name and description starting line in the output cstd This option outputs the text format call tree to standard output ct This option outputs only the first tree User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 333 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 4 5 Function metrics The cxref function metrics options are shown below m file This option outputs the function metrics in text format to the specified file If file is omitted cmeasure I st is assumed for the file name mc file This option outputs the function metrics in CSV format to the specified file If file is omitted cmeasure csv is assumed for the file name mall file This option outputs the function metrics in text format and CSV format to the specified files The file names are file Ist and file csv If an extensio
428. ote Data section with initial value which is to be allocated to RAM and text section for internal RAM Format int _rcopy2 amp label number unsigned long label long number Description _rcopy2 amp label number copies the initial value data of section number number to be copied or text to be allocated to RAM to the RAM area 2 bytes at a time based on the information in the rompsec section allocated starting at the address following the address indicated by label If 1 is specified as number all sections in the rompsec section are copied Section number number is a positive number that starts from 1 By default sections are allocated in the order in which they appear in the input file If sections to be allocated to the rompsec section are specified by the p or t option of the romp850 they are allocated in the order in which they are specified If a ROM section file is created with PM however a C language source header file that makes number and label correspond to each other by define is generated and number can be specified by a label name For a specific example refer to 6 5 2 Example Return value 0 Normal completion if copied correctly 1 Abnormal termination if not copied correctly Cautions Data is not copied if the address indicated by label is not at the start of the rompsec section _rcopy2 copies data in accordance with the information generated by the romp850
429. ote The padding size is 0 to 3 bytes per section depending on the alignment condition of the section subject to ROMization User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 209 CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 3 3 rompsec section and link directive During ROMization a rompsec section is added immediately after the text section By allocating the text section to the end of ROM therefore the rompsec section up to the end of ROM can be allocated Figure 6 3 Link Directive Taking ROMization Processing into Consideration Allocates SCONST CONST and TEXT to internal ROM SCONST LOAD R sconst S PROGBITS A sconst CONST LOAD R const SPROGBITS A const Allocates text to end of internal ROM TEXT LOAD RX pro_epi_runtime PROGBITS AX pro_epi_ runtime text SPROGBITS AX text bs Allocates DATA to external RAM DATA LOAD RX V0x100000 data SPROGBITS AW sdata S PROGBITS AWG sbss SNOBIT AWG bss SNOBIT AW Fa Allocates SIDATA to internal RAM SIDATA LOAD RX VOxffe000 sidata PROGBITS AW sidata sibss SNOBIT AWG sibss As __tp TEXT TP_SYMBOL __gp DATA GP_SYMBOL amp tp TEXT DATA __ep DATA EP_SYMBOL If the rompsec section exceeds the internal ROM area the following message is output and the processing is stopped F8425 rompsec section overflowed highest address of target machine By specifying the rom_le
430. out observing the restriction on the character string length Check this check box if many options are set and not all of them can be recognized Under the default setting the check box is not checked For the details of command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 4 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to Button a Delete Source Option button This button can be selected when option settings for individual source files have been made and is not displayed is dimmed and cannot be selected when options for the overall project have been specified When selected this button deletes any option specified for a particular source file and applies only global options 110 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Difference This tab is used to display the differences between the options for the overall project and individual source options Figure 3 24 Compiler Options Dialog Box Difference Tab Compiler Options sample c General Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Detail of Optimization Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others Difference Same Option cpu 3201 Fo c sa Project Whole Option Only Source Individual Option Only s Command Line Option L 3201 Fo c sample g 1 Same Option Options set as options for
431. output when linking is completed Since output is via standard output use the console s redirect function to set file output If the mo option is specified display in the old format of CA850 Ver 2 60 or earlier A file name is specified as the m file option or the mo file option to output to a file 5 5 2 When starting from PM Go to the Tool Linker Options menu and select the Option tab then check the Output Link Map m option to set link map output The output destination is the specified file if file output has been specified or if not the PM s output window 5 5 3 Link map output example Link map output examples are shown below Figure 5 13 shows an example of the link map that is output when object files have been linked Objects crtN o main o func o libc a standard library 178 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM Link Map Output CHAPTER 5 LINKER Figure 5 13 Link Map Output Example KKKKKKKKKK MEMORY AL OCATION MAP KKKKKKKKKK OUTPUT SEGMENT VIRTUAL SIZE 16 SEGMENT ATTRIBUTE ADDRESS TEXT RX 0x00000000 0x00000082 DATA RW 0x00000088 0x00000018 1 2 3 4 4ee LINK EDITOR ALLOCATION MAP OUTPUT INPUT VIRTUAL SIZE SECTION SECTION ADDRESS text 0x00000000 0x00000082 text 0x00000000 0x0000001a text 0x0000001c 0x0000002c text 0x00000048 0x00000018 text 0x00000060 0x00000022 sdata 0x00000088 0x0000
432. ox is checked this option cannot be selected 16 Rescan Library File rescan This option specifies whether the library file specified by Library I on the Library tab is to be rescanned When this option is specified symbols left unresolved because of the link sequence of the library can be prevented 17 Ignore Internal ROM Check rom_less This option does not check the location for the internal ROM area This option does not output a warning message to the address of the internal ROM area even if the application allocations are overlapped Specify this option in the ROMless mode Unnecessary warning messages will not be output 18 Warn Internal Memory Overflow Ximem_overflow warning This option controls checking when the internal ROM RAM overflows In case of an overflow a warning message is output and linking is continued If this option is omitted an error message is output and linking is stopped if an overflow occurs 19 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 176 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER This tab is used to set other options of the linker Figure 5 12 Linker Options Dialog Box Others Tab Linker Options File Library Option Others Any Option l MV Use Command File Command Line Options ie 3201 Cancel Help 1 Any Option This edit bo
433. ox is output when the section is changed and the OK or Apply button is clicked c Output The file is output when the Output button is clicked When the file has been output a message box is displayed regardless of whether outputting has been successful or has failed As many of the following define directives as the number of sections are output in the ROM section file define ROMPSCN lt section name gt lt section number gt All the characters that cannot be used as an identifier of the preprocessor are replaced by _ identifier exists a message box is displayed and the file cannot be output If the same 4 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 234 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR This tab is used to set romp850 options Figure 6 13 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box Option Tab ROM Processor Options File Section Option Others Entry Label b l F Delete text Attribute Section d F Ignore Address Duplication i F Output Memory Mapf m I Ignore Internal ROM Check rom_less War Internal Memory Overflow Simem_overflow warning Command Line Options Sg OK Cancel Help Da 1 Entry Label b This option sets the specified label value as the start address of the rompsec section to be created If the speci
434. pecified executable object file The memory layout visualization tool of the C compiler package is rammap This tool outputs the memory map information of values to a text format file and CSV format file Figure 13 1 Flow of Operation in rammap _ gt rammap Executable object file Output information 2 Memory map table Text file CSV format file or standard output 366 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 13 2 Input Output 13 2 1 Input file The input file of rammap is an executable object fileNote out file output by the Id850 Note Does not include a re linkable object file or a file out file output by the romp850 13 2 2 Output information The information that is output by rammap is a memory map that shows the variable names sizes and memory layout 1 Memory map table A memory map that shows the variable names sizes and memory layout is output For details about this information refer to 13 6 Output Files and following User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 367 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY LAYOUT VISUALIZATION TOOL 13 3 Operation Method This section explains operations for rammap 13 3 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt Windows rammap option file Can be omitted 13 3 2 Method using PM The RAM map can be used in PM with the following two methods 1 Using in the Static performanc
435. pecifies the name of a function whose stack size to be adjusted in the same form as displayed by the stk850 or in the form of a symbol name in intermediate assembly language source The name displayed by the stk850 is a function name defined in C language source files If the C source file which includes the definition of the function is not found e g in the case that the function is written in assembly language or a library function the function name is placed in brackets If the function is a static function the function name is preceded with the file name without path and or file name function name ADD size This parameter specifies the value to be added to the stack size analyzed by the stk850 For size specify a non negative decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox The value is added to the stack size If 0 is specified for a func tion whose stack size is unknown the result of calculation does not change but the function becomes the same as to have the stack whose size is 0 402 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER Table 14 11 Description for Each Parameter Parameter Description RECTIME time This parameter specifies recursion depth which is the number of times the function is to be called in a recursive call chain for a recursive function For time specify a positive a decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox The stack size is
436. pen the Save As dialog box with the a Save button and save the disassemble result of the object file specified in File List By default it is saved as object file name dis in the same folder as the object file specified in File List 318 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER Also with the 2 Browse Save button the disassemble result can be saved by specifying the object file In this case the Open dialog box is opened so specify the object file By default folders specified in previous Open dialog boxes or project folders are displayed When an object file is specified in the Open dialog box the disassemble result for the specified object file is saved in the same way as clicking the 1 Save button 2 3 Save Open After saving the disassemble result with the 1 Save or 2 Browse Save button this specifies whether or not to open the file which was saved with the editor set in PM It is selected by default 3 Output Items Select items to be output as disassemble results using the check boxes a Specific Items A This outputs particular items specified with the A option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the A option b Address a This outputs the address specified with the a option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the a option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified c Codef c This outputs
437. perations are the same as the following operations gt ca850 cpu 3201 E DDEBUG I myinc main c gt main i gt ca850 cpu 3201 E DDEBUG I myinc sub c gt sub i gt cxref t main i sub i dident This option specifies an identifier that is handled as a type name d file This option specifies the name of a file in which an identifier that is handled as a type name is defined file file This option specifies the name of a file in which the following information is defined 1 File name that is not to be displayed in execution results 2 Identifier name that is not to be displayed in execution results 3 Identifier name that is to be handled as a type name When file file and ni are specified at the same time the contents of NolncludeFile in file of the previously specified file file option are invalid File format specified as ni i d file options The ni i d options read the corresponding section information and the file option reads all the section information The three sections below can be described NolncludeFile section DefinitionType section 328 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Ignoreldent section If a line begins with the line is regarded as a comment 1 NolncludeFile section This section specifies information that is not displayed as an analysis result for each file This section mainly describes Include files A file na
438. played archive header contents This option outputs the dump850 version number to standard output and then terminates processing This option displays the archive header contents of all members existing in the specified archive file This option displays the contents of debug information This option displays the contents of the string table num This option displays data from the section indicated by the section header table index num num This option displays data up to the section indicated by the section header table index num This option displays the contents of members other than archive symbol table archive string table or object file existing in the specified archive file f This option displays the ELF header contents of all members existing in the specified archive file This option displays the external symbol contents of the archive symbol table existing in the specified archive file h This option displays the contents of all section headers existing in the specified archive file This option displays the contents of all program headers existing in the specified archive file User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 295 CHAPTER 10 DUMP COMMAND This option displays the contents of the global pointer table This option displays the line number information m This option displays the contents of strings existing in the archive string table for the specified archive file n name This option disp
439. pression following if User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 417 APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2155 compiler limit too many conditional inclusion nestings num The number of nesting levels between if and endif exceeds the limit The maximum value for this processing system is 255 E2156 misplaced else or elif The position of else or elif is inappropriate E2157 misplaced endif The position of endif is inappropriate E2159 illegal include directive syntax The description of include is incorrect E2164 unexpected non whitespace before preprocessing directive A character other than a blank character exists before the preprocessing command E2165 unrecognized pragma directive pragma directive ignored pragma directive is not recognized This pragma directive is ignored E2170 illegal integral floating constant The notation of the integer floating point constant is incorrect E2171 constant out of range The specified constant value exceeds the specifiable range E2173 illegal octal digit The coding of an octal number contains an error E2174 illegal hexadecimal digit The coding of a hexadecimal number contains an error E2175 octal digit out of range The specified octal number exceeds the specifiable range E2177 empty character constant The character constant is vacant E2178 illegal binary digit The coding of a binary number contains an error E22
440. ption of the variable information of the section file is illegal E2715 illegal function variable name symbol Symbol symbol is an illegal function name or variable name E2716 Section name is not specified A section name is not specified E2717 unrecognized section name section Illegal section name section is specified E2746 Too long section name 256 The section name is too long Specify the name using no more than 256 characters E2747 inconsistent section name for symbol The section name contradicts the symbol symbol E2749 Function function is already defined without _ multi_interrupt Although the function function is specified as multiple interrupt function function has been already defined without a multiple interrupt specification E2750 Both interrupt and multi interrupt attributes are specified Normal interrupt and multiple interrupt must not be specified at the same time E2751 Both RTOS interrupt and multi interrupt attributes are specified RTOS interrupt and multiple interrupt must not be specified at the same time E2752 cannot call function function Function function cannot be called E2760 unknown cpu type cannot use directive directive cannot be used because a target device is not specified E2781 result of comparison is always false The result of the comparison expression is false 426 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E
441. ption when the target device of the V850 core is specified or when a V850 core common object is created this option is ignored and the p option is valid If this option is specified with the p option when the target device of the V850Ex core V850E2 core is specified or when a V850Ex core V850E2 core common object is created both this option and the p option are valid PM This option displays the as850 s execution status to standard error output PM This option does not output a warning message in the following cases 1 Ifr1 has been specified as the source register or the destination register 2 If rO0 has been specified as the destination register 3 If r20 or r21 has been specified as the destination register when using the mask register function wstring wstring PM This option specifies output or suppression of a warning message for each message regardless of whether the w option is specified If is specified the message is output If is specified message output is suppressed The following character string can be specified as string rO If rO is specified as the destination register r1 If r1 is specified as the source or destination An error occurs if neither nor is specified Xfar_ jump V850E2 PM When a V850E2 core is specified as the device type in the assembler far jump is specified for branch instructions jarl jr that do not include 22 32 To chan
442. ptions Setting Note that this option outputs a frequency information file of variables in a C language source file but does not output a frequency information file of an assembly language source file 4 Preprocessed Source This check box is used to execute only preprocessing on a C language source program and to output the result to a file whose file is the name of the C language source file with extension c replaced by i The line number and file name of the source program are not output 5 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 99 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Output Code This tab is used to set options related to the output code Figure 3 20 Compiler Options Dialog Box Output Code Tab Compiler Options General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others By EE wicca Packing Of Structs sconst Section Allocation Defautobyte x I Allocate Data Xsconst Use Pointer Byte Access Xbyte 1 pee Output Source Comment Xc I Inline Expansion of strepyf lt i Register Mode Change Jump Code of Interruption lt j 32 Register Mode X I Use Mask Register xXmask_reg F No Word Access bit Opt Xno_word_bitop Prologue Epilogue Ru
443. ptions and file names for commands as command line arguments they can be specified in a command file The ca850 treats the contents of a command file as if they were command line arguments In the command file the arguments to be specified can be coded over several lines However options and file names must not be coded over more than one line Command files cannot be nested In the command file the following characters are treated as special characters double quotation mark The character string until the next double quotation mark is treated as a contiguous character string sharp If specified at the beginning of a line characters on that line until the end of the line are treated as a comment circumflex The character immediately following this is not treated as a special character The special characters themselves are not included in the command line of the ca850 for which a command file is specified but deleted Remark With the as850 ar850 hx850 dump850 dis850 and romp850 only double quotation mark can be used Example of command file Dtest Describes define test o object Specifies an object file name ave Specifies the file to be compiled Example of command file specification gt type cfile cpu 3201 c Os file c Contents of command file gt ca850 cfile Same operation as ca850 cpu 3201 c Os file c 116 User s Manu
444. ptions for the overall C language sources and the individual source options User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to set options that are often used for the compiler Figure 3 11 Compiler Options Dialog Box General Tab Compiler Options Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Vv Commot I Assembler Source Fs f Optimization Level Default Optimization I Assemble LAF V Generate Debug Information a Warning Level Output Source Comment Xc Level 1 hd l Verbose Mode v Define Macro D Command Line Option e 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Use Common Optimization Option This check box is valid when Individual source option is set It specifies whether optimization specified in Optimization Level below this check box is used or not as optimization that is performed on individual sources If this check box is checked optimization of the level specified by a global option is applied to the target source When Set global option is specified this check box is dimmed and cannot be specified 2 Optimization Level Select the optimization level to be used from the drop down list This option is the same as the item set for Optimization on the Optimization and Debug Information tab The following types of
445. put default or a text file When information is output to a file the default output file name is ctags Figure 12 10 Tag Information Output Example cxref Command input cxref t apli c apli c 163 G F combine apli c 216 G F delete apli c 22 G V deleted apli c 194 G F deletesub apli c 22 G V done apli c 108 G F insert apli c 54 G F insertitem apli c 86 G F insertsub apli c 21 G V key The information is output in alphabetical order of the identifiers Five types of information are output sequentially from left to right on each line 1 File name Indicates the name of the file in which the variable or function is defined 2 Line number Indicates the location of the variable or function definition 3 Linkage and storage class The linkage and storage class are indicated by the following symbols G Static external variable or function having external linkage Static external variable function or static variable within a function having internal linkage Unknown 4 Type The type is indicated by the following symbols Function V Variable Unknown User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 355 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 5 Identifier name The identifier name is the function name or variable name itself However since duplicate names may exist for variables that are defined within functions identifier names are indicated in the format function
446. put Output Files With the as850 the following file can be specified as an input file e file s assembly language source file called the s file The file name of the relocatable object file generated by the as850 has extension o instead of s Any kind of characters that can be recognized in Windows can be specified as a file name however cannot be used for the beginning of a file name because is regarded as a command option The name of a file folder or folder that includes a space cannot be used If the Kanji code of the file is EUC a file name folder name or folder name in Japanese cannot be used If the relocatable object file created by the as850 includes an unresolved external reference its relocation remains unresolved An executable object file resolving all relocations called the execution format is created by linking the relocatable object file via the linker Id850 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 125 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 3 Operation Method This section explains how to operate the as850 4 3 1 Command input method The as850 is started from the ca850 under the default settings but it can also be started in the following format Enter the following from the command prompt as850 option file name option Can be omitted Pattern in preceding can be repeated 4 3 2 Method using PM The Assembler Options dialog box that is used to set assembler options for
447. put and the character is permitted 10 _asm A warning may be output and asm is treated as a function call However __asm is valid If this option is not specified asm is treated as an assembler insert 11 _ STDC__ A macro with a value of 1 is defined If this option is not specified the macro name is not defined as a macro 12 Binary constant Unusable If this option is not specified a string that consists of Ob or OB followed by one or more 0 or 1 is handled as a binary constant User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 7 Library specification Library specification options are shown below Ldir This option searches libraries starting in the folder dir then in the standard folder Only the standard folder is searched if this option is omitted The standard folder is the install folder lib850 folder and install folder lib850 r32 folder If the register mode is specified however r22 or r26 folder is searched instead of r32 folder Refer to the description of the L option of the Id850 R file When startup goes as far as the Id850 the startup module to be used is indicated to the Id850 as file For details of the startup module refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual If this option is omitted crtN o in the standard folder is used as the startup module The standard folder is the install folder lib850 r32 r26 or r22 lstring This option specifies the archive file that is referenc
448. r s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE oe W9652 too long identifier s d Identifier s exceeds d characters W9653 specified function s not found No description related to specified function s W9654 section not found in s No description related to section in file s specified by file s W9655 DefinitionType section not found in s No description related to DefinitionType section in file s specified by d s W9656 Ignoreldent section not found in s No description related to Ignoreldent section in file s specified by i s W9657 NoIncludeFile section not found in s No description related to NotIncludeFile section in file s specified by ni C9690 s Compile error s generated C9691 null pointer access Access to NULL pointer attempted C9692 index out of range Access beyond array range attempted User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 483 APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 12 Memory layout visualization tool F9700 s Error detected F9701 Ss can t open File failed to open F9702 s can t seek File seek failed F9703 s can t read File read failed F9704 Ss can t write File write failed F9705 no memory Memory securement failed F9706 s is not ELF executable file File s not ELF executable format F9707 input file nothing Input file not specified F9708 too many files File to be analyzed is redundantl
449. rce ile Object file with modified allocation of variables Section file 1 Compile once using Xcre_sec_data option to create a section file 2 Use the sf850 to convert the frequency information file into a section file 3 Edit the section file if necessary 4 Compile once more using Xsec_file option to input the section file For description of the section file s format refer to 9 2 Section File Format The variables whose allocation can be specified via section files are external variables global variables static variables in files static variables that are declared within a file and static variables in functions static variables that are declared within a function Allocation specifications cannot be made using character string constants such as abc User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 273 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR When compiling each of several C language source files and linking them to create an object file compile each file after specifying its frequency information output which creates several sec files However when creating these section files the sec files must be input to the sf850 all at once and then integrated Otherwise the variable information for the external variables will not be integrated and valid section files cannot be created The variable specified by the section file is equivalent to specifying pragma section Therefore a temporary definition of an external variable
450. re OK OK OK OK OK a e 2 me V850E MS1 Eee se OK eee a A nae A V850E1 core am Ge ae OK OK e OK V850ES core a aa aes os aan Remark A Affected OK Corrected for the newest version uPD70 F 3xxx not including maintenance or obsolete products Not affected The types and meanings of num are as follows For the instructions and registers refer to the relevant device s architecture manual 1 1 Xv850patch 1 p1 Insert a nop instruction immediately after the first Id w in relation to the combination of Id w instruction st b h w sst b h w Id b w sld b w instruction branch instruction Example ld w ld w sst w nop jarl sst w jarl 2 2 Xv850patch 2 p2 Insert a nop instruction between the load store instruction and branch instruction in relation to the combination of Id w sld w st w sst w instruction branch instruction Example ld w ld w jarl nop jarl If the pattern of num 1 is processed at the same time the pattern of num 2 is searched and processed first An unnecessary nop instruction does not need to be inserted 3 3 Xv850patch 3 p3 This inserts the clr1 instruction in relation to the corresponding interrupt control register immediately before the reti instruction Example reti clr1 5 POICO reti User s Manual U18512EJ1
451. ree with type7 of the dummy argument upon declaration of a function W2293 Type specifier of argument name is missing The type specifier of dummy argument name declared in the function definition is omitted int type is assumed This warning message is error message E2292 when the ansi option is specified W2302 illegal bit field type A type that cannot be specified with the ANSI specifications is specified for a bit field Padding is executed under the alignment condition of the specified type This warning message is error message E2301 when the ansi option is specified This warning message is output only when w2 is specified W2306 The bit field object name is put into the next unit The bit field name is located in the next area because it exceeds the boundary This warning message is output only when w2 is specified W2373 used amp for member of packed structure An address is used for a member of the structure that has been packed Remark If either of the conditions below apply to structural packing performed data loss or truncation could arise in accessing structure member addresses since data access is performed by masking addresses according to the device s data alignment Using a device that does not support misaligned access Using a device that supports misaligned access but prohibits it 436 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE Example struct test char c offset
452. rite to file file W1111 sorry not implemented option option ignored Option option is not supported It is ignored W1112 G option needs size gt 0 ignored A size must be specified for the G option It is assumed that has been specified W1114 file file with unknown suffix passed to ld File file is a file with an unknown suffix It is passed to the Id850 W1116 sorry suffix file not supported ignored File with suffix suffix is not supported It is ignored W1119 option1 option overrides option2 option Option option2 becomes invalid because option option is specified W1120 option1 option obsolete use option2 instead Option option is an option from an older version Use option option2 instead W1123 Xcre_sec_ data option ignored for Xcre_sec_data_only option Xcre_sec_data option becomes invalid because Xcre_sec_data_only option is specified W1126 cn ption must be used with V850 core used cnv850e option instead Option cn must be used with a V850 core device Instead option cnv850e is used W1127 option option is not supported for V850 core Option option is not supported by a V850 core device User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 433 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W1128 cannot find programmable peripheral I O registers ignored A programmable peripheral I O register cannot be found The option is ignored W1129 cnv850e option must be used with V850E core
453. rl Command Line Option ie 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Use of Assembler Options This check box specifies whether the options of Assembler Options dialog box instead of the assembler options on this page are used when assembling a C language source file When it is checked the options of Assembler Options dialog box are used 2 Include Search Path Wa I This edit box is used to specify the path of an include file To specify two or more paths delimit each with semicolon This option cannot be set for an individual source it is always set as a global option Note that in addition to the path set by this option an option set for the system may be set as a command line option By selecting the Edit button the Edit Option dialog box can be displayed and the path can be edited in this dialog box 3 Define Macro Wa D This edit box is used to set a defined macro To specify two or more macros delimit each with semicolon By selecting the Edit button the Edit Option dialog box can be displayed and the macro can be edited in this dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 107 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 4 Generate Debug Information Wa g This check box specifies whether debug information is to be generated If it is checked the effect is the same as specifying the Wa g option 5 Do Optimization Wa O This check box specifies whether optimization is to be executed If
454. rmation When this box is checked the reference information of the function is displayed This box is not checked in the default condition 9 Omission method This field specifies the method of omission No omission Does not omit the analysis result Omit same level Does not output a function at the same level on the tree Omit output once Does not output a function that has been output once default Button a Set default option button This button returns the current setting of the dialog box to the default status If Generate all analyzing files is checked on the Cross reference tab however Normal format and CSV format remain on 348 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Function measure This tab is used to the function measure Figure 12 7 Cross reference option Dialog Box Function measure Tab Cross reference option Common option Cross reference list Tag information Call graph Function measure Call database Output format 7 File name AMESA Default A File name cmeasure csv Default Sort method Sort direction C C Function name E nie nameruncuon nama No sort Set default option Cancel Help 1 Output format If Normal format is checked the analysis result of the leaf list is output in the text format It is not checked in the default condition Specify a file to which the analysis result is to be output in t
455. ronics as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries 2 NEC Electronics products means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics as defined above M8E 02 11 1 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM MEMO User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM INTRODUCTION Target Devices The CA850 is a C compiler package used to create object codes for NEC Electronics s V850 Series of RISC microcontrollers This manual explains the features and functions of the CA850 C Compiler Package Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to develop application systems using the V850 Series C Compiler Package Purpose This manual explains how to operate each command such as the C compiler and assembler included in each package on Windows PM Windows version only is provided with this C compiler package However for how to operate PM as an integrated development environment refer to the PM user s manual For the Windows operations refer to the function guides provided with the Windows OS Organization This manual is organized into the following sections e Overview of the CA850 e Using the CA850 from the command line e Using the CA850 from Project Manager e Command functions options and output messages Commands Included in This Package C compiler ca850 Assembler as850 Linker Id850 ROMization processor romp850 Hexadecimal con
456. rst If two variables have the same size they are arranged in order of highest use frequency User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 285 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR V PM This option displays the section file generator s execution process cfile PM This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file Cautions 286 Some of the above options are invalid if specified concurrently with other options If two or more options related to sorting o or cl are specified the one specified last is valid and the others are invalid If V h and or help are specified at the same time the one specified first is valid and the others are invalid lf O and an option related to sorting are specified at the same time O is valid and the option related to sorting is invalid The CA850 s output that results when frequency information files are input to the sf850 should be used as itis Operation is not guaranteed if a frequency information file with modified content has been input For description of the contents of s
457. rtain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electron
458. s a load module file To use the CA850 a device file that has device information is necessary Obtain the device file corresponding to the device to be used User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 21 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 Operating Environments The Windows version C compiler package operates under the following environments 1 Host machine CPU Pentium IITM 400MHz or higher Memory 128 M bytes or more OS Windows 2000 Windows XP Professional Windows XP Home Edition Caution Regardless of which OS is used higher and the latest Service Pack must be installed 2 Related development tools Integrated debugger ID850 Ver 3 10 or later ID850NW Ver 3 10 or later or ID850QB Ver 3 10 or later System simulator SM850 Ver 3 00 or later or SM for V850 Ver 2 00 or later Performance analysis tuning tool TW850 Ver 2 10 or later Real time OS RX850 Ver 3 20 or later RX850 Pro Ver 3 20 or later Task debugger RD850 Ver 3 20 or later RD850 Pro Ver 3 20 or later System performance analyzer AZ850 Ver 3 30 or later Device file installer DFINST Ver 3 10 or later Caution To use the CA850 a device file which includes the device information is required Download the device file of target device to be used from the following web site http www necel com micro ods eng index html 22 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION This chapter describes the installation and unin
459. s not displayed is dimmed and cannot be selected when options for the overall project have been specified When selected this button deletes any option specified for a particular source file and applies only global options 142 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 6 Assemble List This section describes the assemble list An assemble list is a list formatted version of the code that is produced when the source has been compiled and assembled It can be used to check the code resulting from compilation and assembly 4 6 1 Output method The assemble list can be output as follows 1 Command input When the a option has been specified the assemble list is output via standard output If the a option is specified along with the I option which specifies an output file name the assemble list is output to the specified file When using the CA850 to compile the C language source if the output assemble list has been specified along with output source comment via the Xc option the C language source line that corresponds to the code appears as comments in the assemble list However the code line and source line may not correspond if optimization has been forced 2 PM Specify Assemble List a l via the Assembler Options dialog box The list is output to a file and the file name extension is changed to v When compiling the C language source if Assemble List Fv has been specified via the Compi
460. s option increases the size of the buffer used by the preprocessor it does not specify the exact capacity of a buffer to be secured such as how many characters F2121 compiler limit too many macro definitions num The number of macro definitions exceeds the limit The maximum number of macro definitions for this processing system is num F2122 compiler limit too long macro name name num The length of the macro name name is too long The maximum macro name length for this processing system is 1023 F2128 redeclared macro parameter name The parameter name of a macro is redefined F2153 unexpected non whitespace before preprocessing directive A character other than a blank character exists before a preprocessing directive F2154 undefined control The description of the preprocessing directive following is incorrect F2158 compiler limit too many include nestings num The number of nesting levels in the include directive exceeds the limit The maximum number of nesting levels for this processing system is 50 F2160 errmsg The error indicated by errmsg has occurred This message is displayed if the error directive is used in the source program F2230 compiler limit initialization nests too deep num The nesting of the initializer list is too deep The maximum depth value for this processing system is 100 levels F2410 compiler limit too many case labels num The number of case labe
461. s violated with this address and size used In the Intel extended hex format a value that can be expressed is 20 bits or 1 M byte 0x100000 W8737 The start address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that can be expressed in the Intel expanded hex format If the message W8737 is output the start address of the area to be converted into the hex format exceeds 1 M byte W8735 The address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that can be expressed in the Intel expanded hex format If the message W8735 is output the address to be converted into the hex format exceeds 1 M byte 20 bits The above error occurs in the following cases even if 1 M byte is not exceeded Example An offset that starts from the address specified by the d option is not used The absolute address is stored in the hex format A section is allocated in the vicinity of the upper limit of the address that can be expressed by 20 bits The start address fits in 20 bits but 20 bits are exceeded in the middle of the section If these two patterns are satisfied the message W8735 is output even if the area to be converted is as small as 4 bytes User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 7 6 2 Motorola S type A file in the Motorola S type hex format consists of five recordsNe 1 S0 record as a header record 2 S3 records as data records and S8 S7 records as end r
462. s well as the ROMization procedure operation method etc 6 1 Flow of Operation When a variable is declared globally within a program the variable is allocated to the data attribute section in RAM if the variable has a default value or to the bss attribute section if it does not have a default value When the variable has a default value that default value is also stored in RAM In addition program code may be stored in the internal RAM area to speed up applications In the case of an embedded system if a debug tool such as an in circuit emulator is used executable modules can be downloaded and executed just as they are in the allocation image However if the program is actually written to the target system s ROM area before being executed the default value information that has been allocated to the data attribute section and the program code that has been allocated to a RAM area must be deployed in RAM prior to execution In other words data that is residing in RAM must be deployed in ROM and this means that data must be copied from ROM to RAM before the corresponding application is executed The romp850 ROMization processor is a tool that takes default value information for variables in data attribute sections as well as programs allocated to RAM and packs them into a single section This section is allocated in ROM and the default value information or program code it contains can be easily deployed in RAM by calling the copy function
463. scription size size is the Additional Margin in Adjust Stack Size dialog box or the size specified with ADD in the stack size specification file and shown in the form of a decimal number time time is the recursion depth of a recursive function It is the Recursion Depth in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or the value specified with RECTIME in the stack size specification file and shown in the form of a decimal number a Example in which all the call chains are output main 800 80 sub1 720 240 sub2 480 200 sub3 280 280 sub31 160 160 sub11 500 30 20 10 sub11 500 30 20 10 sub12 amp 400 200 sub21 200 200 f c sub13 300 250 50 sub14 50 50 sub15 b Example in which the call chain with the maximum stack is output main 800 80 sub1 720 240 sub2 480 200 sub3 280 280 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 2 CSV format If the CSV format is selected the content is the same as that in the text format but in the following form where Unlike the text a call chain is composed of function names each element of their information separated by format however the CSV format outputs a warning message without starting a new line when the number of characters per line or the number of lines exceeds the limit and output is aborted Information of each functions is
464. se instruction is illegal It is assumed that only the valid lower digits have been specified and assembly is continued W3016 illegal operand access width mismatch An on chip peripheral I O register with a different access width is specified as an operand W3017 base register is ep r30 only ep is not specified for the base register of the sld sst instruction W3018 illegal regID for inst Accessing the system register of the number specified for the inst instruction is prohibited W3019 illegal operand immediate must be multiple of 4 The value specified as the operand must be a multiple of 4 Fractions are rounded down and assembly is continued 448 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W3020 duplicated cpu type ignored option cpu The target device specified by the cpu option is different from that specified by the option quasi directive The cpu option takes precedence and the target device specified by the option quasi directive is ignored W3021 string already specified ignored A number different from the number of registers previously specified is specified for string The number already specified is used and this specification is ignored W3022 duplicated option ignored option is specified more than once The option already specified is used This specification is ignored W3023 BPC value is out of range 0x0 value ignored bpc option The value specified for bpc is outsid
465. se this area to set the level of warning messages to be output No Output w Suppresses warning messages Level 1 Outputs ordinary warning messages default Level 2 w2 Outputs detailed warning messages 2 Verbose Modef v This option displays the execution status of the ca850 on the Output window during build If it is checked the execution status of each internal phase of the compiler is displayed 3 Limit of Number of Error err_limit This option specifies the maximum number of error messages to be output Specify a decimal number from 15 to 50 If this option is omitted 15 is assumed User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 4 Individual Warnings This list view controls display of individual warning messages If the icon on the left of each warning message is ON the warning message is displayed won if itis OFF the message is not displayed woff The icon changes from ON OFF when it is double clicked or the space key is pressed This option cannot be set by setting a source option it is always specified as a global option The following options are converted to the options of these messages when the project is read wbitfield_ align W2306 wbitfield_type W2302 wceallnodecl W2215 Xd W2231 wnopic W2231 wpragma W2162 wsharp W2161 The messages that can be specified are listed below Table 3 7 Message Num
466. sed as a two digit hexadecimal number f Newline n User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 253 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 1 Start address record This record indicates an entry point address 04 0000 03 PPPP 0000 SS NL a b c d e a Number of bytes is fixed to 04 b Fixed to 0000 c Record type is 03 d Paragraph value of entry point address e Offset value of entry point address Note The address is calculated by paragraph value lt lt 4 offset value 2 Expanded address record This record indicates the paragraph value of a load addressNote Note The paragraph value is output if the segment is renewed at the beginning of a segment when the data record is output or when the offset value of the data record s load address exceeds the maximum value of Oxffff 02 0000 02 PPPP SS NL a b c d a Number of bytes is fixed to 02 b Fixed to 0000 c Record type is 02 d Paragraph value of segment 254 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 3 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER Data record This record indicates the value of a code CC AAAA 00 DD DD SS NL a b c d a Number of bytesNote b Location address c Record type is 00 d Code each byte of code expressed as two digit hexadecimal number Note This is limited to the range of 0x1 to Oxff the minimum value for the number of bytes of code indicate
467. selected a warning message is output If it is not selected an error message is output 7 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to 236 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR This tab is used to set other options of the romp850 Figure 6 14 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box Others Tab ROM Processor Options File Section Option Others Any Option F Use Command File Command Line Options SS OK Cancel ox 1 Any Option This edit box is used to specify an option other than described above on the ROM Processor Options dialog box Describe an option in this edit box in the same format as on the command line At present however no option has to be specified in this edit box because all the options related to the ROMization processor can be specified in the ROM Processor Options dialog box 2 Use Command File In the Windows environment the length of character strings used to specify options for the ca850 is restricted If this check box is selected the option character string is output to a command file which enables the operation to be completed without observing the restriction on the character string length Check this check box if many options are set and not all of them can be recognized Under the default setting the check box is not chec
468. selected the name of the identifier in the specified file is displayed on the list of Regard identifications as type If the Browse button below is selected the existing file name can be referenced on the Browse for File dialog box 342 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 6 Regard identifications as type The identifier name that is treated as a type is displayed A function name of 38 characters or more is displayed in the form of first 18 characters last 18 characters Clicking the Add button opens the Set analyze file dialog box If an identifier file is selected in this dialog box it is added to the list If an identifier is selected from the list and the Change button is clicked the Set analyze file dialog box is opened and the identifier is changed into the one selected in the dialog box Clicking the Delete button deletes the identifier selected from the list The Change and Delete buttons can be selected only if an identifier is specified in the list Button a Set default option button This button returns the current setting of the dialog box to the default status User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 343 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL Cross reference list This tab is used to set the cross reference list Figure 12 4 Cross reference option Dialog Box Cross reference list Tab Cross reference option Call graph Function measure Call
469. set other options F devpath This option sets the device file search to begin in the devpath folder If this option is omitted the search goes directly to the standard folders V This option outputs the ROMization processor s version information as standard error output then terminates help This option outputs a help description of ROMization processor options as standard error output cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 230 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 8 Settings Made via PM This section describes dialog boxe that is used to set the command options of the romp850 for the target project s source file 6 8 1 ROM Processor Options dialog box At the upper part of this dialog box the following four tabs are displayed The contents of this dialog box depend on selecting the following tab Table 6 3 ROM Processor Options Dialog Box Tab Description File Setting of options related to files Section Setting of sections to
470. side by using the Flash external ROM re link function For details refer to 5 6 Flash Memory External ROM Relink Function Xj PM This option uses the jmp instruction to perform a branch for an ordinary interrupt function defined in C language If the number of functions is in the range that cannot be branched by the jr directive and the Id850 outputs an error this option can be used to recompile The jr instruction is used if this option is omitted This option must not be specified to call a function at the flash side from the boot side by using the Flash external ROM re link function For details refer to 5 6 Flash Memory External ROM Relink Function 8 Comment output option Xc PM This option outputs C language source programs as comments to the assembly language source file to be output However the output comments are for reference only and may not correspond exactly to the code For instance comments concerning global variables local variables function declarations etc may be output to incorrect positions If the code is deleted on the optimization only the extracted comment may remain To use this option S a Fs or Fv must be specified 56 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 9 ANSI standard options Xe PM This option specifies that runtime library ___mul ___mulu or ___div ____divu will be used instead of the mulh and divh directives for integers corresponding to data th
471. size the maximum stack size among those of callee functions the additional margin If the function is recursive the value is then multiplied by its recursion depth c Frame Size This part displays the size of the function s own stack frame excluding those of its callee functions is displayed when the stack size is unknown and SIZEOVER is displayed when the stack size value exceeds the limit value Click Frame Size to sort the list display area in the order of the frame sizes d Additional Margin This part displays the value to be added to the stack size which is specified by a user or set automatically by the stk850 if it is a system library function It is blank if no value is provided If the function is recursive and specified the recursion depth the value is also displayed with the prefix Click Additional Margin to sort the list display area in the order of the additional margins e File This part displays the name of the C language source file in which the function is defined It is black if the source file is not found Click File to sort the list display area in the order of the file names Context menu Adjust Stack Size dialog box Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box according to the selected function Sort List by Sorts the list display area according to the selected menu Function Name Sorts the list display area in the order of function names Icon Type Sorts
472. size num1 and num2 Changed to least common multiple value num3 Different alignment size num7 and num2 of data symbol symbol have been merged The size is changed to the maximum common multiple num3 W7105 cannot hide symbol symbol Symbol symbol cannot be hidden W7106 Argument type mismatch is detected where caller calls callee The types of the arguments of caller and callee differ during inline expansion If the types can be changed they are converted into the types for definition If not the inline expansion is ignored W7107 Return value type mismatch is detected where caller calls callee The types of the return values of caller and callee differ during inline expansion If the type of callee can be changed it is converted into the type of caller If not the inline expansion is ignored User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 441 APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 1 3 Assembler E3200 illegal alignment value The specified alignment condition is incorrect E3201 illegal character A character that cannot be handled has been found E3202 illegal expression The syntax of the expression is incorrect E3203 illegal expression string Element string of the expression is incorrect E3204 illegal expression label An expression in the format label is used E3205 illegal expression label label An expression in the format label label is used E3206 illegal expression l
473. ss of the interrupt handler exists In the following case an interrupt handler function name must also be specified by the ext_func quasi directive Interrupt handler address is in fixed ROM Interrupt handler body is in flash memory Assembly language source described by user Assembler image after linking ext_table inc ext_func _int flasho 0 rom s include ext _table inc extern _int_flasho section INTOO text jr _int_flasho rom out section INTOO text jr __ext_table head 0x4 0 1p flash s include ext _table inc globl _int_ flasho _int_flasho reti flash o branch table section ext_table text globl __ext_table head extern _int_flasho __ext_table_ head jr _int_flasho handler body globl _int flasho _int_flasho reti User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 193 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 7 Supplementary Information This section describes the supplementary points related to the Id850 5 7 1 Using A option This section describes how to use the A option With PM specify Output GP Information A on the Option tab of the Linker Options dialog box for the A option A Function 194 This option displays the following information that serves as a yardstick for the value to be set to num of the Gnum option that can be specified for the ca850 and as850 when a source file is compiled or assembled Standard output i
474. ss option the internal ROM area may be ignored By specifying the Ximem_overflow warning option an error message can be changed to a warning message The above check is not performed if the rompsec section is allocated to the end of the external ROM area Check the memory map information to see if the sections fit in ROM If it is necessary to allocate the rompsec section in the middle of ROM check the area where the rompsec sec 210 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR tion is to be allocated as follows from the size and allocation address of the rompsec section and specify an appropriate address for the segment immediately after the rompsec section Figure 6 4 Link Directive Taking ROMization Processing into Consideration Size Considered Allocates SCONST CONST and TEXT to internal ROM SCONST LOAD R sconst S PROGBITS A sconst Allocates text in middle of internal ROM TEXT LOAD RX pro_epi_runtime PROGBITS AX pro_epi_runtime text SPROGBITS AX text hs rompsec between TEXT and CONST Allocates CONST to end of internal ROM by specifying address taking size into consideration CONST LOAD R Vx3 800 const SPROGBITS A const Allocates DATA to external RAM DATA LOAD RX V0x100000 data SPROGBITS AW sdata S PROGBITS AWG sbss SNOBIT AWG bss SNOBIT AW Allocates SIDATA to internal RAM SIDATA L
475. ss that can be expressed in the Intel extended hex format Processing is continued with the range that can be expressed output as addresses Supplement The possible causes of this message are the following 1 ROMization was skipped It is possible that an attempt was made to execute hex conversion of a section in internal RAM together with a section allocated to ROM Execute ROMization before hex conversion 2 Wrong section is specified for hex conversion The addresses of the sections that are to be converted into the hex format at the same time may be widely apart If two or more ROMs are used execute hex conversion on each ROM Check if the section to be converted into hex format is correct and if the allocation address of the section is correct 3 The section itself is too large If the area to be converted into hex format is too large and the range that can be expressed is exceeded hex conversion cannot be executed Either divide the area into segments within the range that can be expressed or use another hex format Caution Although the maximum value of an address is 20 bits it is actually around 20 bits The 20 bit address expression in the Intel extended hex format that causes this message to be output is calculated from the extended address record having a higher address and a data record having an offset from that higher address If the higher address of the extended address record fits in 20 bits output is normal as the
476. stallation of the CA850 2 1 Installation To use the CA850 both the CA850 itself and the related device files must be installed To use PM PM must also be installed Install the CA850 as follows The supply medium is one CD ROM 1 Start Windows 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The setup program starts up automatically If the setup program does not start start Windows Explorer and double click Install exe in the CD ROM drive 3 Select the tool to be installed CA850 PM STK850 LDG etc and specify the folder in which the tool is to be installed Then click the Install button 4 Execute installation in compliance with the messages displayed on the screen Note Install the device file in compliance with the device file installer DFINST that has been installed User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 23 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 2 Folder Organization Figure 2 1 shows the organization of the file folder that is read from the supply medium when the CA850 is installed Below is the CA850 s standard folder default C Program Files NEC Electronics Tools CA850 Vx xx In the CA850 package the lib850 folder shown in Figure 2 1 is called the standard folder for the library and the inc850 folder is called the standard folder for include files Below is the standard folder for the device files default C Program Files NEC Electronics Tools DEV Figure 2 1 Folder
477. structions a write back Example add rll r10 Including the instructions that describe a set symbol with LABEL expression or definition after reference and that load a value to the register to which the instructions a write back User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 151 CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER Example addi LABEL2 LABEL1 r10 r12 LABEL1 omitted LABEL2 In this example if the relative values of LABEL2 and LABEL1 exceed the range that can be expressed by 16 bits the instructions are expanded as follows mov LABEL2 LABEL1 r12 and 410 E12 Instruction b is immediately followed by the move instruction and the value of r10 is not loaded In other words this example is not of a chip bug pattern but is subject to patching 11 10 Xv850patch 10 p10 This inserts a nop instruction immediately after the store instruction in relation to the combination of store instruction sst b h w st b h w jcond bcond Example sst b sst b br nop br 12 No num specification Xv850patch p This outputs each code in the combination of 1 to 3 and 5 to 10 judged by the device file refer to descriptions above If this option is specified when creating an object that does not require a corresponding patch no patch is set The correspondence between created objects and options is shown below Table 4 5 Correspondence Between Created Objects and p Op
478. structions are rearranged and the assemble list output may be incorrect in some parts err file file This option adds and saves error messages to the file file err file file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the file file 1 file PM This option assigns file as the name of the file where the assemble list file is inserted after it is generated by specification of the a option This option is ignored if the a option was not specified If the a option was specified but this option was omitted the generated assemble list is output via standard output 128 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 4 2 Option This specifies options of the as850 for the assembly language source file Dname def PM This option specifies the macro name to be defined If the def specification is omitted the def value is regarded as 1 It is assumed that set name def is entered before the assembly language source program Gnum PM This option generates a machine language instruction on the assumption that all data of the specified size num bytes or smaller is allocated to sections with the sdata or sbss attribute in response to external label access An integer in the range of decimal values 0 to 32767 can be specified as the num value If this option is omitted it is assumed that num However machine language is generated on the assumption that data is allocated to sections with the
479. t This message appears when exe did not start from the DLL The message means installation was executed unsuccessfully or the exe file has been corrupted Reinstallation is required w9400 Cannot find file path Check that the specified file name is correct The specified file cannot be found Specify the correct file name W9401 Cannot open file to read path Check that the file is readable The file is prohibited from being read Enable the file read W9402 Cannot open file to write path Check that both the file and the folder are writable The file is a read only file Set a write enable attribute to the file or the folder User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 493 APPENDIX B MESSAGE W9404 File write error path An error occurred while the file was written Check that writing files is enabled W9405 Too many characters in one line in file path line line The limit is num The file path line exceeds the maximum number of characters per line num For the upper limit value of each file refer to 14 5 1 Quantitative limit of the stk850 W9406 Too many lines in file path line The limit is num The file path line exceeds the maximum number of lines per file num For the upper limit value of each file refer to 14 5 1 Quantitative limit of the stk850 W9407 Too long file name path The limit is 255 The file name path is too long A file whose name contains 255 characters or more cannot be used W
480. t and two or more copy routines are used and if 1 is specified as number data cannot be correctly copied due to problems such as alignment of all sections In this case do not specify 1 as number specify a section number If 1 is specified as number data is copied in the order of section numbers If there is a section that is not copied 1 is returned as the return value Sections following the section in which a problem has occurred are not copied User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 6 Operation Method This section describes how to operate the romp850 ROMization processor 6 6 1 Command input method Enter the following from the command prompt romp850 option file nam Can be omitted Pattern in preceding can be repeated 6 6 2 Method using PM The ROM Processor Options dialog box that is used to set ROMization processor options can be displayed via the following method once a project has been established under PM Select Tool ROM Processor Options Since the ROMization processor is activated once per project there are no file specific settings The name of the executable object file that is output by the ROMization processor is the name of the first file shown in the Source file name list when the Source file tab is selected via the Project Settings dialog box in the PM The extension out is added to this file name which makes it identical to th
481. t folder under the specified file name b Ifthe folder is specified as outfile Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c replaced by sec to the specified folder c If outfile is omitted Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c replaced by sec to the current folder d If two or more files are output Creates a folder specified as outfile and saves the object file under a file name with extension c replaced by sec When several C language source files exist and a frequency data file is to be created with a file name specified for each file PM opens the option dialog box for each C language source file from the source file list and then specifies a file name when the frequency data file is created When using command line input it specifies this option with outfile for each C language source file The C language source files are specified one at a time with c specified The variable frequency data file outputs information how often the Id850 or st instruction accesses variables in the C language source file Nothing is performed on the assembly language source file Xsec_file file PM This option specifies the name of the section file refer to 9 1 Section Files that is used to specify section allocation of data when the C language compiler is activated Be sure to specify this file name This option can be specified several times and several section files can be input User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM
482. t request is specified by the pragma directive E2631 Interrupt request name name is already specified The interrupt request name name has already been specified E2632 illegal directive pragma directive function name must be specified A function name is required for the directive pragma directive E2633 cannot specify interrupt attribute direct function function is already defined An interrupt handler cannot be directly located and specified after function definition E2636 Multiple interrupt request names are specified for function function direct cannot be specified Two or more interrupt requests are specified for function function Direct location direct cannot be specified for a function for which two or more interrupts are specified E2638 Interrupt function must be void type The return type of a function declared as an interrupt must be of void type E2639 illegal function type for software interrupt function must be void unsigned int A function declared as a software exception interrupt trap interrupt can only have one unsigned int type as the argument E2640 illegal function type for interrupt function must be void void A function declared as an interrupt except software exception cannot have an argument E2641 cannot call interrupt function A function declared as an interrupt cannot be called User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 423 APPENDIX B MES
483. t sent to tidata_word and tidata_byte instead of just tidata The following figure shows a section file example output when the O option is specified Figure 9 3 Example of Section File Output by sf850 Using O Option Created by sf850 at Thu Jan 22 17 26 25 2004 tidata_byte file func variable section size total_freq Byte freq Word freq a c sil data 4 10 10 0 a c si2 data 4 8 8 0 a c f1 sfil 4550 wito ff sa 3 380 wg ffo s2 2 1 0 tidata_word a c si3 data 4 10 0 10 a c si4 data 4 8 0 8 a c f1 sfi2 4 5 2 3 mp ff ae 322 mm 2 101 276 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR The specifiable types of output sections include other types besides tidata attribute sections tidata word attribute sections and tidata byte attribute sections The following character strings can be used to specify section types Table 9 3 Types of Sections Specifiable by ca850 Type Specification 5 A Character String Target Section for Allocation tidata Byte data for which a default value has been set is allocated to the tidata byte section and half word or larger data for which a default value has been set is allocated to the tidata word section Byte data for which a default value has not been set is allocated to the tibss byte section and half word or larger data for which a default value has not been set is
484. t specification for RTOS E2695 cannot call rtos_task function A function that is specified as an RTOS task cannot be called E2696 Rtos system call function is already defined cannot specify pragma kind A function having the same name as function function has already been defined or declared The RTOS system call cannot be validated by the pragma specification of the RTOS function E2697 Rtos system call name is called in the function for which rtos interrupt attribute is not specified RTOS system call name is called by a function for which an RTOS interrupt is not specified name is regarded as a normal function call User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 425 APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2698 cannot call rtos_interrupt function A function that is specified as an RTOS interrupt handler cannot be called E2701 Duplicated GP symbol for RTOS interrupt function function Another gp symbol has already been allocated to function function specified as an RTOS interrupt handler E2702 Specifying interrupt name name is not allowed for rtos interrupt name must not be specified as an interrupt request name E2712 unexpected end of line missing Enclose a section name in a section file with E2713 unexpected character s token An unnecessary token token exists in the section file Check the format of the section file E2714 Variable function or file name is missing The descri
485. t to this area data of the specified size bytes or less is allocated to the sconst section However data for which the sconst section is specified by the pragam section directive or a section file is allocated to the sconst section regardless of its size If nothing is input data or a character string literal with the const attribute is allocated to the sconst section An integer of decimals values in the range of 0 to 32767 can be specified For details of the sconst section and const section refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual Caution If a section is not specified by the pragma section directive or a section file and if Allocate Data Xsconst of sconst Section Allocation is not checked default assumption all data and character string literals for which the const type modifier is specified are allocated to the const section 3 Register Mode This area is used to specify a register mode The following register modes can be specified The default register mode is the 32 register mode 22 register mode 26 register mode 32 register mode The setting of the register mode is also recognized by the linker Therefore a library in the appropriate register mode is referenced when a library is linked For details of the register mode refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual 4 Prologue Epilogue Runtime This specifies whether or not a runtime library call will be used for prologue epilogue processi
486. table text globl __ext_table head extern func _flasho extern func _flashl extern func flash2 __ext_table_head jr _func_flasho jr _func_flashl jr _func_flash2 function body globl func _flasho _func_flasho jmp lp globl _func_ flashl _func_flashl jmp lp globl func flash2 _func_flash2 jmp lp If the ext_func quasi directive is specified as shown above a table is created with the symbol ext_table and the first symbol of this table is ___ ext_table_head Code jarl__flashO Ip in the fixed ROM is an offset from ___ext_table_head and obtains the address of __flash0 and jumps to the function body by the jarl instruction User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 187 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 3 Startup routine Separately prepare a startup routine for the fixed ROM and a startup routine for the flash memory Each startup routine must perform the following processing a b Setting tp gp and ep values in the fixed ROM Calling the _rcopy function to initialize the RAM area to be used for the fixed ROM d c Branching from the fixed ROM to the startup routine of the flash memory Calling the _rcopy function to initialize the RAM area to be used for the flash memory e Moving to the processing of the flash memory If tp gp and ep are not used in the fixed ROM the values may be set in the flash memory When the initial value data is copied by using the _rcopy function the lo
487. ted This option is valid when Og O Os or Ot is specified If this option is omitted a code giving priority to debug information is output when a branch occurs Wo Xlo Expands a loop under the condition of the version CA850 Ver 2 02 or earlier 3 Machine dependent optimization impr Wi D The amount of memory used at compile time can be reduced Note that this may slow down the compilation speed This is specified if too much memory is used so that the compiler is unable to operate normally Wi 04 PM Strictly analyzes the data flow and executes the following optimization a b Optimization of register straddling over branch instruction Optimization of absolute value operation c Optimization of cmp instruction straddling over branch instruction d Optimization of restore instruction straddling over branch instruction Note that this may slow down the compilation speed Specify this option if you want data flow analysis anyhow when O Os or Ot has also been specified Wi P PM Suppresses optimization that aligns labels As a result a smaller code size is enabled 4 Assembler as850 Refer to 4 4 Types and Features of Options 5 Linker Id850 Refer to 5 3 Types and Features of Options User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 67 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 6 Settings Made via PM This section describes the dialog boxes that are used to set the command options of the ca850
488. ted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but
489. than 2 bytes take out the required number of low order digits from the specified fill value If the fill value specification is omitted the default value 0x0000 is used 174 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 3 Output GP Information A This option outputs information to the standard output that can be used as criteria in setting numeric values in the Size Threshold of sdata sbss Section Allocation G option set in the Output Code tab of the Compiler Options dialog box or Option tab of the Assembler Options dialog box when compiling or assembling a source file If data displayed as OK is used data for which the size is that numeric value or less is allocated to the sdata sbss data area The displayed results are included in the log file project name plg that is generated automatically in the project folder 4 2 Pass Mode B This check box is used to specify whether linking is to be executed in the 2 pass mode specified by the B option 5 Output Link Map m This option outputs a link map to the standard output that shows the allocation of memory space in the input and output sections The link map that is output is included in the log file project name plg that is generated automatically in the project folder Remark If an output file name was specified in Link Map File m on the File tab output to the file takes precedence and this option is void 6 Output Old Style Link Map
490. the Control Panel of Windows 3 Select the following items NEC EL CA850 Vx xx NEC EL CA850 Vx xx Documents Remark Other tools PM STK850 LDG etc and documents can be uninstalled in a similar way 26 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This chapter provides an overview and explains the operation and output messages of the C compiler ca850 3 1 Flow of Operation The ca850 creates relocatable object files and object files executable on the target system from C language source programs described in C language source files The ca850 acts as the driver of the modules included in the package and performs operations such as macro expansion comment processing merging of intermediate language files optimization creation conversion from assembly language source programs to machine language instructions and linking of object files The ca850 performs processing in the following sequence refer to Figure 3 1 Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 As is shown in Figure 3 1 the processing flow varies slightly depending on the specified optimization level The front end cafe performs macro expansion and comment processing of a C language source program and then converts the program into an intermediate language OPTIC program The pre optimizer popt rearranges the functions in the intermediate language OPTIC program If this command is activated from the command line and if
491. the Id850 outputs an error In the 32 register mode mask_reg is passed to the Id850 As a result the linker searches the mask register folder for the standard library instead of the standard folder User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 103 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER For details of the mask register refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual Note that this option cannot be selected when an individual source is specified It is always set as a global option Caution Use Mask Register Xmask_reg must be specified for both compiler options and assembler options in an application that uses both a C language source file and an assembly language source file and in an application that uses only an assembly language source file 12 No Word Access bit1 Opt Xno_word_bitop This check box prohibits an operation that replaces the Id w Id h and st w st h instructions with 1 bit memory manipulation instructions set1 clr1 tst1 and not1 If a read write event of a variable is set for debugging an event may not occur if the above instructions are replaced by 1 bit manipulation instructions In this case specify this option The Id w ld h and st w st h instructions remain not replaced making debugging easy 13 Use Word Switch Table Xword_switch This option creates a branch table for the case label in a switch statement using 4 bytes per label Specify this option if compile errors occur due to long switch statements If this option is not spec
492. the code specified with the c option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the c option d Assembler Source m This outputs the assembler source specified with the m option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the m option e Offsetf o This outputs the offset specified with the o option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the o option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified f Opcode p This outputs the opcode specified with the p option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the p option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified g Register Name r This outputs the register name specified with the r option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the r option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified h _ Title t This outputs the title specified with the t option Selecting the box works the same as specifying with the t option This check box is unavailable when the A option is specified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 319 4 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 11 DISASSEMBLER Start Address s This sets the start address specified with the s option Specify the edit box with a decimal or hexadecimal value Specifying the value works the same as specifying with the s option End Address e This sets the end address specified with the e option
493. the debugger When this box is checked the g option is passed to the compiler 4 Warning Level Select the level of the warning messages to be output from the drop down list This option is the same as the item set for Warning Level on the Message tab The following levels of warning messages can be selected Not output w Warning messages suppressed Level 1 Ordinary warning messages output default Level 2 w2 Detailed warning messages output 5 Verbose Modef v This check box is used to display the detailed execution status of the ca850 on the Output window When this box is checked execution status in each internal phase of the compiler is displayed This option is the same as the item set for Verbose Mode v on the Message tab 6 Assembler Source Fs This check box is used to specify whether an assembly language source resulting from compiling a C language source is output or not When it is checked the edit box below this check box can be used to specify a folder name or file name If a folder name is specified in this edit box as Setting of global options and if the specified folder does not exist a message box asking you if a folder is to be created is displayed If nothing is specified in the edit box an assembly language source is output to the project folder with the extension of the C language source file name changed to s To specify another output destination specify a folder name
494. the length of the section is C6 Symbol definition field 22CR1D 14O0PEN250 14READ258 15WRITE260 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 261 CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER Example2 37 3 C8 8SVCSTUFFO 15CLOSE26814EXIT27029BUFLENGTH28013BUF278 NL a b c d e Block length Block type is 3 c Checksum Number of characters of section name is 8 and section name is SVCSTUFF Symbol definition field 15CLOSE268 14EXIT270 29BUFLENGTH280 13BUF278 3 Termination block Indicates an entry point address LL T SS LA A NL a b a Block type is 8 b Number of digits in entry point address and the entry point address Example 08 8 1A 2 80 NL a b c d a Block length is 8 b Block type is 8 c Checksum is 1A d Number of digits in entry point address is 2 and entry point address is 80 262 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 8 ARCHIVER This chapter describes the outline and operation of the archiver ar850 8 1 Archiver The archiver is a utility that couples specified relocatable object files and generates one archive file Therefore this utility is used to combine two or more objects to create a library In the C compiler package ar850 is the archiver Figure 8 1 The ar850 s Operation Flow ar850 _ p Object file Pa Archive file The archive file generated by the ar850 can be specified as an input file to th
495. the outfile under a file name with extension c replaced by s to the specified folder c If outfile is omitted Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c replaced by s to the current folder d If two or more files are output this cannot be specified with PM Creates a folder specified as outfile and saves the object file under a file name with extension c replaced by s User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 35 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Fv outfile PM This option specifies whether an assemble list generated in the middle of compiling is to be saved a Ifthe file name is specified as outfile Saves the outfile to the current folder under the specified file name b Ifthe folder is specified as outfile Saves the outfile under a file name with extension c or s replaced by v to the specified folder c If outfile is omitted Saves the object file under a file name with extension c or s replaced by v to the current folder d If two or more files are output this cannot be specified with PM Creates a folder specified as outfile and saves the outfile under a file name with extension c or s replaced by v If this option and the a option are not specified an assemble list will not be generated o outfile This option specifies an output file as outfile It is valid even if compiling is stopped midway by specifying the compiler control option S c or m a If this option is specified with the S op
496. the stack size specification file a function name that is too long to be specified as a callee function was found Reduce the number of characters to 1022 or less The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output 494 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W9413 Illegal value value after ADD in file path line line In the stack size specification file specification of an incorrect additional margina was found Specify the addition margin as follows ADD followed by a non negative decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9414 Multiple ADD s for one function in file path line line Only one is allowed for one function In the stack size specification file multiple specifications of additional margin for one function were found Only one can be specified for one function For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9415 Illegal value value after RECTIME in file path line line In the stack size specification file an incorrect value for recursion depth was found Specify the recursive depth as follows RECTIME followed by a positive decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop readi
497. the stack size specification file an incorrect specification of a callee function was found Only one function can be specified after CALL When specifying multiple callee functions specify multiple number of CALL For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9424 Multiple specifications for one function in file path line linel line line2 Only one is allowed In the stack size specification file specification for the same function was found in line and line2 Delete the specification in either one of the lines For details refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9425 Too many characters in one line in file path line line The limit is num The file path line exceeds the maximum number of characters per line num Accordingly reduce the number of characters in one line For details refer to 14 5 1 Quantitative limit of the stk850 The Do you want to stop reading Dialog Box is output W9427 Cannot find stack size specification file for system library functions path Default values as same as libsize32 txt are used The stack size specification file path for the standard library was not found The stk850 uses the default information which is the same as libsize32 text Installation may have been executed unsuccessfully W9430 Cannot find CA850 generated assembly lang
498. this processing system is 16 E2261 illegal storage class specifier combination The combination of storage class specifiers is incorrect E2262 illegal use of enum The type specifier enum is used incorrectly E2263 illegal use of struct The type specifier struct is used incorrectly E2265 illegal use of union The type specifier union is used incorrectly E2266 illegal use of specifier The storage area class specifier specifier is used incorrectly User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 419 APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2274 illegal use of typedef The storage area class specifier typedef is used incorrectly E2280 Void function cannot return value A return value is specified for a void type function E2281 Function has illegal storage class The storage class specified for the function is incorrect E2282 Array of function is not allowed An array of functions is not allowed E2283 illegal return type function The return value of a function must not be used as a function type E2284 illegal return type array The return value of a function must not be used as an array type E2285 Void in parameter list The void type is specified within the arrangement of the argument declaration of the function declaration Only one void type can be used E2286 Function requires return value No return value is specified for a function having a return value E2288
499. ting line 0x0010 Outputs return values and arguments 0x0020 Outputs reference information TopFlag Top flag When the function is the tree root 1 is output When it is not the tree root 0 is output ElimNo Tree number for previous output When the function corresponds to 0x0004 for FuncAttr this uses No in Calltree to indicate the tree in which that function was previously output If it does not correspond to 0x0004 0 is output ChildPtr Starting position of child function display Uses No in ChildFuncs to indicate the position at which the first child function of the function is output ChildCnt Number of child functions Indicates the number of child functions registered in ChildFuncs If there is no child function O is output 4 ChildFuncs The tree in which that child function exists is output as child function information CallTreeNo Tree number Uses No in Calltree to indicate the tree in which that child function exists User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 359 12 6 4 Function metrics CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL When a function metrics information output option such as m is specified for cxref the information is output in terms of individual functions The output file format is text format or CSV format To directly reference the main important information output the data in text format To reference detailed information in tabular f
500. tion B PM This option executes linkage in two pass mode If this option is omitted linkage is executed in one pass mode Although two pass mode is slower than one pass mode it is able to process larger files E PM This option outputs a warning message not an error message and continues linking if any of the following illegalities is found during relocation processing The result of address calculation of an unresolved external reference is illegal The relationship with the section to be allocated is illegal The value of address calculation judged as illegal is not assigned to the unresolved external reference judged as an error the original value remains M PM This option outputs a message for all external symbols that are defined more than once and stops link processing If this option is omitted a message is output only for the first external symbol that is defined more than once and link processing is stopped T PM This option suppresses checking of the size and alignment condition when linking an external symbol If this option is omitted the size is checked and if a size difference is detected a warning message is output and link processing is continued At this time the symbol size of the file in which the symbol is defined is valid Ximem_ overflow warning PM This option controls checking when the internal ROM RAM overflows In case of an overflow a warning message is output and linkin
501. tion An assembler file s is specified b If this option is specified with the c option A relocatable object file 0 is specified c If this option is specified with the m option A front end output file ic is specified d Other than above An executable object file out is specified e The default assumption is a out An error occurs temp dir 36 PM This option specifies the work folder for creating temporary files that are used internally If this option is omitted temporary files are generated in a folder specified by environmental variable TEMP or a root folder in the current drive If the capacity of the hard disk runs short and a temporary file cannot be generated an error occurs This error can be avoided by using this option User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 5 3 Controlling source debugger The following options are used to control the source debugger Xno_ word bitop PM This option prohibits replacing the Id w ld h and st w st h instructions with 1 bit manipulation instructions sett clr1 tst1 and not1 If a read write event of a variable is set during debugging an event may not be generated if these instructions are replaced by 1 bit manipulation instructions If this option is specified in such a case the Id w ld h and st w st h instructions are not replaced by 1 bit manipulation instructions making debugging easy g PM This option outputs symbol inform
502. tion This message can be erased by specifying rom_less option only if the cause of the error is related to the internal ROM F4286 section section must be specified in link directive The section section must be specified in a directive file F4287 description of section section in mapping directive is illegal The description code entry of section section in the directive file is illegal F4333 cannot allocate memory builtin new error Securing a memory area has failed F4351 unknown option string An illegal option string is specified F4353 is illegal Cannot specify only F4355 nesting of command file file in command file is not supported Command file file is specified in a command file Nesting of command files is not supported F4356 stringi option is illegal when string2 option is specified string option must not be specified when string2 option is specified F4359 string option needs hexadecimal argument string option needs a hexadecimal argument F4361 illegal character number in string field An illegal character number ASCII code is used to specify the option string 458 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE F4363 unknown cpu type Specify a target device Supplement This message is output if creation of an executable object file is attempted by linking only the file that specifies the cn cnv850e cnv850e2 option of the as850 w
503. tion section2 offset offset type relocation type local symbol is allocated in section sectioni file filel The GP symbol cannot be found in the segment segment Or there is a contradiction in the location reference method of the local symbol Supplement If a section to be located by pragma section specification is changed by variable definition change a section for the extern declaration of the variable in another file in the same way The local symbol is located at section of file file1 Reference to the local symbol exists at offset offset of section section2 of file file2 W4656 cannot find GP symbol in segment segment or illegal label reference for symbol symbol in file file2 section section2 offset offset type relocation type symbol is allocated in section sectioni file filel The GP symbol was not specified in the segment segment Or there is a contradiction in the location reference method of the segment segment Supplement If a section to be located by pragma section specification is changed by variable definition change a section for the extern declaration of the variable in another file in the same way The symbol symbol is located at section1 of file file1 Reference to the symbol symbol exists at offset offset of section section2 of file file2 W4657 cannot find GP symbol in section section of file filei or illegal label reference for symbol symbol in file file2 section section2
504. tion is modified in the flash memory area User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 181 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 6 2 Image of relink function A function is called as shown below when the relink function is used 1 To call function in fixed ROM from fixed ROM The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved before they are programmed to the fixed ROM Figure 5 14 In Fixed ROM void func_roml void void func_rom2 void func_roml Function can be called without problem 2 To call function in flash memory from flash memory The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved in the flash memory Figure 5 15 In Flash Memory void func_flash1 void void func_flash2 void func_flashl Function can be called without problem 182 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER 3 To call function in flash memory from fixed ROM When a function in the flash memory is called from the fixed ROM the address of the function cannot be known from the fixed ROM because the function size etc have been changed in the flash memory In other words a function in the flash memory cannot be directly called To solve this execution jumps to the branch table in the flash memory From this table an instruction that jumps execution to the function in question is executed In this way executio
505. tion name that is the tree root Functions of provided libraries are also included in the tree The meanings of symbols that are displayed after function names are as follows 2 Indicates a function that is not defined in the file to be processed numerical value Indicates that subsequent outputs are omitted because it was output once The numerical value indicates the line number for the first output bite Indicates that subsequent outputs were suspended because a recursive function was calling itself User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 357 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 2 CSV format output example If the cc option is specified the call tree is output in CSV format A CSV format file can be read by spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel The default output file name is ccalltre csv The CSV format output is as follows Figure 12 12 Call Tree CSV Format Output Example cxref Command input cxref cc apli c SrcFileList No SrcFileName FilePath l apli c Funcs No FuncName SrcFileNo LineNo Ret1 Argl1 Ret2 Arg2 1p Free 0 04 fa 2 main 1 248 int 3 scanf 0 0 4 delete 1 217 void void 5 search 1 38 void void Calltree No FuncNo FuncAttr TopFlg ElimNo ChildPtr ChildCnt RefFileNo RefLine Ly 84 0 14 0530 4 0 2 7 0xX21 0 0 0 0 1 30 3 12 0x21 0 0 0 0 1 31 4 9 0x21 0 0 0 0 1 32 ChildFuncs No CalltreeNo 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 8 5 9
506. tions Created Objects p1 p2 p3 p4 p4a p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 Specific to V850 directive Specific to V850Ex directive Specific to V850E2 directive V850 core common V850Ex core common z Z U Z Z z Z U Z Z z z U Z z Ziz 0 Z zZ U Ziz U Z Z U v U U UI Vi Zz v U U VI Vi Zz v U U VI Vi Zz v U U VI VI z U U U Ul UI Zz v Ul Ui UI VDI Zz V850E2 core common Remark P Patched N Not patched 152 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 LINKER This chapter presents an overview and describes the operation link map cautions and output messages of the linker Id850 5 1 Flow of Operation Generally an application program is divided into several source files and coded Source files written in C language activate the compiler ca850 or assembler as850 and source files written in an assembly language activate the assembler as850 to output object files The linker Id850 resolves the addresses of these object files in accordance with the information of the link directive and device files and generates one executable object file i e a load module file If there is external reference that is not resolved when the linker links object files the linker searches the specified archive file library file to resolve the external reference It then links only the object files necessary for r
507. tions Wp Gnum PM This option limits the stack size of a function in an intermediate language subject to inline expansion to size num and does not execute inline expansion of a function larger than num For num refer to the description of the Wp I file option below If this option is not specified it is assumed that Wp G32 is specified Wp Nnum PM Restricts the intermediate language size for a function subject to inline expansion by the num value specification so that inline expansion is not performed for any value larger than the num value Refer to the Wp I file option s description below with regard to the range of num values Wp N128 is assumed as the specification if this option is omitted and Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed is specified otherwise Wp N24 is assumed as the specification User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 45 46 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Wp S PM This option unconditionally executes inline expansion of a static function that is referenced only once Wp l1 file PM This option outputs function information to standard output or additional output to the file It serves as a guide to the value to be specified by the Wp Gnum and Wp Nnum options above For example a function called is expanded inline if the function requires stack size equal to or less than the value specified by Wp Nnum If the function has code size equal to or less than the value specified by Wp Nnum
508. to be converted Use a decimal or hexadecimal number Be sure to specify this if Size is specified d Size This option specifies the size of the area to be converted Use a decimal or hexadecimal number Be sure to specify this if Start Address is specified 4 Converting Section I This option specifies a section to convert to hex format The hex converter performs conversion by section and not by segment If a section for which initial values of data are not specified section having section type NOBITS and section attribute A is specified as many null characters 0 as the size of the section are generated If this item is omitted all sections that have a section type other than NOBITS and section attribute A are converted To specify multiple sections separate them by Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box where section items can be edited Spaces cannot be used in the section name 250 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER 5 Maximum Length of Block Record b The decimal number specified as num is regarded as the maximum block length value or in the case of the Intel expanded hex format or the Motorola S type hex format the number of code bytes indicated in one data record If this option is omitted the default value for each hex format is used Specify a decimal number or a hexadecimal number that starts with Ox or OX as num Table 7 3 HEX Format
509. tor operator must have same type typel type2 Use the same type type7 and type2 for the right and left of the operator operator E2529 invalid use of void expression The void expression is incorrect E2530 Operand of must be function type The operand of the operator must be a function E2532 Operand of operator must be pointer type The operand of the operator operator must be of pointer type E2533 Operand of must be struct union object Use the operator for a structure or union 422 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE E2535 Operand of gt must be pointer to struct union object Use the gt operator for the pointer to a structure or union E2550 Operand of sizeof must not be type The operand of sizeof cannot specify type E2551 unknown size struct union or array An aggregate with unknown size is specified for an operator that requires an object size E2552 unknown size function A function with unknown size is specified for an operator that requires an object size E2553 cannot convert non Lvalue array to pointer An array which is not a left side value cannot be converted into a pointer E2556 unknown size enum An enumerator with unknown size is specified for an operator that requires an object size E2630 unrecognized interrupt request name name An illegal interrup
510. ttribute or const attribute are not packed and if the above listed sections are not in an executable module there is no need to create a ROMization object See the link map file to determine whether or not the sections listed in Table 7 1 exist in an executable module In addition the object file created by the romp850 can be referenced via the dump command dump850 to confirm that a rompsec section has been created in place of another section such as a data section or sdata section 208 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 ROMIZATION PROCESSOR 6 3 2 Size of rompsec section This section describes the memory area size to be reserved for the rompsec section When creating the ROMization module note the size of the rompsec section as well as the internal ROM capacity of the target CPU and the address range and size of the target system s ROM area Code the link directive file carefully to prevent the rompsec section from overlapping other sections For specific code examples refer to 6 4 Creating Object for ROMization Formulas used to calculate the size of the rompsec section are shown below 8 16 x Number of sdata data sections Size of sdata data section Padding sizeNote For example if sdata and data sections exist the size of each is 1002 bytes and 1000 bytes and the alignment condition of each section is 4 bytes the size of the rompsec section is as follows 8 16 x 2 1002 1000 2 2044 bytes N
511. uage source file Select PM s menu Tool Compiler Options and check Assembler Source in General tab The intermediate assembler file cannot be found Register the C language source file in PM specify the Assembler Source Fs in the General tab of the Compiler Options dialog box and then rebuild W9450 Number of lines reached limit 32767 in output The output result contains more than 32767 lines Change the selection of the function or output only the call chain with maximum stack W9451 Number of characters in one line reached limit 5119 in output A line of the output result contains more than 5119 characters Change the selection of the function or output the result in the text format in which the line is split into two or more lines W9460 Too many callee functions The limit is 1024 The number of callee functions for one function exceeds 1024 Reduce the number of them Even if all the callee functions are registered only the function whose stack size becomes the maximum is added to the stack size 496 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W9461 Too many characters in specification for one function The limit is 5119 The number of characters per line exceeds 5119 Reduce the number of the callee functions The 5119 characters include parameter names and separators W9462 Illegal value character for additional margin The additional margin includes an incorrect character Specify
512. uding the path specification or no more than 14 characters when not including the path specification The extension is necessary and dir is recommended If this option is omitted the default link directive is used For description of the link directive s functions and organization refer to CA850 for Link Directive User s Manual Xolddir version PM This option selects the compatibility of the format of the link directive file with old versions V240 V250 or V260 can be specified as version If version is omitted V240 is assumed If this option is omitted the latest link directive file format is supported When V240 is specified Section priority layout function OFF segment sort OFF equivalent to CA850 Ver 2 40 When V250 is specified Section priority layout function ON segment sort OFF equivalent to CA850 Ver 2 50 When V260 is specified Section priority layout function ON segment sort ON equivalent to CA850 Ver 2 60 or later User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 159 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 3 2 Output file This specifies the files referenced and linked by the linker and an output file name err file file This option adds and saves error messages to the file file err file file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the file file o ofile PM This option specifies ofile as the name of the object file to be created If this option is omitted the default file name a out is used
513. ue is regarded as 1 set macro name define value is assumed to be described before the assembly language program When defining several macros use a semicolon to delimit the macro definitions This edit box is used to set a defined macro To specify two or more macros delimit each with semicolon By selecting the Edit button the Edit Option dialog box can be displayed and the macro can be edited in this dialog box 3 Assemble List a l This check box specifies whether the assemble list resulting from assembling a assembly language source is to be output When it is checked a directory name or file name can be specified in the edit box below this button If a folder name is specified in this edit box as Setting of a global options and if the specified folder does not exist a message asking you if a folder is to be created is displayed If nothing is specified in the edit box an assemble list is output to the project folder with the extension of the assembly language source file name changed to v To specify another output destination specify a folder name in the edit box If a file name is specified for Setting of global options an assembler list for the source compiled last is output because the same file name is overwritten A file name can be specified when a file name is specified for Individual Source Options Setting 4 Size Threshold of sdata sbss Section Allocation G Use this area to specify the upp
514. ug Information Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others Any Option Temporary Directory temp Browse I Use Command File Command Line Option E 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Any Option This edit box is used to specify options that cannot be set by setting in Compiler Options described above Describe an option in this edit box in the same manner as on the command line At present only this option can be specified as Any Option Xv850patch Other options can be specified but are not supported at present 2 Temporary Directory temp This edit area is used to specify a work folder where a temporary file to be used internally is to be generated If this option is omitted the temporary file is generated as the environmental variable TEMP or in the root folder of current drive An error that may occur because the capacity of the hard disk runs short and a temporary file cannot be generated can be avoided by using this option If the specified folder does not exist a message asking you if a folder is to be created is displayed User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 109 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 Use Command File In the Windows environment the length of character strings used to specify options for the ca850 is restricted If this check box is selected the option character string is output to a command file which enables the operation to be completed with
515. ult files Refer to 14 6 1 Output result files 2 Stack size specification file Refer to 14 6 2 Stack size specification file 3 stk system file Refer to 14 6 3 stk system file 384 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 14 3 Operation Method This section describes the operation methods for the stk850 Follow the steps below to start the stk850 from PM 1 Specify the Assembler Source Fs in the General tab of the Compiler Options dialog box and then rebuild 2 Select Tool Startup STK850 The Main window of the stk850 then appears showing the result of stack size calculation for the current project Caution To calculate the stack sizes the intermediate assembly language files are required User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 385 CHAPTER 14 STACK USAGE TRACER 14 4 Window Reference The stk850 has following windows and dialog boxes Table 14 1 Windows and Dialog Boxes of stk850 Window Dialog Box Name Description Main window Window that appears first after the stk850 starts up Displays the stack size for each function Adjust Stack Size dialog Dialog box to specify additional stack size information of functions box Stack Size Unknown Dialog box that shows stack size unknown functions and adjusted func Adjusted Function Lists tions dialog box About stk850 dialog box Dialog box that shows the version of the stk850 386 User s Manual
516. ults This option outputs the as850 s version number to standard error output and then terminates processing zf This options performs assembly processing on the Flash External ROM side when the Flash External ROM relink function has been used for the assembly language source file If this option is omitted assembly processing is performed on the Boot internal ROM side when the Flash External ROM relink function has been used for the assembly language source file There is no need to specify this option for assembly language source files that cannot use the Flash External ROM relink function Warning messages are not output concerning this option For details of the flash memory external ROM relink function refer to 5 6 Flash Memory External ROM Relink Function cfile This option handles cfile as a command file A command file specifies an option and a file name for a command not as arguments on the command line but by describing them in a file On Windows the length of a character string specified as an option of a command is limited If many options are set and some of the options cannot be recognized create a command file and specify this option For details of the command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 134 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER 4 5 Settings Made via PM This section describes dialog boxe that is used to set the command options of the as850 for the target project s source file Aft
517. umed that all sections are specified If a section is specified in the edit box below the variable allocated to that section is excluded from optimization To specify two or more sections delimit each by semicolon Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box Sections can be edited in this dialog box 2 Allocation Size of tidata Section size_tidata This option specifies the upper size limit of variables allocated to the tidata word tidata byte section when the Optimize Location O option is specified Specify size in decimal numbers 3 Allocation Size of tidata byte Section size_tidata_byte This option specifies the upper size limit of variables allocated to the tidata byte section when the Optimize Location O option is specified Specify size in decimal numbers 4 No Optimization Variable Xcv This option excludes variables from optimization when the O option is specified To specify two or more variables delimit each by semicolon Selecting the Edit button displays the Edit Option dialog box Variables can be edited in this dialog box User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 289 CHAPTER 9 SECTION FILE GENERATOR 5 Sort Variable This option specifies options related to sorting variables a Does Not Sort ns Variable names in the output section file are not sorted but are listed in the order in which they appeared b Sequence of Frequency Variables are sorted in des
518. unction function is ignored W2742 Function allocated in text can not be specified as direct Previously specified pragma text function is ignored Function specified as text section cannot be specified as interrupt in direct location direct The text section specification for a function function already specified is invalid W2743 Function allocated in text can not be inlined pragma inline function is ignored inline cannot be specified for a function specified as text section The inline specification for a function function is ignored W2744 Function allocated in text can not be inlined Previously specified pragma inline function is ignored text section is specified to a function specified as inline The inline specification for a function function already specified is invalid W2748 Section name is not specified The section name is not specified between single quotes when specifying the section name of a pragma section It is assumed that no section name is specified and allocated to the reserved section of the specified attribute W2761 unrecognized specifier specifier ignored Specifier specifier cannot be recognized This specifier is ignored W2780 result of comparison is always false The result of the comparison expression is false W2782 statement with no effect There is a statement without meaning W2784 Conversion may lose significant digit The data may
519. unction is used or if the application is assembled in common for the V850 core V850Ex core V850E2 core a warning message is output when this option is specified and this option is ignored This option is used to determine the address of a programmable peripheral I O register when an application is compiled assembled and does not reflect the actual value on the BPC register To execute an operation a value must be set to the BPC register separately by using the startup module Refer to CA850 for C Language User s Manual for a sample of the startup routine The startup module included in the package also has a commented sample Example If the part of the start address of the programmable peripheral I O register that can be modified is 0x1234 when the V850E IA1 is used and if the flag 0x8000 that enables use of this function is set make the following description in the startup module mov 0x9234 r10 0x1234 0x8000 0x9234 st hr10 BPC The as850 outputs the reserved section bpc if this option is specified or if a programmable peripheral O register is actually referenced even if this option is omitted This section is used for checking while the linker is being executed The bpc section is a special section reserved for information and is not loaded to memory Therefore it does not have to be described in the link directive as is the case with a normal section 3 Security ID This edit box is used to set the se
520. urn statement at the end of a function calls the function itself tail recursion optimization converts that function into a loop and reduces the stack used for function calling Inline expansion expands the body of a function at the part calling the function increasing the possibility of optimization and preventing the overhead for calling Loop expansion expands the loop body two or more times to increase the possibility of optimization and prevent the overhead for conditional judgment and branch Inline expansion and loop expansion increase the object size and improve the execution speed When Ot is specified and a function including an asm statement defining a label is used the same label is defined at the part of function definition and inline expansion In this case a label multiple definition error occurs The function specified by pragma block_interrupt pragma interrupt pragma rtos_task or pragma text is not subject to inline expansion In this case no message is output 120 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER If a function including an asm statement on which inline expansion is not expected to be executed is used such as manipulation of a stack frame an execution error may occur because an illegal function frame manipulation takes place Caution If the size is increased too much by the Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed adjust inline expansion and loop expansion by using the options Wp Gnum and
521. used in the macro name 4 Limit of Number of Macro Xm This specifies a decimal number of up to 32767 as the upper limit of the number of macro identifiers The default value is 2047 This option is used to expand the size of the buffer used by the preprocessor However a concrete value such as the number of characters secured for the buffer cannot be obtained 5 Preserve Preprocessor Comment C This check box is used to include the comments of the source program in the preprocessing output of a C language source program This box is valid only when the Preprocessed Source on Output File tab is specified 6 Use Trigraph t This replaces the trigraph seriesN Note The trigraph series replaced with a single character as prescribed in the ANSI standard Refer to documents related to the ANSI standard 7 Use C Style Comment Xcxxcom In addition to ordinary comments this allows any text from to the end of the line to be handled as comments C comment style 8 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 87 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER C Language This tab is used to set options related to C language specifications Figure 3 14 Compiler Options Dialog Box C Language Tab Compiler Options Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Co
522. ut for each source 4 Command Line Option This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 91 1 92 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Detail of Optimization This tab is used to set options related to optimization in phase units Figure 3 16 Compiler Options Dialog Box Detail of Optimization Tab Compiler Options General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Output Code Message Assembler Others Inline Expansion M Sort External Variable wo Op f Control of Inline Expansion zi Code Threshold Wp N I Save Memory of Preoptimizer wp D Stack Threshold wp G a Expand Static Function Wp 5 r F Output Function Report wp_ l TT Loop Unrolling r Command Line Option e 3107 g Cancel Apply Help Inline Expansion a Control of Inline Expansion This controls the overall inline expansion specified by the inline and no_inline option of the pre optimizer b Code Threshold Wp N This limits the intermediate language size of a function subject to inline expansion to the specified number of bytes and does not execute inline expansion of a function exceeding this number of bytes For a code size guideline refer to Output Function Report Wp l below
523. utions Specifying multiple options Some options become invalid if they are specified at the same time as certain other options Of the following options those on the right of the gt symbol become invalid if they are specified with the options shown on the left of the gt symbol E gt P U gt D E P gt G L O R S Wce a c m o Since execution is terminated during preprocessing the options related to the modules following the front end are invalid S gt L R Wf all a c Since execution is terminated at the code generation module or the machine dependent optimization mod ule the options related to the modules following the as850 are invalid V help Any option that is specified after this is invalid Moreover once this option is specified all the other options become invalid c gt L R WI I Since execution is terminated at the as850 the options related to the modules following the Id850 are invalid m gt G L O R S Wc a c l Since execution is terminated at the front end the options related to the modules following the pre opti mizer are invalid Og O Os Ot gt a If Og O Os or Ot has been specified an incorrect display may result Od Ob O Og Os Ot Any option that is specified after this is valid w w 1 2 Any option specified before this is invalid User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 115 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 3 7 2 Command file Instead of specifying o
524. verter hx850 Archiver ar850 Section file generator sf850 Dump command dump850 Disassembler dis850 Cross reference tool cxref Memory layout visualization tool rammap Stack estimation tool stk850 How to Read This Manual e The name of each program in the C compiler package is referred to as follows in this manual C compiler package CA850 Assembler as850 C compiler ca850 6 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM Related Documents Read this manual together with the following documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Documents related to development tools user s manuals CA850 Ver 3 20 C Compiler Package User Open Interface U18212E RX850 Ver 3 20 or Later Real Time OS RX850V4 Ver 4 22 Real Time OS User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 7 MEMO 8 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 20 1 1 Features of Compiler Package 20 1 2 Operating Environments 22 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 23 2 1 Installation 23 2 2 Folder Organization 24 2 2 1 Folder organization of stack usage tracer 25 2 3 Uninstallation 26 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 27 3 1 Flow of Operation 27 3 2 Input Output Files 29 3 3 Executable Object 30 3 4 Operation Method 32 3 4 1 Command input method 32 3 4 2 Method using PM 32 3 5 Types and Features o
525. wing external variables must not be specified volatile variable Variable using address operator amp Structure Array Internally coupled variable static Peripheral I O register The definition temporary definition and declaration of the specified external variable are deleted To use the default value of an external variable if initialization is not executed at the beginning of program execution assign a default value to a register using the startup file Example int T If reg26 r19 i is specified in a source file defined above a default value is assigned to the register as follows mov 1 r19 set i Caution Optimization debugging cannot be executed Register window is used because the debug information of the specified external variable is also deleted User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 97 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER Output File This tab is used to set options related to the output file Figure 3 19 Compiler Options Dialog Box Output File Tab Compiler Options General Input File Preprocessor C Language Optimization and Debug Information Detail of Optimization External Register Output File Dutput Code Message Assembler Others r Browse Assemble List Fy Browse Frequency Information File cre_sec_datal Bites Preprocessed Source Command Line Option e 3107 g Cancel Apply Help 1 Assembler Sourc
526. witch statement is long Two byte branch tables are generated if this option is omitted User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 6 Structure packing control options Xbyte PM This option specifies indirect address access to a structure in byte units Use this option if a limit is exceeded when the structure packing function is used Xpack num PM By using this option the specified alignment can be used without aligning structure members in accordance with the type of each member The data size can be reduced but the code size increases 1 2 4 or 8 can be specified as num The default value is 8N te If this option is specified if structure packing is specified by the pragma directive in the C language source the value specified by this option is applied to all structures until the first pragma directive appears After that the value of the pragma directive is applied Even after the pragma directive has appeared however the value specified by the option is applied if the default value is specified This option must not be specified with Xi option Note the following when using this option a If Xpack option is specified when structure packing is specified by the pragma directive in the C lan guage source the value specified by the option is applied to all structures until the first pragma pack directive appears After that the value of the pragma directive is applied Even after the pragma
527. x is used to specify an option other than those described above in the Linker Options dialog box Describe an option in this edit box in the same manner as on the command line At present it is not necessary to use other options because all the options related to the linker can be set on the Linker Options dialog box 2 Use Command File In the Windows environment the length of character strings used to specify options for the ca850 is restricted If this check box is selected the option character string is output to a command file which enables the operation to be completed without observing the restriction on the character string length Check this check box if many options are set and not all of them can be recognized Under the default setting the check box is not checked For the details of command file refer to 3 7 2 Command file 3 Command Line Options This area displays the options set in this dialog box by command line options This area is for reference and cannot be written to User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 177 CHAPTER 5 LINKER 5 5 Link Map This section describes the link map output by the Id850 A link map is where link result related information is written It can be referenced for information such as a section s allocation addresses Link map output methods are described below 5 5 1 When starting the Id850 from the command line If the link map s display option m has been specified link map is
528. xpression Simplify the expression F3508 identifier undefined An undefined identifier identifier is referenced F3509 illegal pseudo string found An unexpected quasi directive string has been found F3510 string unexpected No quasi directive corresponding to the string quasi directive has been found F3511 string unmatched Quasi directive string corresponding to a conditional assembly quasi directive does not exist F3512 if ifn etc too deeply nested Conditional assembly quasi directives are nested 17 times or more F3513 unexpected EOF in string The endm quasi directive corresponding to the string quasi directive was not found F3514 parameter table overflow Thirty three or more actual parameters are used F3515 string not in repeat irepeat The string quasi directive is not enclosed by repeat assemble quasi directives F3516 local symbol value overflow The number of symbols generated by the local quasi directive has exceeded the limit 65536 F3517 string nest over string is nested more than nine times F3518 unreasonable macro_call nesting A macro currently being defined is called in a macro body F3519 argument mismatch The argument specified for the macro call is illegal F3520 must be followed by defined symbol An identifier name or undefined symbol name other than a symbol is specified after F3521 too many errors The number of fatal errors has reached
529. y Settings related to flash memory when library is created Device Setting of options related to device User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 69 CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER This tab is used to make settings related to output files Figure 3 2 Compiler Common Options Dialog Box File Tab Compiler Common Options File Startup Link Directive ROM Flash Device Intermediate Output Directory i Browse Einal Output Directory aa Browse Error File Browse This edit box can be specified a directory which object files assembler source files assemble list files frequency information files and external variable file are output Assembler source files assemble list files and frequency information files are output there when directory name or file name is specified by the option External variable file is output there when file name with path is specified by the option Cancel F Help 1 Intermediate Output Directory This edit box is used to set an intermediate output folder The intermediate output folder is a folder to which object files assembly language source files assemble list files frequency information files and external variable files are output 2 Final Output Directory This edit box is used to set a final output folder The final output folder is a folder to which executable object files hex files archive files link map files error files and section files
530. y arguments for this processing system is 255 F2105 compiler limit too long file name file num The name of the file file is too long The maximum file name length for this processing system is 1024 F2106 Non empty file must end in new line character A file that is not empty must be terminated with a carriage return F2110 unknown character character An illegal character character is used F2112 compiler limit too many characters in logical source line num The number of characters in the logical source line exceeds the limit The maximum number of characters for this processing system is 32768 F2115 non terminated string literal symbol for closing a string literal is missing F2119 compiler limit string buffer overflow num Compiler limit The character string buffer has overflown The maximum value for this processing system is 32768 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 429 APPENDIX B MESSAGE F2120 compiler limit preprocessor token buffer overflow num The length of the expanded character string in the macro definition exceeds the limit the buffer capacity is num characters too small Remark This message is output if the length of an expanded character string of a macro definition exceeds the limit Change the limit value by using the option Xmnum num is 2047 if Xm is omitted It can be up to 32767 if Xmnum is specified that increases the upper limit number of macro definitions Thi
531. y specified F9709 Executable file does not provide symbol information Symbol table does not exist for file to be analyzed F9710 Executable file does not provide data object information No variable exists for file to be analyzed F9711 Ss not found range Range not specified by r option F9712 Ss invalid range Value beyond option range specified by r option F9713 s invalid end address End address specified by r option illegal F9714 Ss not spevified path Output path not specified by r option F9715 s not specified file name Output file not specified by r option 484 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE W9751 Ss invalid option ignored Invalid option s specified C9790 s Compile error s generated C9791 null pointer access Access to NULL pointer attempted C9792 index out of range Access beyond array range attempted User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 485 APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 2 Messages from PM This section explains the message dialog box that is displayed when the CA850 package is activated from PM B 2 1 Format of message The message dialog box shown in Figure B 1 displays messages when the CA850 package is activated from PM Figure B 1 Example of Message Dialog Box Compiler Options d C sample flash boot Directory of assembler source is not exist make it B 2 2 Messages common to compiler Boot Object File
532. y used by functions because it is the size in the intermediate language output by the pre optimizer Wp r _funcname Given the funcname function as the entry function this deletes the functions called by this function that are no longer needed after expansion Enter a at the start of the function name specified in funcname If funcname is omitted _main is assumed as the specification Functions that are called only by assembly language programs are not recognized as called functions and are instead deleted as unnecessary functions However interrupt functions and real time OS tasks are not included as functions subject to deletion Wp inline Executes inline expansion of only the function for which pragma inline is specified Wp no_ inline Suppresses inline expansion of all functions including the function for which pragma inline is specified User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 65 2 Global optimization opt Wo O1 num CHAPTER 3 C COMPILER 66 This option expands a loop num times using for and while This option can be specified only for Level 2 Advanced option Exec Speed The loop is converted into execution of a loop that is executed N times N is a constant and execution of a loop that includes a code expanded num times If the code size after expansion is too great or if the number of times of execution of the loop is too few the number of times of expansion may decrease or the loop may not b
533. ype is S2 b Load address 24 bitsNot c Code 1 byte expressed as two digit hexadecimal number Note Range is 0x0 to Oxffffff 3 3 record This record indicates the value of a code S3 LL AAAAAAAA DD DD SS NL a b c a Record type is S3 b Load address 32 bitsN c Code 1 byte expressed as two digit hexadecimal number Note Range is 0x0 to Oxffffffff 4 S7 record This record indicates an entry point address S7 LL AAAAAAAA SS NL a b a Record type is S7 b Entry point address 32 bitsN t Note Range is 0x0 to Oxffffffff 5 S8 record This record indicates an entry point address S8 LL AAAAAA SS NL a b a Record type is S8 b Entry point address 24 bits Note Range is 0x0 to Oxffffff 258 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 7 6 3 Expanded Tek CHAPTER 7 HEXADECIMAL CONVERTER A file in the expanded Tek hex format consists of three types of blocks a data block symbol block and termination block The following figure shows the file configuration of the expanded Tek hex format Figure 7 7 File Configuration of Expanded Tek Hex Format Data block Data block Symbol block Symbol block Termination block Each block consists of the following fields ole a b c d LL T SS field field NL a Header character ock len number of characters in
534. yzer dialog box that is used to set the cross reference options can be displayed via the following methods once a project has been established under PM Select Tool Static performance analyzer then click the Cross reference tab Since the cross reference tool is activated once per project there are no file specific settings 326 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 4 Types and Features of Options The cxref options are shown below These are presented separately for each kind of output information User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM 327 CHAPTER 12 CROSS REFERENCE TOOL 12 4 1 Common options The cxref common options are shown below V This option outputs the version number of cxref and then terminates processing all This option outputs all information to a text format file and CSV format file This option has the same result as when x t c cc m mc b bc is specified cpp850 This option processes the C language source file after it is passed through the ca850 preprocessor This option and all subsequent options are passed as the ca850 options Therefore this option must be specified as the last cross reference tool option Setting c option that works to include comments of the source programs with the preprocessor is recom mended so that line numbers are output correctly Example gt cxref t cpp850 cpu 3201 DDEBUG I myinc main c sub c The above o
535. ze of ROM Area is illegal Do not use any characters other than hexadecimal numbers or a value exceeding the range as the size of a ROM area Start Address of ROM Area is illegal Do not use any characters other than hexadecimal numbers or a value exceeding the range as the start address of a ROM area cannot use semicolon Do not use semicolon for an option for which two or more items can be input B 2 8 Archiver Archive File is illegal Do not use an illegal character in the extension and blanks in an archive file name B 2 9 Section file generator Allocatable Size of tidata Section is illegal Do not use any characters other than decimal numbers as the allocation size of the tidata section Allocatable Size of tidata byte Section is illegal Do not use any characters other than decimal numbers as the allocation size of the tidata byte section Output File is illegal Do not use illegal characters in the extension and blanks in an output file name The extension of the file does not exist Build might not be executed correctly An extension is necessary for a file name Without an extension build processing may not be executed correctly cannot open device file The device file cannot be opened correctly 490 User s Manual U18512EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B MESSAGE B 2 10 Cross reference tool and memory layout visualization tool F102 Reading the specified file has failed The name o

CA850 Ver. 3.20 C Compiler Package Operation UM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents